OWNER’S MANUAL

Integrated High Definition

Compatible with Toshiba’s new
DLP™ Projection Television TM

Audio/Video Hard Drive Recorder!

See pages 26 and 55 for details.
HIGH-DEFINITION TELEVISION

For an overview of steps for setting up your new TV, see page 9.
Note: A high definition tuner and programming are required to view High
Definition TV broadcasts. Please contact your cable or satellite provider.
CONSUMER PR
CA
Note: It may take several minutes for the picture to appear on-screen RI
OD
E
TOSHIBA AM

UCT

if the TV is powered off and then on again quickly when the lamp unit
S, L.L.C.

is hot. This is a property of DLP TV lamp technology and is NOT a sign

of malfunction. For details, see “IMPORTANT NOTICE ABOUT HOT
LAMP RESTART” on page 5. O
IS

45

140 6
01 FILE N o. A 9

Owner’s Record
56MX195 The model number and serial number are on the back
of your TV. Record these numbers in the spaces below.

62MX195 Refer to these numbers whenever you communicate

with your Toshiba dealer about this TV.
Model number:
72MX195 Serial number:

© 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION YC/N 23566730

All Rights Reserved
Dear Customer,
Thank you for purchasing this Toshiba TV. This manual will
help you use the many exciting features of your new TV.
Before operating the TV, please read this manual
completely, and keep it nearby for future reference.
Safety Precautions
WARNING: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC
SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS APPLIANCE TO RAIN OR
MOISTURE.
WARNING
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK!
DO NOT OPEN.
WARNING: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK,
DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-
SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO
QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL. (This does not apply to “Lamp
unit replacement and care” on pages 128–130 of this manual.)
The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within an
equilateral triangle, is intended to alert the user to the
presence of uninsulated “dangerous voltage” within the
product’s enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude
to constitute a risk of electric shock to persons.
The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is
intended to alert the user to the presence of important
operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in the
literature accompanying the appliance.
Lamp Unit Replacement
CAUTION: HOT SURFACE!
The temperature of the lamp
immediately after use exceeds
392°F (200°C). Touching the
lamp before it has cooled will result in severe burns. ALLOW
THE LAMP TO COOL FOR AT LEAST ONE (1) HOUR BEFORE
REPLACING IT.
The lamp in this product has a limited service life. The length of
service life varies depending on product use and user settings.
If you use the lamp beyond its service life:
• you may notice a reduction in the colors and/or brightness of
the picture, at which time you should replace the lamp unit; and
• the strength of the quartz glass in the lamp will be reduced
and the lamp may rupture. If the lamp ruptures, the TV will
not operate until the lamp unit is replaced.
See “Lamp unit replacement and care”
on pages 128–130.
Dispose of the used lamp unit by the approved method for
your area.
Note: The lamp unit contains mercury.
Disposal of mercury may be regulated due to
environmental considerations. For disposal or recycling
information, contact your local authorities or the Electronic
Industries Alliance (www.eiae.org).
2
NOTICE OF POSSIBLE TV STAND INSTABILITY
CAUTION: This television is for use only with
the Toshiba stand listed below. Use with other
carts or stands is capable of resulting in instability
causing possible injury.
Television Stand Model
56MX195 ST 5695
62MX195 ST 6295
72MX195 ST 7295
NOTE TO CATV INSTALLERS IN THE U.S.A.
This is a reminder to call the CATV system installer’s attention to Article
820-40 of the U.S. NEC, which provides guidelines for proper grounding
and, in particular, specifies that the cable ground shall be connected to
the grounding system of the building, as close to the point of cable entry
as practical. For additional antenna grounding information, see items 27
and 28 on page 4.
Child Safety
It Makes A Difference
Where Your TV Stands
Congratulations on your purchase!
As you enjoy your new TV, keep these safety tips in mind:
The Issue

If you are like most consumers, you have a TV in your home. Many homes,
in fact, have more than one TV.

The home theater entertainment experience is a growing trend, and larger
TVs are popular purchases; however, they are not always supported on
the proper TV stands.

Sometimes TVs are improperly secured or inappropriately
situated on dressers, bookcases, shelves, desks, audio speakers,
chests, or carts. As a result, TVs may fall over, causing
unnecessary injury.
Toshiba Cares!

The consumer electronics industry is committed to
making home entertainment enjoyable and safe.

The Consumer Electronics Association formed the
Home Entertainment Support Safety Committee, comprised
of TV and consumer electronics furniture manufacturers, to
advocate children’s safety and educate consumers and their
families about television safety.
Tune Into Safety

One size does NOT fit all! Use appropriate furniture large enough to
support the weight of your TV (and other electronic components).

Use appropriate angle braces, straps, and anchors to secure your furniture
to the wall (but never screw anything directly into the TV).

Carefully read and understand the other enclosed instructions for proper
use of this product.

Do not allow children to climb on or play with furniture and TVs.

Avoid placing any item on top of your TV (such as a VCR, remote control,
or toy) that a curious child may reach for.

Remember that children can become excited while watching a program
and can potentially push or pull a TV over.

Share our safety message about this hidden hazard of the home with
your family and friends. Thank you!
2500 Wilson Blvd.
Arlington, VA 22201 U.S.A.
Tel. 703-907-7600 Fax 703-907-7690
www.CE.org
CEA is the Sponsor, Producer and
Manager of the International CES®
Important Safety Instructions
1) Read these instructions.
2) Keep these instructions.
3) Heed all warnings.
4) Follow all instructions.
5) Do not use this apparatus near water.
6) Clean only with a dry cloth.
7) Do not block any ventilation openings. Install in
accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.
8) Do not install near any heat sources such as radiators,
heat registers, stoves, or other apparatus (including
amplifiers) that produce heat.
9) Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or
grounding type plug. A polarized plug has two blades
with one wider than the other. A grounding type plug has
two blades and a third grounding Wide blade
prong. The wide blade or the third
prong are provided for your safety.
If the provided plug does not fit into
your outlet, consult an electrician
for replacement of the obsolete outlet.
10) Protect the power cord from being
walked on or pinched, particularly at
plugs, convenience receptacles, and
the point where it exits the apparatus.
11) Only use attachments/accessories specified by the
manufacturer.
12) Use only with the cart, stand, tripod,
bracket, or table specified by the
manufacturer, or sold with the
apparatus. When a cart is used, use
caution when moving the cart/apparatus
combination to avoid injury from tip-over.
13) Unplug this apparatus during lightning storms or
when unused for long periods of time.
14) Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel.
Servicing is required when the apparatus has been
damaged in any way, such as power-supply cord or plug
is damaged, liquid has been spilled or objects have fallen
into the apparatus, the apparatus has been exposed to
rain or moisture, does not operate normally, or has been
dropped.
14a) Item 14 does not apply to “Lamp unit replacement and
care” on pages 128-130 of this manual.
14b) CAUTION: If the TV is dropped and the cabinet or
enclosure surface has been damaged or the TV does
not operate normally, take the following precautions:
• ALWAYS turn off the TV and unplug the power cord to
avoid possible electric shock or fire.
• To prevent personal injury, never handle the damaged
television.
• ALWAYS contact a service technician to inspect the TV
any time it has been damaged or dropped.
15) CAUTION: To reduce the risk of electric shock, do not
use the polarized plug with an extension cord, receptacle,
or other outlet unless the blades can be inserted completely
to prevent blade exposure.
16) WARNING: This product contains a lamp to project
the picture, and requires special safety precautions:
• See pages 128–130 for instructions on lamp unit
replacement and care.
• DO NOT attempt to service this product except as
specified on pages 128–130. The only user-
serviceable item in this product is the lamp unit.
Installation, Care, and Service
Installation
Follow these recommendations and precautions and heed all
warnings when installing your TV:
17) Never modify this equipment. Changes or modifications
may void: a) the warranty, and b) the user’s authority to
operate this equipment under the rules of the Federal
Communications Commission.
18) DANGER: RISK OF SERIOUS PERSONAL
INJURY, DEATH, OR EQUIPMENT
DAMAGE! Never place the TV on
an unstable cart, stand, or table. The TV
may fall, causing serious personal injury,
death, or serious damage to the TV.
19) Never place or store the TV in direct sunlight; hot, humid
areas; areas subject to excessive dust or vibration; or
locations with temperatures at or below 41°F (5°C).
20) Always place the TV on the applicable optional TV
stand(s) listed in the “Specifications” section (if available
for this TV model) or on a sturdy, level, stable surface that
can safely support the size and weight of the unit. See
“Notice of possible TV stand instability” and “Child Safety”
on page 2.
21) Never expose the apparatus to dripping or splashing or
place items such as vases, aquariums, any other item filled
with liquid, or candles on top of the TV.
22) Always place the back of the television at least one (1)
inch away from any vertical surface (such as a wall) to
allow proper ventilation.
23) Never block or cover the slots or openings in the TV
cabinet back, bottom, and sides. Never place the TV:
• on a bed, sofa, rug, or similar surface;
• too close to drapes, curtains, or walls; or
• in a confined space such as a bookcase, built-in cabinet,
or any other place with poor ventilation.
The slots and openings are provided to protect the TV
from overheating and to help maintain reliable operation
of the TV.
24) Never allow anything to rest on or roll over the power
cord, and never place the TV where the power cord is
subject to wear or abuse.
25) Never overload wall outlets and extension cords.
26) Always operate this equipment from a 120 VAC, 60 Hz
power source only.
(continued on next page)
3
Installation (continued from previous page)
27) Always make sure the antenna system is properly
grounded to provide adequate protection against voltage
surges and built-up static charges (see Section 810 of the
National Electric Code).
Antenna lead-in wire
Antenna discharge unit
(NEC Section 810-20)
Ground clamp
Grounding conductors
Electric service equipment
(NEC Section 810-21)
Power service grounding
Ground clamps
electrode system (NEC Art 250 Part-H)
28) DANGER: RISK OF SERIOUS PERSONAL
INJURY OR DEATH!
• Use extreme care to make sure you are never in
a position where your body (or any item you are in contact
with, such as a ladder or screwdriver) can accidentally
touch overhead power lines. Never locate the antenna
near overhead power lines or other electrical circuits.
• Never attempt to install any of the following during
lightning activity: a) an antenna system; or b) cables,
wires, or any home theater component connected to an
antenna or phone system.
Care
For better performance and safer operation of your TOSHIBA
TV, follow these recommendations and precautions:
29) Always sit approximately 10–25 feet away from the TV and
as directly in front of it as possible. The picture can appear
dull if you sit too far to the left or right of the TV, or if
sunlight or room lights reflect on the screen. Turn the TV
off to check for reflections on the screen, and then remove
the source of reflections while viewing the TV.
30) Always unplug the TV before cleaning. Never use liquid or
aerosol cleaners. Clean only with a soft, dry cloth.
Do not spray volatile compounds, such as insecticide, on
the cabinet. This may discolor or damage the cabinet.
31) WARNING: RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK!
Never spill liquids or push objects of any
kind into the TV cabinet slots.
32) If the air temperature rises suddenly (for example, when
the TV is first delivered), condensation may form on the
lenses. This can make the picture appear distorted or the
color appear faded. If this happens, turn off the TV for 6 to
7 hours to allow the condensation to evaporate.
4
Care (continued from previous column)
33) For added protection of your TV from lightning and power
surges, always unplug the power cord and disconnect the
antenna from the TV if you leave the TV unattended or
unused for long periods of time.
34) During normal use, the TV may make occasional snapping
or popping sounds. This is normal, especially when the
unit is being turned on or off. If these sounds become
frequent or continuous, unplug the power cord
and contact a Toshiba Authorized Service Center.
35) Special care for DLP™ (Digital Light Processing) units:
• The lamp unit in this product has a limited service life.
The length of service life varies depending on product
use or user settings. If you use the lamp beyond its
service life:
• you may notice a reduction in the colors and/or
brightness of the picture, at which time you should
replace the lamp unit; and
• the strength of the quartz glass in the lamp will be
reduced and the lamp may rupture. If the lamp
ruptures, the TV will not operate until the lamp unit is
replaced.
See “Lamp unit replacement and care” on pages 128–130.
• Dispose of the used lamp unit by the approved method for
your area.
• The lamp unit contains mercury. Disposal of
mercury may be regulated due to environmental
considerations. For disposal or recycling
information, please contact your local authorities or
the Electronic Industries Alliance (www.eiae.org).
Service
36) WARNING: RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK!
Never attempt to service the TV yourself,
except as specified on pages 128–130.
Opening and removing the covers may expose you to
dangerous voltage or other hazards. Failure to follow this
WARNING may result in death or serious injury. Refer all
servicing not specified in this manual to a Toshiba Authorized
Service Center.
37) If you have the TV serviced:
• Ask the service technician to use only replacement parts
specified by the manufacturer.
• Upon completion of service, ask the service technician to
perform routine safety checks to determine that the TV is
in safe operating condition.
38) When the TV reaches the end of its useful life, ask a
qualified service technician to properly dispose of the TV.
Note: The lamp unit contains mercury. Disposal of mercury may
be regulated due to environmental considerations. Dispose of
the used lamp unit by the approved method for your area.
For disposal or recycling information, please contact your local
authorities or the Electronic Industries Alliance (www.eiae.org).
_______________
Digital Light Processing, DLP™ and the DLP medallion are
trademarks of Texas Instruments.
FCC Declaration of Conformity Compliance Statement (Part 15):
The Toshiba 56MX195, 62MX195, and 72MX195 DLP™
projection TVs comply with Part 15 of the FCC rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device
may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference that may cause undesired operation.
there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular
installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to
radio or television reception, which can be determined by removing
and applying power to the equipment, the user is encouraged to try
to correct the interference by one or more of the following
measures:

The party responsible for compliance to these rules is:
Toshiba America Consumer Products, L.L.C.
82 Totowa Rd. Wayne, NJ 07470.
Ph: (973) 628-8000
Note: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with
the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC
rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection
against harmful interference in a residential installation. This
equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy
and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions,
may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However,
• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
• Increase the separation between the equipment and the
receiver.
• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from
that to which the receiver is connected.
• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for
help.
CAUTION: Changes or modifications to this equipment not
expressly approved by Toshiba could void the user’s authority to
operate this equipment.

Important notes about your DLPTM projection TV

1) The light source for this TV is a projection lamp unit with a
limited service life. When the lamp wears out, the picture may
become dark or black or the lamp may fail, at which time you
must replace the lamp unit. See “Lamp unit replacement and
care” on pages 128–130.
2) If you set the lamp mode to Low Power, each time you turn on
the TV, the lamp will start out in High Bright mode but will
switch to Low Power mode in approximately 1 minute. You will
notice a change in screen brightness when this happens. This is
normal and is not a sign of malfunction. (See page 80 for
details.)
3) Every time you turn on the TV, it may take several minutes for
the picture to obtain full brightness.
4) This TV’s display is manufactured using an extremely high level
of precision technology; however, an occasional pixel (dot of
light) may show constantly on the screen. This is a structural
property of DLP™ (Digital Light Processing™) technology in the
TV and is not a sign of malfunction. Such pixels are not visible
when the picture is viewed from a normal viewing distance (see
item 29 on page 4).
5) Depending on the media you are viewing, it is possible, although
unlikely, that a limited number of viewers may see a “rainbow
effect” on the screen, which can, in rare instances, result in eye
fatigue. This is a rare occurrence related to technology of this
type and is not a sign of TV malfunction.
6) Always sit approximately 10–25 feet away from the TV and as
directly in front of it as possible. The picture quality may be
affected by your viewing position and length of viewing time. If
you sit too closely to the TV for too long, you may suffer from
eye fatigue. See item 29 on page 4.
7) This TV contains several cooling fans to moderate the
internal temperature. You may be able to hear the fans
for several minutes after the TV is turned off. This is a
function of the Quick Restart™ feature and is not a sign of TV
malfunction. You can set the Quick Restart™ feature to stop the
fans as soon as the TV is turned off. See “Setting the Quick
Restart™ feature” on page 56.
8) The yellow and blue LED lights at the bottom center of the TV
front indicate your TV’s current status. If either light flashes, see
“LED indications” on page 124 for details.
9) If you unplug the power cord, when you plug the power cord in
again the message “Now Booting…” will display on the screen
until the picture appears or the yellow LED will blink until the TV
enters standby mode (plugged in but not powered on). This is
normal and is not a sign of malfunction.
10) When connecting an external A/V device, if you connect the
device’s video output to the TV and the device’s audio output to
a separate audio system, the picture and sound may not
synchronize completely.
11) When playing a video game on this TV, there may be a slight
delay between your command (e.g., joystick, keyboard) and the
picture movement on the screen.

IMPORTANT NOTICE ABOUT “HOT LAMP RESTART”

When the TV has been powered on long enough for the lamp unit to get hot, it may take several minutes for the picture to appear on-screen
in the following situations:
• When the Quick Restart™ feature is set to OFF and you turn the TV off and then on again within a few minutes.
• If the TV is on when a short-term power failure, power surge, or other similar power failure occurs, such that the TV loses and regains
power within a few minutes.
This is a property of DLP TV lamp technology and is NOT a sign of malfunction.
If this occurs, the yellow LED on the TV front panel will blink (and the blue LED will be lit solid) until the TV is finished restarting the lamp
and the normal picture appears. If BOTH yellow and blue LEDs are blinking at a one-second rate, you will need to turn the TV off and then
on again to restart the lamp.

Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.

5
Contents
Important safety, care, and service information ............ 2-4
FCC Declaration of Conformity Compliance
Statement (Part 15): ........................................................... 5
Important notes about your DLP™ projection TV ............... 5
Chapter 1: Introduction .......................................................... 8
Welcome to Toshiba ........................................................... 8
Features of your new TV .................................................... 8
Overview of steps for installing, setting up, and
using your new TV ...................................................... 9 Programming channels automatically .......................... 47
Chapter 2: Connecting your TV ......................................... 10
TV front and side panel controls and connections ............ 10
TV back panel connections ................................................ 11
Overview of cable types ...................................................... 13
About the connection illustrations ...................................... 14
Connecting a digital CableCARD™ .................................... 14
Connecting a VCR and antenna or Cable TV
(no Cable box) ............................................................... 15
Connecting a camcorder ..................................................... 15
Connecting a VCR and Cable box ..................................... 16
Connecting a VCR and satellite receiver ............................. 17
Connecting a DVD player with S-video, a VCR,
and a Cable box .............................................................. 18
Connecting a DVD player with ColorStream®
(component video) and a VCR ....................................... 19
Connecting two VCRs ....................................................... 20
Connecting an HDMI™ or a DVI device to the
HDMI input .................................................................. 21
Connecting a device to the IR blaster (IR pass-through) ..... 22
Connecting a digital audio system ...................................... 24
Connecting an analog audio system .................................... 24
Connecting IEEE1394 video devices .................................. 25
Using analog-compatible IEEE1394 devices ................... 25
Supported signals ........................................................... 25
Using TheaterNet™ on-screen device control .................. 25
Connecting an AVHD (external hard drive) or D-VHS
digital recorder ........................................................... 26
IEEE1394 device initialization ....................................... 26
IEEE1394 device management ....................................... 27
G-LINK™ connection ........................................................ 28
Connecting a personal computer (PC) ............................... 29
Connecting a home network .............................................. 30
Chapter 3: Using the remote control ................................. 31
Learning about the remote control ..................................... 31
Installing the remote control batteries ................................. 33
Using the remote control MODE button to control
your other devices ........................................................... 33
Remote Control functional key chart ................................. 34
Programming the remote control to operate
your other devices ........................................................... 36
Multi-brand remote control device codes ............................ 38
Chapter 4: Menu layout and navigation ........................... 40
Main menu layout .............................................................. 40
Setup/Installation menu layout ........................................... 41
Navigating the menu system ............................................... 41
Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.
6
Chapter 5: TV Guide On Screen™ setup ............................ 42
Setting up the TV Guide On Screen™ system ..................... 42
TV Guide On Screen™ Reminder ...................................... 45
Turning off the TV Guide On Screen™
automatic display feature ................................................ 45
Chapter 6: Setting up your TV ............................................. 46
Selecting the menu language ............................................... 46
Configuring the antenna input sources ............................... 46
Programming channels into the TV’s channel memory ....... 47
Manually adding and deleting channels in the
channel memory ..................................................... 48
Programming your favorite channels .................................. 49
Setting up and using TheaterNet™ on-screen
device control ................................................................. 50
Setting up TheaterNet ................................................. 50
Using the TheaterNet control icons ............................. 51
TheaterNet IR device codes .................................. 52–54
Setting the AVHD device skip time .................................... 55
Setting the HDMI™ audio mode ........................................ 55
Setting the time and date .................................................... 55
Viewing the CableCARD™ menu ...................................... 56
Setting the Quick Restart™ feature ..................................... 56
Viewing the digital signal meter ......................................... 57
Viewing the system status ................................................... 57
Chapter 7: Using the TV Guide On Screen™
interactive program guide ............................................... 58
Setting up the TV Guide On Screen™ system ..................... 58
Navigating the TV Guide On Screen™ system .................... 59
TV Guide On Screen™ remote control functions ........ 59
Video Window ........................................................... 60
Panel Menus ............................................................... 60
Info Box ...................................................................... 61
TV Guide On Screen™ Icons ...................................... 61
TV Guide On Screen™ Services .......................................... 62
LISTINGS screen ....................................................... 62
SEARCH screen .......................................................... 63
RECORDINGS screen ............................................... 65
SCHEDULE screen .................................................... 66
Record features ........................................................... 66
Remind features .......................................................... 68
SETUP screen ............................................................. 70
Change system settings .......................................... 70
Change channel display ......................................... 70
Change default options .......................................... 71
Contents
Chapter 8: Using the TV’s features ..................................... 72
Selecting the video input source to view ............................. 72
Labeling the video input sources ......................................... 73
Tuning channels ................................................................. 74
Using the Channel Browser ™ ...................................... 74
Tuning your favorite channels ..................................... 76
Tuning to the next programmed channel .................... 76
Tuning to a specific channel (programmed or
unprogrammed) ...................................................... 76
Switching between two channels using
Channel Return ...................................................... 76
Switching between two channels using
SurfLock™ ............................................................... 76
Selecting the picture size ..................................................... 77
Scrolling the TheaterWide® picture
(TheaterWide 2 and 3 only) ............................................... 79
Using the auto aspect ratio feature ...................................... 79
Selecting the cinema mode (480i signals only) .................... 80
Selecting the lamp mode .................................................... 80
Using the POP features ...................................................... 81
Using the POP double-window feature ....................... 81
Switching the speaker audio (main or POP) ................ 82
POP double-window aspect ratio ................................ 82
Using the FREEZE feature ................................................. 83
Using the favorite channel scan feature ............................... 83
Adjusting the picture .......................................................... 84
Selecting the picture mode .......................................... 84
Adjusting the picture quality ....................................... 84
Using CableClear®/DNR (digital noise reduction) ...... 85
Selecting the color temperature ................................... 85
Using MPEG noise reduction ..................................... 86
Using dynamic contrast ............................................... 86
Using the closed caption mode ........................................... 87
Advanced closed captions ............................................ 87
Digital closed captions ................................................ 88
Adjusting the audio ............................................................ 89
Muting the sound ....................................................... 89
Using the digital audio selector ................................... 89
Selecting stereo/SAP broadcasts ................................... 89
Adjusting the audio quality ......................................... 90
Using the sub-bass system (SBS) ................................. 90
Using the StableSound® feature ................................... 90
Using the SRS WOW™ surround sound feature .......... 91
Using the Dolby Virtual with SRS TruSurround
sound feature .............................................................. 91
Turning off the built-in speakers ................................. 92
Selecting the optical audio output format ................... 92
Setting the On/Off Timer .................................................. 93
Setting the sleep timer ........................................................ 93
Using the PC setting feature ............................................... 94
Displaying TV setting information on-screen using RECALL ... 95
Understanding the auto power off feature ........................... 95
Understanding the last mode memory feature .................... 95
Using the Gray Level feature .............................................. 95
Chapter 9: Using the Locks menu ...................................... 96
Entering the PIN code ....................................................... 96
If you cannot remember your PIN code ............................. 96
Changing your PIN code ................................................... 96
Blocking TV programs and movies by rating (V-Chip) ......... 97
Blocking channels ............................................................... 98
Unlocking programs temporarily ........................................ 98
Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.
Locking video inputs .......................................................... 98
Using the GameTimer™ ..................................................... 99
Using the control panel lock feature ................................... 99
Chapter 10: Using the Picture Viewer
and Audio Player ............................................................. 100
Media specifications ......................................................... 100
File/folder name specifications .................................. 100
Picture Viewer/JPEG file specifications ..................... 100
Audio Player/MP3 file specifications ......................... 100
PC network specifications ......................................... 101
Memory card specifications ....................................... 101
Using the Picture Viewer .................................................. 102
Accessing JPEG files stored on a networked PC ........ 102
Accessing JPEG files stored on a memory card .......... 102
Viewing JPEG files on the TV .................................. 103
Using the Audio Player ..................................................... 103
Accessing MP3 files stored on a networked PC ......... 104
Accessing MP3 files stored on a memory card ........... 104
Playing MP3 audio files on the TV ........................... 105
Memory card care and handling ....................................... 105
Chapter 11: Using the THINC™ home network
feature ................................................................................ 106
A . Connect the TV to your home network ...................... 106
B . Set up the network address .......................................... 106
Automatically setting up the network address ............ 106
Manually setting up the network address .................. 107
Resetting the network address ................................... 108
C. Set up file sharing on your PC ..................................... 109
Compatible operating systems ................................... 109
Setting up file sharing on a PC with Microsoft®
Windows® XP Service Pack 1 or Service Pack 2 ..... 109
Setting up file sharing on a PC with Microsoft®
Windows® 2000 .................................................... 110
D. Set up file sharing on the TV ....................................... 111
E . Viewing/playing shared files on the TV ....................... 111
F . Set up e-mail scheduling ............................................. 112
Required information and services ............................ 112
Setting up e-mail scheduling ..................................... 112
Description of fields in the “E-mail Scheduling
Setup” window ...................................................... 114
G. Using e-mail scheduling .............................................. 116
E-mail parameters ..................................................... 116
Sending a request e-mail to the TV ........................... 116
Formatting a request e-mail ....................................... 116
Recognized tags ..................................................... 116
Tag and data formats ............................................. 116
Sample request e-mails .......................................... 117
Receiving an e-mail from the TV .............................. 118
Modifying an existing recording or reminder ............ 118
Chapter 12: Troubleshooting ............................................. 119
General troubleshooting ................................................... 119
Home network troubleshooting ........................................ 122
LED indications ............................................................... 124
TV Guide On Screen™ FAQ .................................... 125–127
Chapter 13: Appendix ......................................................... 128
Lamp unit replacement ............................................ 128–130
Specifications ................................................................... 131
Limited United States Warranty ....................................... 132
Limited Canada Warranty ................................................ 133
Index ....................................................................................... 135
7
 1 Introduction
Welcome to Toshiba
Thank you for purchasing this Toshiba TV, one of the most innovative DLP™ projection See “Important notes about your
TVs on the market. The goal of this manual is to guide you through setting up and DLP™ projection TV” on page 5.
operating your TV as quickly as possible.
• This manual applies to models 56MX195, 62MX195, and 72MX195. Before you start reading, check the model number on the
back of your TV.
• Instructions in this manual are based on using the remote control. You also can use the controls on the TV’s front and side
control panels if they have the same name as those referred to on the remote control. (MENU on the side panel functions as
ENTER when a menu is on-screen or when the TV Guide On Screen™ system is open.)
• The side panel and back panel provide terminals for connecting other equipment to your TV. See page 10 for TV control panel
and side panel details. See page 11 for back panel details. See pages 14–30 for instructions on connecting other devices to your
TV.
• Please read all safety and operating instructions in this manual carefully and keep this manual for future reference.

Features of your new TV

The following are just a few of the many exciting features of your new Toshiba widescreen, integrated HD, DLP™ projection TV:
• Integrated digital tuning (8VSB ATSC and QAM) eliminates the need for a separate digital converter set-top box (in most cases).
• TV Guide On Screen™ no-fee interactive program guide (Chapters 5 and 7).
• Digital CableCARD™ slot for viewing encrypted digital Cable TV programs (page 14).
• Digital recording by connecting a Toshiba Symbio™ Audio/Video Hard Drive Recorder or a D-VHS digital recording device
to one of the IEEE1394 jacks. You can record high definition and standard definition material from either tuner (page 25).
• Memory card slots [SD Memory Card, MultiMediaCard, Memory Stick, CompactFlash, xD-Picture Card™] for viewing JPEG
files as a “slide show” (page 103) and playing MP3 files (page 104).
• TheaterNet™ icons for on-screen control of external IR and IEEE1394 devices (page 50). Note: After you set up the TV Guide
• Two IEEE1394 ports for multi-device connection and control (page 25). On Screen™ system (Chapter 5),
the program guide opens
• Two HDMI (DVI) digital, high-definition multimedia interfaces (page 21). automatically by default when
• Two sets of ColorStream® HD high-resolution component video inputs (pages 17 and 19). you turn on the TV. You can turn off
• Dolby Digital (page 24), SRS WOW™ (page 91), and Dolby Virtual TruSurround (page 91), the automatic program guide (page
audio technologies. 45) and instead press the TV GUIDE
button on the remote control to
• Digital Audio Out optical audio connection (page 24). manually open the program guide.
• CableClear® DNR digital picture noise reduction (page 85).
• Double-window POP (page 81) and multi-window Favorites (page 83) features.
• PC IN (Analog RGB) for using the TV screen as the display for a PC (page 29).
• Internet (RJ-45) (THINC™) port for connecting the TV to a home network to enable file sharing (JPEG, MP3) and e-mail
scheduling of recordings and reminders (page 30).

______________
In the United States, TV Guide and other related marks are registered marks of Gemstar-TV Guide International, Inc. and/or one of its affiliates. In Canada, TV Guide is a registered
mark of Transcontinental Inc., and is used under license by Gemstar-TV Guide International, Inc. The TV Guide On Screen system is manufactured under license from Gemstar-TV
Guide International, Inc. and/or one of its affiliates. The TV Guide On Screen system is protected by one or more of the following issued United States patents 6,498,895; 6,418,556;
6,331,877; 6,239,794; 6,154,203; 5,940,073; 4,908,713; 4,751,578; 4,706,121.
GEMSTAR-TV GUIDE INTERNATIONAL INC. AND/OR ITS RELATED AFFILIATES ARE NOT IN ANY WAY LIABLE FOR THE ACCURACY OR
AVAILABILITY OF THE PROGRAM SCHEDULE INFORMATION OR OTHER DATA IN THE TV GUIDE ON SCREEN™ SYSTEM AND CANNOT GUARANTEE
SERVICE AVAILABILITY IN YOUR AREA. IN NO EVENT SHALL GEMSTAR-TV GUIDE INTERNATIONAL, INC. AND/OR ITS RELATED AFFILIATES BE
LIABLE FOR ANY DAMAGES IN CONNECTION WITH THE ACCURACY OR AVAILABILITY OF THE PROGRAM SCHEDULE INFORMATION OR OTHER
DATA IN THE TV GUIDE ON SCREEN™ SYSTEM.
This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights. Use of this copyright protection technology must be
authorized by Macrovision and is intended for home and other limited pay-per-view uses only, unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision. Reverse engineering or disassembly is
prohibited.

Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.

8
 Chapter 1: Introduction
Overview of steps for installing, setting up, and using your new TV
Follow these steps to set up your TV and begin using its many exciting features.
1. Carefully read the important safety, installation, care,
and service information on pages 2–5. Keep this
manual for future reference.
2. Observe the following when choosing a location for
the TV:
• Read “Installation” on pages 3–4.
• Place the TV on the applicable optional TV stand listed in the
“Specifications” section (if available for this TV model) or on
a sturdy, level, stable surface that can safely support the size
and weight of the unit.
NOTICE OF POSSIBLE TV STAND INSTABILITY
DANGER: RISK OF SERIOUS PERSONAL INJURY
OR DEATH! Use this TV only with the TOSHIBA TV
stand listed in the “Specifications” section. Use with other stands may
result in instability, causing possible injury or death.
• Place the TV in a location where light does not reflect on the
screen.
• Place the TV far enough from walls and other objects to allow
proper ventilation. Inadequate ventilation may cause
overheating, which will damage the TV. THIS TYPE OF
DAMAGE IS NOT COVERED UNDER THE TOSHIBA
WARRANTY.
• Read “Important notes about your DLP™ TV” on page 5.
3. Do not plug in any power cords until AFTER you have
connected all cables and devices to your TV.
4. BEFORE connecting cables or devices to the TV, learn
the functions of the TV’s connections and controls (pages 10-
12).
5. Connect your other electronic device(s) to the TV
(pages 14–30).
6. Connect the G-LINK™ cable (either one of the enclosed IR
blaster cables) from your VCR and/or Cable box (if applicable) to
the G-LINK™ terminal so you can use the TV Guide On Screen™
features (applies to VCRs and cable boxes only). See page 28.
7. Install the batteries in the remote control (page 33).
8. See “Learning about the remote control” (page 31) for
an overview of the buttons on the remote control.
Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.
9. Program the remote control to operate your other
device(s) (pages 33–39).
10. AFTER connecting all cables and devices, plug in the
power cords for your TV and other devices.
11. After you plug in the TV power cord, the yellow LED (on
the TV front) will blink while the TV is booting until the remote
control is usable. When the yellow LED stops blinking, press
POWER to turn on the TV.
See “LED indications” on page 124.
12. See “Menu layout and navigation” for a quick overview
of navigating the TV’s menu system (pages 40–41).
13. See Chapter 5 for details on setting up the TV Guide
On Screen™ system (if available in your area).
14. See Chapter 7 for details on using the TV Guide
On Screen™ program guide (if available in your area).
15. Program channels into the TV’s channel memory
(page 47).
16. Set up the TheaterNet™ on-screen device control
feature (if applicable to your particular home theater system
components) (page 50).
17. For details on using the TV’s features, see Chapters 8
and 9.
18. For details on using the JPEG Picture Viewer and MP3
Audio Player to view/play files saved on either a memory card
or networked PC, see Chapter 10.
19. For details on connecting the TV to a home network to
enable file sharing and e-mail scheduling of recordings, see
Chapter 11.
20. For help, refer to the Troubleshooting Guide (Chapter 12).
21. For lamp unit replacement instructions, see Chapter 13.
22. For technical specifications and warranty information,
see Chapter 13.
23. Enjoy your new TV!
9
 2 Connecting your TV

TV front and side panel controls and connections

Front of TV Right side of TV Side panel

Remote sensor
1

{
{
POWER Memory card VIDEO-3 IN
6 slots !™ !¡
Blue/Yellow LEDs
0 MENU (ENTER)*
5
Channel *The MENU button on the TV control
7 yzx • 4 panel functions as the ENTER button
Volume + – when a menu is on-screen.
8
TV/VIDEO EXIT 3
2 GUIDE 9

Control panel

1 Remote sensor (behind the screen) — Point the remote
control toward this area of the TV screen. See “Remote
control effective range” on page 32.
2 TV/VIDEO — Repeatedly press to change the source you are
viewing (ANT 1, ANT 2, VIDEO 1, VIDEO 2, VIDEO 3,
HDMI 1, HDMI 2, ColorStream HD1, ColorStream HD2,
PC).
3 EXIT — Press to close an on-screen menu instantly.
4 ARROWS yzx • — When a menu is on-screen, these
buttons function as up/down/left/right menu navigation
buttons.
5 MENU (ENTER) — Press to access the menu system (see
pages 40–41). When a menu is on-screen or the TV Guide
On Screen™ program guide is open, the MENU button on
the TV’s side control panel functions as the ENTER button.
6 POWER — Press to turn the TV on and off.
If the TV stops responding to the controls on the remote
control or TV control panel and you cannot turn off the TV,
press and hold the POWER button on the TV front panel
for 5 or more seconds to reset the TV.
7 CHANNEL — When no menu is on-screen, these
buttons change the channel (programmed channels only; see
page 47). When a menu is on-screen, these buttons function
as up/down menu navigation buttons.
8 VOLUME + – — When no menu is on-screen, these
buttons adjust the volume level. When a menu is on-screen,
these buttons function as left/right menu navigation
buttons.
9 GUIDE — Press to access the TV Guide On Screen™
program guide. (See Chapter 7 for details on using the
program guide.)
0 Blue and Yellow LEDs
When the blue LED lights solid (not blinking), it indicates
that the TV power cord is plugged in.
When the yellow LED lights solid (not blinking), it indicates
that recording is in progress.
See “LED indications” on page 124 for additional
information.
!¡ VIDEO-3 — The side panel A/V connections are referred to
as “VIDEO 3” and include standard A/V connections plus
optional S-video. (The VIDEO 1 and VIDEO 2 A/V
connections are on the TV’s back panel; see page 11.)
!™ Memory card slots — Insert a memory card into one of
the memory card slots to view JPEG files (such as photos) as
a “slide show” on your TV or listen to MP3 audio files (see
Chapter 10).

Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.

10
 Chapter 2: Connecting your TV
TV back panel connections
For an explanation of cable types, see page 13.
}
1 VIDEO 1 IN and VIDEO 2 IN — Two sets of standard
(composite) video and standard audio inputs plus optional
S-video inputs for connecting devices with composite video
or S-video output.
Note: Standard (composite) video and S-video cables carry
only video information; separate audio cables are required for a
complete connection.
2 ColorStream® HD-1 and ColorStream® HD-2 — Two sets
of ColorStream® high-definition component video inputs
(with standard stereo audio inputs) for connecting devices
with component video output, such as a Toshiba DVD
player with ColorStream.® See pages 17 and 19.
Note: Component video cables carry only video information;
separate audio cables are required for a complete connection.
3 Variable Audio OUT — Standard analog audio outputs for
connecting an analog amplifier with external speakers. See
page 24.
4 A/V OUT — Standard composite video and analog audio
outputs for connecting a VCR for editing and dubbing. See
page 20 for details.
5 HDMI Audio IN — For use when connecting a DVI
device with analog audio output to one of the HDMI
inputs. See page 21. Also see item 11 on the next page.
Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
}
}
8 9
6 PC IN — For use when connecting audio and video from a
personal computer to use the TV screen as the display for
the PC. See page 29.
7 TheaterNet™ (IR) OUT 1 and 2 — For controlling
infrared remote-controlled devices through the TV. You can
connect up to two devices with either one of the enclosed IR
blaster cables, and then control the devices using the TV’s
IR pass-through or TheaterNet™ (on-screen device control)
features. See pages 22 and 50.
TheaterNet™ (IR) IN — For connecting to IR OUT on
other devices. See page 23.
8 Digital Audio OUT — Optical audio output in Dolby
Digital or PCM (pulse-code modulation) format for
connecting an external Dolby Digital decoder, amplifier, A/
V receiver, or home theater system with optical audio input.
See page 24.
9 CableCARD™ slot — For use with a digital security card
and digital cable TV service (provided by your local cable
operator) to view encrypted digital programming. See pages
14 and 56.
(Continued on next page)
___________
HDMI, the HDMI logo and High-Definition Multimedia Interface are trademarks or
registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC.
CableCARD is a trademark of Cable Television Laboratories, Inc.
11
 Chapter 2: Connecting your TV
TV back panel connections (continued)
0 !¡ !™ !£ !¢
0 ANT-1 (CABLE) IN and ANT-2 IN — Two inputs that
support analog (NTSC) and digital (ATSC) off-air antenna
signals and analog and digital (QAM) Cable TV signals.
Note: If you have an antenna only, connect it to ANT-1. If you have
both cable TV and an antenna, connect the cable TV to ANT-1 and
the antenna to ANT-2.
!¡ HDMI™ IN 1 and 2 — Two High-Definition Multimedia
Interface inputs receive digital audio and uncompressed
digital video from an HDMI device or uncompressed digital
video from a DVI device. See page 21. Also see item 5 on
the previous page.
!™ G-LINK™ — For use with one of the enclosed IR blaster/
G-LINK™ cables to enable the TV Guide On Screen™
recording features. See page 28.
Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.
12
!£ IEEE1394 — Two bi-directional digital IEEE1394 ports for
connecting multiple devices with compressed digital video.
Because these ports are bi-directional, they can be used for
playback and recording. You can control your IEEE1394
devices using the TV’s TheaterNet on-screen device control
icons. See pages 25–27 and 50.
Note:
• IEEE1394 cable carries both audio and video information;
separate audio cables are not required.
!¢ RJ-45 (Ethernet) (THINC™ system*) — Allows you to
connect the TV to your home network. See boxed note
below.
*THINC™ system
(Toshiba Home Interactive Network Connection)
The RJ-45 (Ethernet) port allows your Toshiba Cinema
Series TV to connect to your home network. This
revolutionary home entertainment networking system lets
you access MP3 audio files and JPEG picture files that are
stored on a networked PC (as shared files) and play/display
them on your TV.
You also can play your shared MP3 audio files through a
connected audio system.
See pages 24 and 30 and Chapters 10 and 11 for details.
 Chapter 2: Connecting your TV

Overview of cable types

Note: Two dual-wand IR blaster/G-LINK™ cables are included with your TV. All other required
cables, if not provided with your other devices, can be purchased at many electronics accessory
suppliers. Coaxial (F-type) cable

● Coaxial (F-type) cable is used for connecting your antenna, cable TV service, and/or
cable converter box to the ANT-1 and/or ANT-2 RF inputs on your TV.
● Standard A/V cables (composite video) usually come in sets of three, and are for use
with video devices with standard audio and standard (composite) video output. These Standard A/V cables (red/white/yellow)
cables (and the related inputs on your TV) are typically color-coded according to use:
yellow for video, red for stereo right audio, and white for stereo left (or mono) audio. S-video cable
● S-video cable is for use with video devices with S-video output. Separate audio cables
are required for a complete connection.
Note: An S-video cable provides better picture performance than a composite video cable. If
you connect an S-video cable, be sure to disconnect the standard (composite) video cable or
the picture performance will be unacceptable. Component video cables (red/green/blue)

● Component video cables come in sets of three and are for use with video devices with
component video output. (ColorStream ® is Toshiba’s brand of component video.)
These cables are typically color-coded red, green, and blue. Separate audio cables are
required for a complete connection. HDMI cable
Note: Component video cables provide better picture performance than a standard (composite)
video or S-video cable.
● HDMI cable is for use with devices with HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia
Interface) output. HDMI cable delivers digital audio and video in its native format. IEEE1394 cable (4-pin)
This cable carries both video and audio information; therefore, separate audio cables are
not required for a complete HDMI device connection. See page 21 for further details.
Note: HDMI cable provides better picture performance than a standard (composite) video or
S-video cable.
● IEEE1394 cable is for use with video devices with compressed digital video output Dual-wand IR blaster/ G-LINK™ cable
that meet CEA specifications for IEEE1394. This cable carries both video and audio (2 included)
information; therefore, no separate audio cables are required for a complete connection.
See pages 25–27.
Note:
Optical audio cable
• The transmission capability of any IEEE1394 cable used with this TV must be S400
(400 Mbps maximum).
• IEEE1394 cable provides better picture performance than a standard (composite)
video or S-video cable.
● Dual-wand IR blaster/G-LINK™ cable is for use with video devices with IR (infrared) Ethernet (RJ-45) cable
remote control. Two of these cables are included with your TV. One is for connection
to the G-LINK™ terminal (page 28) to enable TV Guide On Screen ™ recording
features (Chapters 5 and 7). The other can be used with the TV’s IR pass-through
Note: Although your TV includes both HDMI
feature (page 22) and TheaterNet™ on-screen device control feature (page 50).
and IEEE1394 connections, it may not
Note: The two IR blaster/G-LINK™ cables included with your TV have specific characteristics that operate with another device you have that
allow them to work properly with this TV’s IR OUT and G-LINK™ ports. Never use other
includes such a connection. For example, the
aftermarket IR blaster or G-LINK™ cables with this TV. Other cables may not function
properly and can cause damage. THIS TYPE OF DAMAGE IS NOT COVERED BY YOUR IEEE1394 ports are not intended to operate
TOSHIBA WARRANTY. with current model Mini DV camcorders, and
the HDMI input is not intended for
● Optical audio cable is for connecting receivers with Dolby Digital or PCM connection to a computer. Copyright
(pulse-code modulation) optical audio input to the TV’s DIGITAL AUDIO OUT protection requirements may also prohibit or
terminal. See page 24. limit connectivity. See page 21 for details
● Ethernet (RJ-45) cable is used to connect the TV to your home network. See page 30 about the HDMI input. See pages 25–27 for
and Chapter 11. details about the IEEE1394 ports.

Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.

13
 Chapter 2: Connecting your TV

About the connection illustrations

You can connect different types and brands of devices to your TV in several different configurations. The connection illustrations in
this manual are representative of typical device connections only. The input/output terminals on your devices may differ from those
illustrated herein. For details on connecting and using your specific devices, refer to each device’s owner’s manual.

Connecting a digital CableCARD™

This digital television is capable of receiving analog basic, digital
To view encrypted digital channels:
basic, and digital premium cable television programming by
direct connection to a cable system providing such 1. Connect your digital Cable TV cable to ANT-1.
programming. 2. With the front of the CableCARD™ facing up, insert it into
A security card (such as a digital CableCARD™), provided by the CableCARD™ slot on the back of the TV (see
your cable operator, is required to view encrypted digital illustration below left).
programming. 3. After the CableCARD™ is inserted, a CableCARD™ option
Certain advanced and interactive digital cable services (such as appears in the Applications menu, with informational
video-on-demand, a cable operator’s enhanced program guide, screens provided by your digital CableCARD™ service. See
and data-enhanced television services) will not work with the page 56 for additional information.
use of a CableCARD™ and may require the use of a separate
set-top box from your cable operator. CableCard Connected -- Acquiring
channel information.
For more information, contact your local cable operator. CableCard services will only operate
Applications
TV Guide On Screen IP Service
You will need: with cable signal connected to Antenna 1.
Audio Player Conditional Access
Picture Viewer CableCARD(tm) Status
 one digital CableCARD™ (contact your cable operator) Digital CC/Audio Selector
CableCARD
Network Setup
CableCARD(tm) Pairing

 digital cable subscription service (contact your cable

operator)
Navigate Select CH RTN Back EXIT Exit

TV back panel
Note:
• Connect the cable for your digital cable TV service to ANT-1 only.
• Always use the EJECT button to remove the CableCARD™. Never
remove the CableCARD™ by hand.
• Never insert any object or card other than a CableCARD™
(including, without limitation, a PCMCIA card) into the
CableCARD™ slot. Inserting anything other than a CableCARD™
can damange the TV. THIS DAMAGE IS NOT COVERED UNDER
YOUR TOSHIBA WARRANTY.
• Always make sure the CableCARD™ is facing the correct direction.
• When using a CableCARD™, you do not need to program
channels into the TV’s memory. The CableCARD™ automatically
loads the cable channel list into the TV’s channel memory (page
47).
• The CableCARD™ may take up to 5 minutes to “pair” with the TV
and download channel information. CableCARD™ information and
channels will not be available until this process is finished.
From digital Cable service
CableCARD™ technology, like all new and emerging technology, may
(connect to ANT 1 only)
from time to time experience compatibility issues due to the different
Note: Connect this cable directly to the ANT 1 ways in which television manufacturers and cable system operators
input. If you connect this cable through a VCR implement the CableCARD™ specifications. Most issues can be easily
first and then to the TV, the TV may not receive resolved. In the event that you experience any performance-related
the signals correctly. CableCARD™ issues with your Toshiba television, please contact the
following:
• In the U.S., call TACP Consumer Solutions at (800) 631-3811 or visit
________ http://www.tacp.com/customersupport/contact.asp.
CableCARD is a trademark of Cable Television Laboratories, Inc. • In Canada, call TCL Customer Service at 1-800-268-3404.

Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.

14
 Chapter 2: Connecting your TV

Connecting a VCR and antenna or Cable TV (no Cable box)

You will need:
 one signal splitter From Cable TV or antenna
 three coaxial cables Signal splitter IN

 two sets of standard A/V cables OUT

OUT
• For better picture performance, if your VCR has S-video, use an
S-video cable (plus the audio cables) instead of the standard Stereo VCR
video cable. Do not connect both types of video cables to VIDEO VIDEO AUDIO
IN from ANT L R
1 (or VIDEO 2) at the same time or the picture performance will CH 3 IN
be unacceptable. OUT to TV
CH 4

OUT
• If you have a mono VCR, connect L/MONO on the TV to your L R

VCR’s audio OUT terminal using the white audio cable only. TV

To view the antenna or Cable signal:
Select the ANT 1 video input source on the TV.*

To view the VCR:
Turn ON the VCR. Select the VIDEO 1 video input source
on the TV.*

To use the TV Guide On Screen ™

recording features:
™
1. Connect the G-LINK cable according to the
instructions on page 28.
2. Make sure the VCR is connected to the A/V OUT
terminals on the TV (see illustration).
3. Set the VCR to the appropriate line input (refer to your
VCR owner’s manual for details), and then turn OFF the Note: The VIDEO/AUDIO OUT terminals output signals from the
VCR. ANT 1, ANT 2, VIDEO 1, VIDEO 2, and VIDEO 3 terminals when the
4. See Chapter 5 for details on setting up the TV Guide applicable input mode is selected.
On Screen™ system.
The unauthorized recording, use, distribution, or revision of television
5. See Chapter 7 for details on using the TV Guide programs, videotapes, DVDs, and other materials is prohibited under the
On Screen™ system. Copyright Laws of the United States and other countries, and may subject
you to civil and criminal liability.

Connecting a camcorder
You will need:
 one set of standard A/V cables Camcorder
• For better picture performance, if your camcorder has S-video, use an
S-video cable (plus the audio cables) instead of the standard video cable.
Do not connect both an S-video cable and a standard video cable to VIDEO
3 at the same time or the picture performance will be unacceptable. VIDEO AUDIO

L
OUT

To view the camcorder video: R

Select the VIDEO 3 video input source on the TV.*

______________
* To select the video input source, press INPUT on the remote control (see page 72).
To program the TV remote control to operate other devices, see Chapter 3.
VIDEO 3 inputs on TV right side panel

Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.

15
 Chapter 2: Connecting your TV

Connecting a VCR and Cable box

You will need: From Cable TV
 one signal splitter
IN
 five coaxial cables
Cable box Signal splitter
CH 3
IN OUT

 two sets of standard A/V cables OUT CH 4 OUT

• For better picture performance from your VCR: If your VCR has Stereo VCR
S-video, connect an S-video cable (plus the audio cables) instead VIDEO AUDIO
IN from ANT L R
of the standard video cable. Do not connect an S-video cable and CH 3 IN
CH 4
a standard video cable to VIDEO 1 (or VIDEO 2) at the same time OUT to TV
OUT
or the picture performance will be unacceptable. L R

• If you have a mono VCR, connect L/MONO on the TV to your TV

VCR’s audio out terminal using the white audio cable only.
• When you use a Cable box, you may not be able to use the remote
control to program or access certain features on the TV.

To view basic Cable channels and use the TV’s features:

Select the ANT 1 video input source on the TV.* Use the
TV controls (control panel or remote control) to change
channels and access the TV’s features.

To view basic and premium Cable channels:

Turn OFF the VCR. Select the ANT 2 video input source
on the TV.* Tune the TV to channel 3 or 4 (whichever
channel the Cable box output is set to). Use the Cable box
controls to change channels.

To view the VCR:

Turn ON the VCR. Select the VIDEO 1 video input source
on the TV.*
Note: The VIDEO/AUDIO OUT terminals output signals from the
Note: A VIDEO 1 connection with an S-Video cable (instead
ANT 1, ANT 2, VIDEO 1, VIDEO 2, and VIDEO 3 terminals when the
of a standard video cable) will provide better picture
appropriate input mode is selected.
performance (as mentioned in the first bulleted item at the
top of this page).
_____________
To enable the TV Guide On Screen system to work ™

* To select the video input source, press INPUT on the remote control with your cable box and to use the TV Guide
(see page 72). To program the TV remote control to operate other On Screen™ recording features:
devices, see Chapter 3.
1. Connect the G-LINK™ cable according to the
instructions on page 28.
The unauthorized recording, use, distribution, or revision of television
2. Make sure the VCR is connected to the A/V OUT
programs, videotapes, DVDs, and other materials is prohibited under the terminals on the TV (see illustration).
Copyright Laws of the United States and other countries, and may subject 3. Set the VCR to the appropriate line input (refer to your
you to civil and criminal liability.
VCR owner’s manual for details), and then turn OFF the
VCR.
4. See Chapter 5 for details on setting up the TV Guide
On Screen™ system.
5. See Chapter 7 for details on using the TV Guide
On Screen™ system.

Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.

16
 Chapter 2: Connecting your TV

Connecting a VCR and satellite receiver

You will need: From antenna
 one signal splitter IN
Signal splitter
 four coaxial cables OUT

 one set of component video cables (if your OUT

satellite receiver does not have component Stereo VCR

video, connect the standard A/V cables only) VIDEO AUDIO

 one pair of standard audio cables

IN from ANT L R
CH 3 IN
CH 4
 three sets of standard A/V cables OUT to TV
OUT

L R
• For better picture performance, if your satellite
receiver and VCR have S-video, connect S-video TV
cables (plus the audio cables) instead of the standard
video cables. Do not connect both types of video
cable to VIDEO 1 (or VIDEO 2) at the same time or
the picture performance will be unacceptable.
• If you have a mono VCR, connect L/MONO on the
TV (VIDEO 1) to your VCR’s AUDIO OUT terminal
using the white audio cable only.

To view satellite programs using the component video

connections:
Select the ColorStream HD-1 video input source on the
TV.*

To view satellite programs using the standard From satellite dish

Satellite receiver
video connections or to record satellite programs:
AUDIO
Turn on all three devices. Set the VCR to the appropriate Y PB PR LOUT L

line input (refer to your VCR owner’s manual for details). Satellite
IN
R R

Select the VIDEO 2 video input source on the TV.* S-VIDEO

OUT
COMPONENT VIDEO VIDEO
OUT

To view the VCR or view and record antenna channels:

Note: The VIDEO/AUDIO OUT terminals output signals from the ANT 1,
Turn ON the VCR. Tune the VCR to the channel you want
ANT 2, VIDEO 1, VIDEO 2, and VIDEO 3 terminals when the appropriate
to watch. Select the VIDEO 1 video input source on the input mode is selected.
TV.*
_____________
* To select the video input source, press INPUT on the remote control

To use the TV Guide On Screen recording features:™

™
1. Connect the G-LINK cable according to the
(see page 72). To program the TV remote control to operate other
devices, see Chapter 3.
instructions on page 28.
2. Make sure the VCR is connected to the A/V OUT
The unauthorized recording, use, distribution, or revision of television terminals on the TV (see illustration).
programs, videotapes, DVDs, and other materials is prohibited under the
Copyright Laws of the United States and other countries, and may subject
3. Set the VCR to the appropriate line input (refer to your
you to civil and criminal liability. VCR owner’s manual for details), and then turn OFF the
VCR.
4. See Chapter 5 for details on setting up the TV Guide
On Screen™ system.
5. See Chapter 7 for details on using the TV Guide
On Screen™ system.
Note: The TV Guide On Screen™ system does not receive
program listings from or for any satellite service.

Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.

17
 Chapter 2: Connecting your TV

Connecting a DVD player with S-video, a VCR, and a Cable box

You will need: From antenna or Cable TV
 one signal splitter IN
Cable box Signal splitter
 five coaxial cables CH 3
IN OUT

 two sets of standard A/V cables

OUT CH 4 OUT

Stereo VCR
Note: If you have a mono VCR, connect L/MONO on the TV
(VIDEO 1) to your VCR’s audio out terminal using the white IN from ANT
VIDEO AUDIO
L R
audio cable only. CH 3
CH 4
IN

 one S-video cable OUT to TV

OUT

 one pair of standard audio cables

L R

TV
Note:
• If your DVD player does not have S-video, use a standard
video cable instead. Do not connect an S-video cable and a
standard video cable to VIDEO 1 (or VIDEO 2) at the same
time or the picture performance will be unacceptable.
• If your DVD player has component video, see page 19.
• Do not connect the DVD player and VCR to the same set of
A/V inputs on the TV. (See the illustration, which shows the
VCR connected to VIDEO 1 on the TV, and the DVD player
connected to VIDEO 2.)

To view basic channels and access the TV’s features:

Select the ANT 1 video input source.* Use the TV AUDIO
controls to change channels and access the TV’s features. OUT
L

To view premium Cable channels: S-VIDEO

OUT
VIDEO
OUT
R

Turn OFF the VCR. Select the ANT 2 video input

DVD player with S-video
source on the TV.* Tune the TV to channel 3 or 4
(whichever channel the Cable box output is set to).
Use the Cable box controls to change channels. Note: The VIDEO/AUDIO OUT terminals output signals from the ANT 1,
Note: When you use a Cable box, you may not be able to ANT 2, VIDEO 1, VIDEO 2, and VIDEO 3 terminals when the appropriate input
use the remote control to program or access certain mode is selected.
features on the TV.

To view the DVD player:

Turn ON the DVD player. Select the VIDEO 2 video
To enable the TV Guide On Screen ™
system to work with
input source on the TV.* your cable box and to use the TV Guide On Screen™
recording features:

To view the VCR: 1. Connect the G-LINK™ cable according to the instructions on
Turn ON the VCR. Select the VIDEO 1 video input page 28.
source on the TV.* 2. Make sure the VCR is connected to the A/V OUT terminals
_____________ on the TV (see illustration).
* To select the video input source, press INPUT on the remote control 3. Set the VCR to the appropriate line input (refer to your VCR
(see page 72). To program the TV remote control to operate other owner’s manual for details), and then turn OFF the VCR.
devices, see Chapter 3.
4. See Chapter 5 for details on setting up the TV Guide
The unauthorized recording, use, distribution, or revision of On Screen™ system.
television programs, videotapes, DVDs, and other materials is 5. See Chapter 7 for details on using the TV Guide On Screen™
prohibited under the Copyright Laws of the United States and other
countries, and may subject you to civil and criminal liability.
system.

Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.

18
 Chapter 2: Connecting your TV

Connecting a DVD player with ColorStream® (component video) and a VCR

Your TV has ColorStream® (component video) inputs. From antenna or Cable
You will need: Signal splitter IN

 one signal splitter OUT

OUT
 three coaxial cables
Stereo VCR
 two sets of standard A/V cables
VIDEO AUDIO
• For better picture performance, if your VCR has S-video, use an IN from ANT L R
CH 3
S-video cable (plus the audio cables) instead of the standard CH 4
IN

OUT to TV
video cable. However, do not connect both types of video cable to OUT

VIDEO 1 (or VIDEO 2) at the same time or the picture L R

performance will be unacceptable. TV

• If you have a mono VCR, connect L/MONO on the TV
(VIDEO 1) to your VCR’s audio out terminal using the white
audio cable only.
 one pair of standard audio cables
 one set of component video cables
• You can connect the component video cables (plus audio
cables) from the DVD player to either set of ColorStream
terminals on the TV (HD-1 or HD-2). The ColorStream HD-1
and HD-2 terminals can be used with Progressive (480p,
720p) and Interlaced (480i, 1080i) scan systems. A 1080i
signal will provide the best picture performance.
• If your DVD player does not have component video, see page
18. If your DVD player has HDMI video, see page 21.

To view antenna or Cable channels:

AUDIO
OUT
Y PB PR
L

Select the ANT 1 video input source on the TV.* S-VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO VIDEO R
OUT OUT

To view the DVD player: DVD player with component video

Turn ON the DVD player. Select the ColorStream HD-1
video input source on the TV.*

To view the VCR: Note: The VIDEO/AUDIO OUT terminals output signals from the ANT 1,
ANT 2, VIDEO 1, VIDEO 2, and VIDEO 3 terminals when the appropriate
Turn ON the VCR. Select the VIDEO 1 video input input mode is selected.
source on the TV.*

To record a TV program while watching a DVD:
Turn ON the VCR. Tune the VCR to the channel to
To use the TV Guide On Screen ™
recording features:
record. Select the ColorStream HD-1 video input source ™
1. Connect the G-LINK cable according to the
on the TV* to view the DVD. instructions on page 28.
_____________ 2. Make sure the VCR is connected to the A/V OUT
* To select the video input source, press INPUT on the remote control terminals on the TV (see illustration).
(see page 72). To program the TV remote control to operate other
devices, see Chapter 3.
3. Set the VCR to the appropriate line input (refer to your
VCR owner’s manual for details), and then turn OFF the
The unauthorized recording, use, distribution, or revision of television
VCR.
programs, videotapes, DVDs, and other materials is prohibited under the 4. See Chapter 5 for details on setting up the TV Guide
Copyright Laws of the United States and other countries, and may subject On Screen™ system.
you to civil and criminal liability.
5. See Chapter 7 for details on using the TV Guide
On Screen™ system.

Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.

19
 Chapter 2: Connecting your TV

Connecting two VCRs

You will need: From antenna or Cable
 one signal splitter IN
** Signal splitter
 three coaxial cables OUT

 two sets of standard A/V cables OUT

• For better picture performance, if VCR 1 has S-video, use VCR1 (plays)
an S-video cable (plus the audio cables) instead of the
VIDEO AUDIO
standard video cable. However, do not connect both types IN from ANT L R
CH 3 IN
of video cable to VIDEO 1 (or VIDEO 2) at the same time CH 4
OUT to TV
or the picture performance will be unacceptable. OUT

L R
• If VCR 1 has mono audio, connect L/MONO on the TV (VIDEO 1)
to the audio out terminal on VCR 1 using the white audio cable TV
only.
• Do not connect the same VCR to the output and input terminals on a
the TV at the same time.

To view the antenna or Cable signal:

Select the ANT-1 video input source on the TV.*
b

To view VCR 1:
Turn ON VCR 1. Select the VIDEO 1 video input source
on the TV.*

To dub or edit from VCR 1 to VCR 2:
Turn ON both VCRs. Set VCR 2 to the appropriate line VCR2 (records)
input (refer to your VCR owner’s manual for details). Select VIDEO AUDIO

the VIDEO 1 video input source on the TV.* IN from ANT CH 3 L R IN

CH 4
Note: OUT
OUT to TV L R

• If you have a Cable box, connect the Cable box and splitter to VCR1 L R

as shown on page 16.

• The VIDEO OUT signal incorporates Macrovision® copyright a The VIDEO OUT terminal does not output the POP picture.
protection technology, which may prevent you from recording certain
copy-restricted video materials.*** b When POP mode is active, the AUDIO OUT terminals output the
sound of the active window (main or POP). For additional
information, see “Notes about recording” on page 81.
_________________________________________________________________
Note: The VIDEO/AUDIO OUT terminals output signals from the
* To select the video input source, press INPUT on the remote control ANT 1, ANT 2, VIDEO 1, VIDEO 2, and VIDEO 3 terminals when
(see page 72). To program the TV remote control to operate other the appropriate input mode is selected.
devices, see Chapter 3.
** Do not connect the unit through a VCR. Video signals fed through VCRs may be
affected by copyright protection systems and the picture will be distorted on the TV.
To use the TV Guide On Screen ™
recording features:
™
1. Connect the G-LINK cable according to the
*** This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by instructions on page 28.
U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights. Use of this copyright protection
technology must be authorized by Macrovision and is intended for home and other 2. Make sure the VCR is connected to the A/V OUT
limited pay-per-view uses only, unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision. terminals on the TV (see illustration).
Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited. Macrovision is a registered
trademark of Macrovision Corporation. 3. Set the VCR to the appropriate line input (refer to your
VCR owner’s manual for details), and then turn OFF the
The unauthorized recording, use, distribution, or revision of television VCR.
programs, videotapes, DVDs, and other materials is prohibited under the 4. See Chapter 5 for details on setting up the TV Guide
Copyright Laws of the United States and other countries, and may subject
you to civil and criminal liability. On Screen™ system.
5. See Chapter 7 for details on using the TV Guide
On Screen™ system.

Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.

20
 Chapter 2: Connecting your TV

Connecting an HDMI™ or a DVI device to the HDMI input

The HDMI[1] input on your TV receives digital audio and
uncompressed digital video from an HDMI device or
uncompressed digital video from a DVI[2] device.
This input is designed to accept HDCP [3] program material in
digital form from EIA/CEA-861/861B–compliant [4] consumer
electronic devices (such as a set-top box or DVD player with
HDMI or DVI output).
The HDMI input is designed for best performance with 1080i
signals but will also accept and display 480i, 480p and 720p
signals.
NOTE: DO NOT CONNECT A PC USING THE
HDMI PORT. ALWAYS use the VGA port provided
to connect a PC.
To connect an HDMI device, you will need:
• one HDMI cable (type A connector) per HDMI
device
For proper operation, it is recommended that you use as
short an HDMI cable as possible. You should not
encounter difficulty if you use an HDMI cable shorter than
16.4 ft (5m).
HDMI cable transfers both video and audio. Separate
analog audio cables are not required (see illustration
below). Some CDVs (video CDs) may not output digital
audio signals. In that case, you may hear sound by
connecting analog audio cables.
See “Setting the HDMI™ audio mode” on page 55.
HDMI device
HDMI OUT
VIDEO AUDIO
__________________________________________________________________
[1] HDMI = High-Definition Multimedia Interface.
[2] DVI = Digital Video Interface.
[3] HDCP = High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection.
[4] EIA/CEA-861/861B compliance covers the transmission of
uncompressed digital video with high-bandwidth digital content
protection, which is being standardized for reception of high-definition
video signals. Because this is an evolving technology, it is possible that
some devices may not operate properly with the TV.
Note: To ensure that the HDMI or DVI device is reset
properly, it is recommended that you follow these
procedures:
• When turning on your electronic components, turn on
the TV first, and then the HDMI or DVI device.
• When turning off your electronic components, turn off
the HDMI or DVI device first, and then the TV.
To connect a DVI device, you will need:
• one HDMI-to-DVI adapter cable (HDMI type A
connector) per DVI device
For proper operation, the length of an HDMI-to-DVI adapter
cable should not exceed 9.8 ft (3m). The recommended length is
6.6 ft (2m).
• one pair of standard analog audio cables per DVI
device
An HDMI-to-DVI adapter cable transfers video only.
Separate analog audio cables are required (see illustration
below).
See “Setting the HDMI™ audio mode” on page 55.
DVI device
DVI/HDCP
VIDEO AUDIO OUT

L R IN
L R IN

L R OUT
L R OUT

R
TV
TV

___________
HDMI, the HDMI logo and High-Definition Multimedia Interface
are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC.

Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.

21
 Chapter 2: Connecting your TV

Connecting a device to the IR blaster (IR pass-through)

Front of IR-controlled DVD player (for example)
You can use the TV’s IR OUT terminal (infrared pass-through)
to remotely operate (through the TV) many infrared remote-
controlled devices (such as a Toshiba infrared remote-controlled
VCR or DVD player) enclosed within an entertainment center
or similar cabinet. Without the IR OUT connection, the device
typically would need to be visible to operate it remotely. Front of IR-controlled audio device (for example)

You will need:

 one dual-wand IR blaster cable (included with your TV)
 other audio/video cables as required to connect the device(s) Infrared
to the TV (see pages 15–21) sensor

To connect the IR blaster cable: IR blaster cable wand

1. Locate the infrared sensor on the front of your device. This (approx. 1 inch from device)
sensor is marked on some devices.* Back of TV
2. Align one of the IR blaster cable’s wands about 1 inch away
from the infrared sensor on the front of the device and
attach it using double-sided mounting tape. If you have a
second device, attach the second wand in a similar manner.
(See illustration at right.)
Note: If you do not have a second device, coil the second wand
with a rubber band and leave it behind the TV.
3. Plug the IR blaster cable’s plug into one of the TV’s
TheaterNet OUT terminals.

To control the device(s):

Point the TV remote control
(programmed to operate the device;
see Chapter 3) or the device’s remote
* If you cannot locate the device’s infrared sensor:
control at the front of the TV and
1. Turn OFF the device.
press the button for the desired
2. Starting at the lower left corner of the device, place the end of the
function. The signal passes from the device’s remote control (with the infrared emitter) so it touches the
remote control through the TV to the front of the device and press POWER. (Do not use the TV’s remote
device via the IR blaster cable. control for this step.)
Note: 3. If the device turns on, the point at which the remote control touched
• If you use the device’s remote control to the device is the location of the sensor.
operate the device, you also will need to 4. If the device does not turn on, move the remote control slightly to the
use the TV’s remote control to operate the TV. right and press POWER again.
• For additional control options, see “TheaterNet on-screen device 5. Repeat step 4 until you locate the device’s infrared sensor.
control” on the next page.

Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.

22
 Chapter 2: Connecting your TV

Connecting a device to the IR blaster (continued)

Using the TheaterNet™ IN:
For additional control options for your home theater system, you
TheaterNet™ on-screen device control
can connect an IR receiver/repeater (not included) or a home theater For additional control options for
control system (not included) to the TV’s TheaterNet IN terminal.* your home theater system, set up
Contact your home theater electronics dealer for details about home the TheaterNet on-screen device
theater control systems. control feature. You can use this Toshiba Video 3

You will need: feature to control many IR remote- ENTER

controlled devices and IEEE1394 TOP MENU EXIT

 one IR cable devices using the on-screen control

TV back panel icons.
See pages 50–54 for details on setting up
and using TheaterNet.
See pages 25–27 for details on
connecting IEEE1394 devices.

Note: The TheaterNet on-screen icons are the only device functions
available when the icons are on-screen. To access other device
functions, close the TheaterNet icon window.

OUT IN

Back of IR receiver/repeater or home

theater control system* (not included)

With this connection, point the

Toshiba TV remote control at
the front of the IR receiver/
repeater or home theater control
system to operate the TV.

IR receiver/repeater
or home theater
control system

* The TheaterNet OUT function has been verified for use with Toshiba infrared-
controlled devices. The TheaterNet IN function has been verified for use with
SmarTouch™ STS/STS-C wireless RF control systems. Due
to the wide variation in remote control operation among manufacturers, these
functions may or may not operate with other brands.
SmarTouch is a trademark of Crestron Electronics, Inc. (www.crestron.com).

Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.

23
 Chapter 2: Connecting your TV

Connecting a digital audio system

Dolby Digital decoder or
The TV’s DIGITAL AUDIO OUT terminal outputs a Dolby* other digital audio system
Digital or 2-channel down-mixed PCM (pulse-code
modulation) signal for use with an external Dolby Digital LINE IN Optical

decoder or other external audio system with optical audio input. L R Audio IN

You will need:

TV
 one optical audio cable (Use an optical audio cable that has
the larger “TosLink” connector and not the smaller
“mini-optical” connector.)
To control the audio:
Turn on the TV and the digital audio device.
Press MENU on the TV’s
remote control and open
the AUDIO menu. Audio
Audio Settings

Highlight Audio Setup and Advanced Audio Settings

Audio Setup
press ENTER.
In the Optical Output Format field, select either Dolby Digital
or PCM, depending on your device (see “Selecting the optical Note:
audio output format” on page 92). • Some audio systems may not be compatible with Dolby Digital bitstream
signals. Older audio systems that are not compatible with standard
Audio Setup optical out signals may not work properly, creating a high noise level
MTS Stereo that may damage speakers or headphones. THIS DAMAGE IS NOT
Language English COVERED BY YOUR WARRANTY.
Speakers On • The DIGITAL AUDIO OUT terminal outputs signals only when receiving
Optical Output Format Dolby Digital digital broadcasts with the TV in single-window mode.
Reset Done
• The DIGITAL AUDIO OUT terminal may not output some digital audio
sources because of copy restrictions.
Turn off the TV’s built-in speakers in the same Audio Setup
* Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.
menu (above). Also see “Turning off the built-in speakers” on “Dolby”, “Pro Logic” and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby
page 92. Laboratories.

Connecting an analog audio system

This connection allows you to use external speakers with an Analog audio amplifier
external audio amplifier to adjust the sound level.
You will need: LINE IN
L R

 one pair of standard audio cables

To control the audio:
Turn on the TV and the stereo amplifier. TV
Turn off the TV’s built-in speakers (see “Turning off the built-in
speakers” on page 92).
Note: To hear sound when using an external audio amplifier,
the volume of both the TV and the amplifier must be set to a
reasonable listening level.

Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.

24
 Chapter 2: Connecting your TV
Connecting IEEE1394 video devices
You can use the two bi-directional IEEE1394 ports on the back
of your TV to connect digital video devices that meet CEA
specifications for IEEE1394.
Because these ports are bi-directional, they can be used for both
playback and recording.
• Because IEEE1394 is an evolving technology, it is possible that some
or all of the connectivity features of a device you connect to the TV
through the IEEE1394 ports may not operate. You should confirm
that the devices you want to use with the IEEE1394 ports will operate
with those ports.
• This TV does not support all possible IEEE1394 signal types. For
information on signals supported by the IEEE1394 ports, see
“Supported signals” at right.
• IEEE1394 cable carries both audio and video information;
separate audio cables are not required.
You will need:
 one (or two) IEEE1394 cables
Note: The transmission capability of IEEE1394 cable used with this
TV must be S400 (400 Mbps maximum).
 additional A/V cables if your device is analog-compatible
(see “Using analog-compatible IEEE1394 devices” below).
TV back panel
} control
Two bi-directional
IEEE1394 ports
From IEEE1394
devices (such as
AVHD or D-VHS)
Using analog-compatible IEEE1394 devices
Some digital IEEE1394 devices are compatible with analog
signals. For example, some D-VHS VCRs can record and play
VHS or S-VHS format videos. Such devices allow you to play
analog tapes that you rented or recorded, or record analog
programs from antenna or Cable TV systems. To use the
IEEE1394 device’s analog features, you need to connect the
device to the TV using standard A/V cables (or S-video plus
audio cables) in addition to connecting the IEEE1394 cable.
Note: If you have an IEEE1394 device connected to both digital
and analog inputs on the TV, the TV automatically switches
between digital and analog modes, as needed, when the initial
device access is initiated using the TheaterNet button.
See page 50 for details on using the TheaterNet feature.
Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.
Supported signals
The IEEE1394 ports support only the signals listed below. Even
though incompatible video, audio, and digital control signals
cannot be decoded by the TV, these signals may be passed
through the IEEE1394 cable to other compatible devices.
Incompatible devices may not appear in the TheaterNet™ menu.
• MPEG-2 digital video signals
Other digital video signals—such as DV video—are
incompatible and must be decoded by the source device and
sent to the TV as analog video (composite or S-video).
• Dolby Digital and MPEG digital audio signals
Other digital audio signals (such as DPM, MP3, and DTS) are
incompatible and cannot be decoded by the TV.
• EIA-775 and AV/C digital control
Your TV can serve as the control center for many devices
that are compatible with EIA-775 or AV/C IEEE1394
control standards (described below).
The TV cannot control IEEE1394 devices that use any other
control standards.
– EIA-775 digital control allows tuning devices (such as
Cable boxes) to send simple graphics; however, this
standard does not allow the TV to control the Cable box
through IEEE1394.
– AV/C (audio/video control) provides basic control (such
as power, play, stop rewind, fast-forward, pause, and
record), as applicable to the specific device.
Using TheaterNet™ on-screen device
You can use the TheaterNet feature to control some IEEE1394
devices using on-screen control icons. See page 50 for details on
setting up and using the TheaterNet feature.
Note: If the TheaterNet feature does not control your
IEEE1394 device, you can either use the device’s remote
control or try using IR pass-through with the TV’s remote
control (page 22).
25
 Chapter 2: Connecting your TV

Connecting IEEE1394 video devices (continued)

Connecting an AVHD (external hard IEEE1394 device initialization

drive) or D-VHS digital recorder
You can connect an IEEE1394 compatible D-VHS or AVHD
(audio/video hard drive) digital recorder (such as Toshiba’s
Symbio™ AVHD Recorder) to record high definition and
standard definition material from either tuner and control live
TV (pause, rewind, etc.).
When you connect a D-VHS or AVHD device to the TV:
• The remote control keys (Live, REW, PAUSE, PLAY, FF, etc.) are
automatically activated to allow control of live TV.
• The TV Guide On Screen™ system is automatically configured to
allow recording to the device.* See Chapters 5 and 7 for details.
Also see page 55 for details on setting the AVHD device skip time.
• Some programs may not be recorded due to copy protection
restrictions.
When you connect a new IEEE1394 device to the TV and turn
it on, the device immediately announces its presence to the TV
(and other networked IEEE1394 devices, if any), and the
following device initialization screen automatically appears.
Note: With some devices, it may take up to one minute for this
screen to appear.
1. If you also connected your IEEE1394 device to an analog
input, use the yzx • buttons to select the input in the
Analog Input Used field; otherwise, leave it set to “None.”
(See “Using analog-compatible IEEE1394 devices” on page
25.)
2. If you want to label the device, highlight Edit Label and
press ENTER.
New IEEE1394 Device Initilization
Manufacturer TOSHIBA
Device Type AVHD
Custom Label

This TV is compatible with the new Toshiba

TM Edit Label Done

3. Press the yzx • buttons to select a character for the first

Audio/Video Hard Drive Recorder! space and then press ENTER.
Toshiba’s Symbio™ AVHD Recorder is designed specifically for
high definition television (HDTV) and offers control over digital 4. Repeat step 3 to enter the rest of the characters.
video recording and playback. 5. Highlight Done and press ENTER to save the information.
Think of it as a “tapeless VCR” for digital television. You can pause, IEEE1394 Device Label Edit
rewind, or use instant replay, so you’ll never miss a thing! MY DEVICE_
Symbio also offers one-touch recording* of both standard and A B C D E F G
High Definition programs through the no-fee TV Guide H I J K L M N
O P Q R S T U
On Screen™ interactive program guide built in to this TV.
V W X Y Z 0 1
2 3 4 5 6 7 8
The unauthorized recording, use, distribution, or revision of television 9 SPC CLR BS

programs, videotapes, DVDs, and other materials is prohibited under the

Copyright Laws of the United States and other countries, and may subject Cancel Done

you to civil and criminal liability.

*Note: To enjoy the full benefits of your Symbio AVHD Recorder, you must
first set up the TV Guide On Screen™ system (see Chapter 5). Full Symbio
AVHD Recorder benefits, including Intelligent One Touch recording, will not
be available unless the TV Guide On Screen™ system is fully operational.
However, when the TV Guide On Screen™ system is not fully operational,
manual recording is available as long as the TV Guide On Screen™ system
has acquired the necessary date and time data. If you experience any issues
with your Symbio AVHD Recorder, please contact the following:
• In the U.S., call TACP Consumer Solutions at (800) 631-3811 or visit
http://www.tacp.com/customersupport/contact.asp.
• In Canada, call TCL Customer Service at 1-800-268-3404.
Note:
• The TV may not recognize incompatible or non-A/V IEEE1394
devices; however, these devices may still be available to other
compatible IEEE1394 devices on the network.
• You may be able to use the TV’s remote control to operate some
compatible IEEE1394 devices. You must first program the
remote control to recognize the device (see Chapter 3). If you
have an IEEE1394 Cable box or satellite receiver, you may need
to use the remote control that came with the device.
• Toshiba is not liable for the operation of any IEEE1394 device
other than the Toshiba Symbio AVHD recorder.

Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.

26
 Chapter 2: Connecting your TV

Connecting IEEE1394 video devices (continued)

IEEE1394 device management Important information regarding IEEE1394

The IEEE1394 device information is saved in the TV’s memory. device interconnection
You can edit this device information (for example, edit the • Never loop the last device in the chain back to the TV.
device name, change the analog input information, or delete the If the device chain is looped, the TV may not work properly with the
device information from the TV’s memory if you no longer use other devices in the chain.
that device). • Always place devices with the slowest communication
speed at the end of each chain. If a device with a slower
To edit the IEEE1394 device information: communication speed is placed ahead of a faster device in the
1. Press MENU and open the Setup menu. chain, the signal from the slower device will interfere with the signal
2. Highlight Installation and press ENTER. (A new set of from the faster device. To determine the communication speed of
an IEEE1394 device, look for an “S” number near the device’s
Installation menu icons will appear on-screen, as shown in
IEEE1394 connector. The higher the “S” number, the faster the
step 3 below).
device. If your device is not marked with an “S” number, look in the
device’s user manual or call the device manufacturer’s technical
support number.
Setup
Installation • If your IEEE1394 device has a two-position power
Sleep Timer
On/Off Timer
switch, always place the device at the end of the chain
PC Settings and turn ON the power switch when any device is used.
HDMI 1 Audio Auto
HDMI 2 Audio Auto
If the power switch is OFF, it will interfere with signals from devices
Slide Show Interval 2 Sec behind it in the chain.
Navigate Select CH RTN Back EXIT Exit • The maximum length for an IEEE1394 cable between
each device is 15 feet.
3. Open the Devices menu, highlight IEEE1394 Devices, and • This TV is an IEEE1394A device. The IEEE1394B protocol is faster
press ENTER. and intended to allow for longer distances between devices and
multi-room systems. IEEE1394A–to–IEEE1394B converters
(available at some electronics suppliers) may allow compatibility of
Devices IEEE1394B devices with your existing IEEE1394A devices.
IEEE1394 Devices
TheaterNet Devices • The transmission capability of IEEE1394 cable used with this TV
must be S400 (400 Mbps maximum).

Navigate Select CH RTN Back EXIT Exit

4. Highlight the device you want to edit and press ENTER.

IEEE1394 Device Management

Brand Type Label Analog Input Used Connected

TOSHIBA AVHD MY DEVICE None No

Reset
Done

5. Follow the on-screen prompts to modify the device

information.

Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.

27
 Chapter 2: Connecting your TV

G-LINK™ connection
• This connection is necessary for the TV Guide On Screen™ system to work with your cable box to receive program listings and to
enable the TV Guide On Screen™ recording features with your VCR.
• This connection is not necessary for AVHD or D-VHS recording devices. See pages 26 and 55 for further details.

After you connect your devices to the TV, you will need to connect the G-LINK ™ cable (either of the dual-wand IR blaster cables
included with your TV) from your VCR and Cable box (if applicable) to the G-LINK™ terminal on the TV.
Note: TV Guide On Screen™ program data is available through the ANT-1 and ANT-2 antenna inputs and also through the VIDEO 1 inputs if you
have a cable box connected to VIDEO 1. TV Guide On Screen™ program data is not available through any other inputs on this TV. See the
connection information on pages 15–27.
The G-LINK™ connection is necessary to enable the following features of your TV Guide On Screen™ system:
• If you have a Cable box, you need to connect the G-LINK™ cable from the Cable box to the G-LINK™ terminal to receive the
TV Guide On Screen™ program listings for your Cable service.
• If you have a VCR, you need to connect the G-LINK™ cable from the VCR to the G-LINK™ terminal to use the TV Guide
On Screen™ recording features.

To connect to the G-LINK™ terminal: Front of Cable box

1. Locate the infrared sensor on the front of your VCR or
Cable box. The sensor is marked on some devices.*
2. Align one of the G-LINK™ (IR blaster) cable’s wands about
1 inch away from the infrared sensor on the front of the
VCR and attach it using double-sided mounting tape.
Front of VCR
If you have a Cable box, attach the other wand in a similar
manner. (See illustration at right.)
Note: If you do not have a Cable box, coil the second wand
with a rubber band and leave it behind the TV.
Infrared
3. Plug the G-LINK™ (IR blaster) cable’s plug into the TV’s sensor
G-LINK™ terminal.
G-LINK™ (IR blaster) cable wand
For details on setting up the TV Guide On Screen™ system: (approx. 1 inch from device)
See Chapter 5. Back of TV

For details on using the TV Guide On Screen™ interactive

program guide:
See Chapter 7.
* If you cannot locate the device’s infrared sensor:
1. Turn OFF the device.
2. Starting at the lower left corner of the device, place the end of the
device’s remote control (with the infrared emitter) so it touches the
front of the device and press POWER. (Do not use the TV’s remote
control for this step.)
3. If the device turns on, the point at which the remote control touched
the device is the location of the sensor.
4. If the device does not turn on, move the remote control slightly to the
right and press POWER again.
5. Repeat step 4 until you locate the device’s infrared sensor.

Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.

28
 Chapter 2: Connecting your TV

Connecting a personal computer (PC)

This connection allows you to view the image of a personal TV
computer (PC) on the TV screen. When connecting a PC
to the TV, use an analog RGB (15-pin) computer cable and
a PC audio cable.
– To use a PC, set the monitor output resolution on the
PC before connecting it to the TV. The following signals
can be displayed.
• VGA: 640 × 480 @ 60Hz
• SVGA: 800 × 600 @ 60Hz
• XGA: 1024 × 768 @ 60Hz
Other formats or non-standard signals may not be
displayed correctly.
Computer Audio cable
– To display the optimum picture, use the PC setting
Audio
feature. (see “Using the PC setting feature” on page 94).
output

Signal names for mini D-sub 15 pin

connector

Pin assignment for RGB/PC

terminal

5 1 Conversion
adapter
10 6 (if necessary)
15 11
Note:
Pin No. Signal name • Some PC models cannot be connected to this TV.
1 R • An adapter is not needed for computers with a DOS/V compatible mini
D-sub 15-pin terminal.
2 G
• Depending on the DVD’s title and the specifications of the PC on which
3 B
you are playing the DVD-Video, some scenes may be skipped or you
4 NC (not connected) may not be able to pause during multi-angle scenes.
5 NC
6 Ground
7 Ground
8 Ground
9 NC
10 Ground
11 NC
12 NC
13 H-sync
14 V-sync
15 NC

Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.

29
 Chapter 2: Connecting your TV

Connecting a home network

The Toshiba Home Interactive Network Connection (THINC™) feature allows you to network the TV with your home
PC (personal computer), which will enable access to the following features:
■ File sharing
You can access JPEG and MP3 files that are stored on your networked home PC and view/play them on the TV.
• Connect your TV to your PC /network according to either Example #1 or Example #2, below left.
• Does NOT require Internet/e-mail service.

■ E-mail scheduling of recordings and reminders

You can schedule recordings and reminders by sending an e-mail to the TV from any PC.
• Connect your TV to your home network according to Example #3, below right.
Note: This connection also enables file sharing. See Chapters 10 and 11
for details on configuring
• Requires the following:
and using e-mail scheduling,
– Home Internet service. file sharing, the JPEG Picture
– A dedicated e-mail address for the TV (different from your personal e-mail address). Viewer, and the MP3 Audio Player.
– A compatible recording device.
• Contact your ISP (Internet Service Provider) to obtain and set up Internet/e-mail service.
• See Chapter 2 for recording device connection instructions.

Note:
• The TV’s home network feature is compatible only with Microsoft® Windows® 2000 and the Home or Professional
version of Microsoft® Windows® XP Service Pack 1 and Service Pack 2. See Chapter 11 for details.
• The TV’s home network connection enables e-mail scheduling and file sharing only. You will NOT be able to
use the TV to access the Internet.

Example #1: Connecting the TV to a home network Example #3: Connecting the TV to a home network
without an Internet connection with an Internet connection
(for file sharing only) (for e-mail scheduling and file sharing)
TV back panel
You will need:
You will need:  one coaxial or telephone cable (depending on your modem)
 two or more standard  three standard Ethernet cables
Ethernet cables (the  one router/switch*
number of cables
Hub or switch
 one modem (DSL or cable)*
depends on the TV back panel
number of PCs you Do not connect the phone jack to
connect to your the LAN port.
PC
network)
 one hub or switch
PC

Modem (DSL or cable) Router/switch*

Example #2: Connecting the TV directly to a PC

without an Internet connection
(for file sharing only) [1] [2] [2]
TV back panel

You will need: Cable or phone jack

 one Ethernet crossover PC
cable [2]
_____________
Note: You cannot use [1] = Coaxial or
standard Ethernet cable Ethernet telephone cable _____________
with this connection. crossover (depending on
PC cable * Your router/switch may be part of your
your modem type) DSL or cable modem. Your switch may be
[2] = Standard Ethernet separate from your router. For assistance,
cable contact your ISP or an IT professional.

Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.

30
 3 Using the remote control

Learning about the remote control

The buttons used for operating the TV only are described here. For a
complete list of the remote control’s functions, see the remote control
functional key chart on pages 34–35.
For a list of the buttons that operate the TV Guide On Screen™ system, see
page 59.

POWER turns the TV on and off. Press POWER to turn on the TV. The blue
LED indicator on the TV front will be illuminated. Press POWER again to
turn off the TV.
Note: The Quick Restart™ setting will affect the amount of time it takes for the
picture to appear when you turn on the TV. See page 56 for details.
SLEEP accesses the sleep timer (page 93).
LIGHT The first press of the LIGHT button lights the keypad and turns on
the Illumination mode. With the Illumination mode on, pressing any key
lights the keypad for 5 seconds (10 seconds if you’re in programming
mode). Subsequent presses of the LIGHT button toggle between turning
the Illumination mode on and off.
Channel Numbers (0–9, –/100) directly tune channels. The “–” button is used
to tune digital channels (page 76) or to display the favorite channel list
(page 49).
INPUT selects the video input source (page 72).
MODE cycles through the six remote control device modes: TV, CBL/SAT,
VCR/PVR, DVD, AUDIO1, and AUDIO2. The mode indicator light will
remain lit for a few seconds (page 33).
PIC SIZE cycles through the five pictures sizes: Natural, TheaterWide 1/2/3,
and Full (page 77).
TheaterNet™ DEVICE displays a list of available TheaterNet devices (page 50).
TheaterNet™ CTRL accesses the on-screen IR device control icons (page 51).
MENU accessesthe main TV menu system (pages 40 and 41) or opens a
menu in the TV Guide On Screen™ system (Chapter 7).
TV GUIDE opens the TV Guide On Screen™ system (Chapter 7).
INFO provides detailed information on highlighted items in the TV Guide
On Screen™ system (Chapter 7).
ENTER activates highlighted items in the main menu system and the
TV Guide On Screen™ system.
When a menu is on-screen, these buttons select or
Arrow buttons (yz x •)
adjust programming menus. (Also see x / • on the next page.)
CH yz cycles through programmed channels when no menu is on-screen
(page 47) and functions as page up/down when a menu is on-screen or when Note: The error message “Not
the TV Guide On Screen™ system is open (Chapter 7). Available” will appear if you press a
key for a function that is not available

(Continued on next page)

Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.

31
 Chapter 3: Using the remote control

Learning about the remote control (continued)

VOL yz adjusts the volume level.
EXIT closes on-screen menus and the TV Guide On Screen™ system.
CH RTN returns to the last viewed channel (page 76), or stops the picture viewer slide show
(page 103).
Live returns viewing of the TV back to the live program, while continuing to record to the Toshiba
Symbio™ AVHD recorder (pages 26 and 55).
RECALL displays TV setting information on-screen (page 95).
MUTE reduces or turns off the sound (page 89).
TV/VCR selects TV mode to view one program while recording another.
SKIP SS| and |TT jump forward and backward one day in the TV Guide On Screen™ listings
(Chapter 7).
LIST displays the Toshiba Symbio™ AVHD recorder play list (if available) (page 26).
FAV CH yz tunes to the next higher/lower favorite channel (page 49).
HOME ( ) accesses the home function of the Channel Browser™ feature (page 75)
x/ • While watching TV, these buttons open the Channel Browser banner and tune to the
previous/next channel in the channel history (page 74). (Also see “Arrow buttons” on previous
page.)
SPLIT turnsthe POP feature on and off (page 81) or locks/unlocks the TV Guide On Screen™
video window (page 60).
PIC MODE selects the picture mode (page 84).
Remote control effective range
FAV SCAN accesses the favorite channel search function (page 83).
For optimum performance, aim the remote
FREEZE accesses the freeze feature (page 83). control directly at the TV and make sure
there is no obstruction between the
remote control and the TV.

Point remote control

toward remote sensor
on front of TV.

16.4 ft (5m)

Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.

32
 Chapter 3: Using the remote control

Installing the remote control batteries

To install the remote control batteries:
Caution: Always dispose of batteries in a designated disposal location. Never
throw batteries into a fire.
1. Slide the battery cover off the back of the remote control.
2. Install two “AA” size alkaline batteries. Match the + and – symbols on
the batteries to the symbols on the battery compartment.
3. Slide the battery cover on to the remote control until the lock snaps.
Caution:
Never throw batteries into a fire.
Note:
• Be sure to use AA size batteries.
• Dispose of batteries in a designated disposal area.
• Batteries should always be disposed of with the
environment in mind. Always dispose of batteries in
accordance with applicable laws and regulations.
• If the remote control does not operate correctly, or if the
operating range becomes reduced, replace batteries
with new ones.
• When necessary to replace batteries in the remote
control, always replace both batteries with new ones.
Never mix battery types or use new and used batteries in
combination.
• Always remove batteries from remote control if they are
dead or if the remote control is not to be used for an
extended period of time. This will prevent battery acid
from leaking into the battery compartment.

Using the remote control MODE button to control your other devices
Your TV remote control has one dedicated TV mode and five programmable
multi-brand modes: CBL/SAT, VCR/PVR, DVD, AUDIO 1, and AUDIO 2. The
default device modes and programmable device modes are listed below.
Note: The TV remote control is preprogrammed to operate most Toshiba devices. If
you own a non-Toshiba device or a Toshiba device that the remote control is not Number (1-6)
preprogrammed to operate, you will need to program the remote control. See
“Programming the remote control to operate your other devices” on page 36. MODE

MODE Default device mode control (before programming)

1) TV Toshiba TV
2) CBL/SAT Toshiba Satellite receiver
3) VCR/PVR Toshiba VCR
4) DVD Toshiba DVD
5) AUDIO 1 Pioneer Audio receiver
6) AUDIO 2 Pioneer LD

MODE Device mode control after programming Note:

1) TV Toshiba TV Although your new TV’s remote control includes
2) CBL/SAT codes for many devices, it may not include
codes for some or all of the features on certain
3) VCR/PVR devices you wish to control. If you are unable to
4) DVD Multi-brand video/audio devices program the TV’s remote control to operate
5) AUDIO 1 your device or some of the features on that
device, use the device’s remote control or the
6) AUDIO 2
controls on the device.
You can directly select the device mode by pressing the corresponding
number button (1-6) while pressing the MODE button.

Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.

33
 Chapter 3: Using the remote control

Remote Control functional key chart

Toshiba TV Cable Satellite VCR DVD/LD Receiver CD PVR
Key Label
(TV) (CBL/SAT) (CBL/SAT) (AUDIO) (AUDIO) (VCR)
MODE Remote control device mode selection
LIGHT Lights the remote key, and toggles between enabled and disabled Illumination mode.*1
SLEEP Sleep timer --- --- --- --- --- --- ---
POWER Power Power Power Power Power Power Power Power
1 Digit 1 Digit 1 Digit 1 Digit 1 Digit 1 AV input 1 Digit 1 Digit 1
2 Digit 2 Digit 2 Digit 2 Digit 2 Digit 2 AV input 2 Digit 2 Digit 2
3 Digit 3 Digit 3 Digit 3 Digit 3 Digit 3 AV input 3 Digit 3 Digit 3
4 Digit 4 Digit 4 Digit 4 Digit 4 Digit 4 AV input 4 Digit 4 Digit 4
5 Digit 5 Digit 5 Digit 5 Digit 5 Digit 5 CD Digit 5 Digit 5
6 Digit 6 Digit 6 Digit 6 Digit 6 Digit 6 Tuner Digit 6 Digit 6
7 Digit 7 Digit 7 Digit 7 Digit 7 Digit 7 Phono Digit 7 Digit 7
8 Digit 8 Digit 8 Digit 8 Digit 8 Digit 8 Cassette Digit 8 Digit 8
9 Digit 9 Digit 9 Digit 9 Digit 9 Digit 9 Aux Digit 9 Digit 9
0 Digit 0 Digit 0 Digit 0 Digit 0 Digit 0 --- Digit 0, 10 Digit 0
100/– – (digital --- – (sub 100 +10 --- --- ---
- separator) channel)
INPUT TV/Video TV TV TV TV TV TV TV
select
PIC SIZE Selects the TV TV TV TV TV TV TV
image shape.
MENU/ Menu/ --- Action, --- Menu --- --- Menu
ACTION Guide Menu Menu
TV GUIDE/SETUP TV Guide --- Guide --- DVD setup --- --- Guide
INFO/ Guide Info --- INFO --- Top menu --- --- INFO
TOP MENU
TheaterNet TheaterNet --- --- --- Subtitle --- --- ADVANCE
DEVICE/SUBTITLE Device
TheaterNet TheaterNet --- --- --- Audio --- --- ---
CTRL/AUDIO Control
ENTER Enter --- Enter, Select --- Enter --- --- Enter
y Menu select --- Menu select --- Menu select --- --- Menu select
up up up up
z Menu select --- Menu select --- Menu select --- --- Menu select
down down down down
x• Menu select --- Menu select --- Menu select --- --- Menu select
left/right left/right left/right left/right
EXIT/ Exit --- Exit --- DVD clear --- --- EXIT
DVD CLEAR
CH yz Channel Channel Channel Channel --- Channel --- Channel
PAGE +/– up/down, up/down up/down up/down up/down up/down
Page up/down
VOL yz Volume Volume Volume Volume Volume Volume Volume Volume
up/down*2 up/down*2 up/down*2 up/down*2 up/down*2 up/down*2 up/down*2 up/down*2
CH RTN/ Previous Previous Previous --- DVD --- --- ---
DVD RTN channel channel channel return
Live Live --- --- --- --- --- --- Live TV
RECALL On-screen --- --- --- On-screen --- --- ---
display display

Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.

34
 Chapter 3: Using the remote control

Remote Control functional key chart (continued)

Toshiba TV Cable Satellite VCR DVD/LD Receiver CD PVR
Key Label
(TV) (CBL/SAT) (CBL/SAT) (AUDIO) (AUDIO) (VCR)
MUTE Sound mute*2 Sound mute*2 Sound mute*2 Sound mute*2 Sound mute*2 Sound mute*2 Sound mute*2 Sound mute*2
SLOW x Slow FWD Slow FWD Slow FWD
--- --- --- --- ---
• --- Slow REW ---
SKIP x Skip FWD Skip FWD Skip FWD
--- --- --- --- ---
• Skip REW Skip REW Skip REW
REW Rewind --- --- Rewind Rewind --- Rewind Rewind
PAUSE/STEP Pause --- --- Pause Pause --- Pause Pause
PLAY Play --- --- Play Play --- Play Play
FF Fast FWD --- --- Fast FWD Fast FWD --- Fast FWD Fast FWD
TV/VCR --- --- TV/SAT TV/VCR --- --- --- Reverse
DISC/AM/FM --- --- --- --- Disc shift AM/FM Disc shift Replay
STOP Stop --- --- Stop Stop --- Stop Stop
REC REC Menu --- --- Record --- --- --- Record
(Single Click) (Double Click) (Double Click)
LIST LIST --- --- --- --- --- --- ---
FAV CH yz FAV channel --- --- --- --- --- --- ---
up/down
HOME HOME --- --- --- --- --- --- ---
SPLIT Split TV TV TV TV TV TV TV
PIC MODE PIC MODE TV TV TV TV TV TV TV
FAV SCAN FAV SCAN --- --- --- --- --- --- ---
FREEZE Freeze TV TV TV TV TV TV TV

Notes:
• “---” = key does not send a signal in that remote control mode.
• “ TV” = key will affect the TV, even though the remote control is not in TV mode.
* 1 Backlight key is toggle. Does not send IR signal.
* 2 Volume will affect the TV by default. When the volume is unlocked, all the devices will have their own volume if their ID has volume data.
The AUDIO modes (receiver, CD) will have their own volume if volume lock is set on TV, CBL/SAT, VCR/PVR, or DVD mode. See
“Using the volume lock feature” on page 37.

Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.

35
 Chapter 3: Using the remote control
Programming the remote control to operate your other devices
Device code setup
1. Refer to the multi-brand remote control device code table
on pages 38–39 to find the code for the brand of your
device.
If more than one code is listed, try each one separately until
you find one that works.
2. Press MODE until the Mode indicator for the device
(CBL/SAT, VCR/PVR, DVD, AUDIO 1, AUDIO 2) lights
up.
3. While holding down the RECALL button, press the
Channel Number buttons to enter the four-digit code for
your brand of device. If a valid code is entered, the mode
indicator will blink twice. If an invalid code is entered, the
mode indicator will blink one long blink.
4. Point the remote control at the device and press POWER to
test the code.
If the device responds to the remote control:
You have entered the correct code.
If the device does not respond to the remote control:
You may have entered the wrong code. Repeat steps 3
and 4 using another code.
Note: In addition to POWER, confirm that all necessary keys
on the TV remote control operate your device. If some keys
are not operational, repeat the device code setup using
another code (if other codes are listed for your device). If,
after trying all listed codes, the necessary keys do not operate
your device, use the device’s original remote control.
5. To control the TV, repeatedly press MODE to select “TV.”
Note:
• Although the TV remote control includes codes for many devices, it may
not include codes for some or all of the features on certain devices you
want to control. If you are unable to program the TV remote control to
operate your device or some of the features on that device, use the
device’s remote control or the controls on the device.
• Each time you change the batteries you will need to reprogram the
remote control.
• Some newer VCRs respond to either of two codes. These VCRs have a
switch labeled “VCR1/VCR2.” If your VCR has this kind of switch and
does not respond to the codes for your VCR brand, set the switch to the
other position (“VCR1” or “VCR2”) and reprogram the remote control.
Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.
36
Searching and sampling the code of
a device (8500)
If you do not know the device code for a particular device, you
can cycle the remote control through the available codes for that
device mode and sample the functions to find the code that
operates the target device. The keys available to be sampled,
provided they are applicable to that mode, are POWER, 1,
VOL y, CH y, and PLAY. Invalid keys will be ignored while in
program mode.
To cycle through each available device code and sample its
functions:
1. Press MODE to select the mode you want to set up.
2. While holding down RECALL, press 8 – 5 – 0 – 0. The
remote control will enter program mode.
3. Point the remote control at the target device and press
POWER (or other function buttons that are available to be
sampled).
4. If the device responds to the remote control:
Press RECALL to store the device code. The mode
indicator will blink twice and the remote control will exit
the program mode.
If the device does not respond to the remote control:
Press y, and then press POWER. Repeat this step until
the device responds to the remote control, and then press
RECALL.
Note: When a search cycle is completed, the mode
indicator will blink three times. The remote control will
begin to cycle through the available codes again. If no key
is pressed within 10 seconds while programming, the
remote control will exit the program mode and return to the
previous code.
POWER
Numbers
MODE
y
CH y
VOL y
RECALL
 Chapter 3: Using the remote control

Programming the remote control to operate your other devices (continued)

Using the volume lock feature (8000) Operational feature reset (8900)
For the TV, CABLE/SAT, VCR, and DVD modes, the volume This feature clears all programmed remote control features not
controls (VOL yz and MUTE) can be locked to the selected related to “Device code setup” and resets the Volume Lock to “TV.”
device mode. This feature does not apply to the AUDIO 1 and To reset the features:
AUDIO 2 modes.
While holding down the RECALL button, press 8 –9 –0 – 0.
To lock the volume controls to always control the The Mode indicator will blink two times, and then pause
CABLE/SAT device volume (for example): and blink two more times.
1. Repeatedly press MODE to select CABLE/SAT mode.
2. While holding down the RECALL button, press 8 – 0 – 0 – 0.
3. Press VOL y.
The CABLE/SAT mode light will blink two times (locked).
To reset the volume controls to the original device mode:
1. While holding down RECALL, press 8 – 0 – 0 – 0. Numbers
2. Press VOL z. MODE
The mode light will blink four times (unlocked).

VOL yz

RECALL

Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.

37
 Chapter 3: Using the remote control

Multi-brand remote control device codes

VCRs/PVRs VCRs/PVRs (cont.) Cable boxes
Brand Code Brand Code Brand Code
ADMIRAL 0135 PHILCO 0131, 0124, 0127, ABC 1124
AIWA 0127, 0132, 0181 0123, 0126, 0120, ARCHER 1132, 1125
AKAI 0129, 0114, 0115, 0143 CABLEVIEW 1105, 1132
0116 PHILIPS 0131, 0123, 0124, CITIZEN 1122, 1105
AUDIO DYNAMIC 0139, 0111 0173 CURTIS 1112, 1113
BELL&HOWELL 0105, 0113 PIONEER 0123 DIAMOND 1124, 1132, 1125
BROKSONIC 0120, 0126, 0180 PROSCAN 0145, 0100, 0123, EAGLE 1129
CANON 0123, 0125 0124, 0131, 0146, EASTERN 1134
CCE 0143 0101, 0102, 0133 GCBRAND 1132, 1105
CITIZEN 0106 QUASAR 0121, 0122, 0123, GEMINI 1122, 1143
CRAIG 0105, 0129, 0106 0124 G.I./JERROLD 1119, 1124, 1125,
CURTIS MATHES 0145, 0124, 0127 RADIO SHACK 0133, 0124, 0105, 1126, 1127, 1120,
DAEWOO 0143, 0101, 0124, 0136, 0109, 0140, 1121, 1122, 1111,
0175 0127 1123, 1152
DBX 0139, 0110, 0111 RCA 0133, 0145, 0100, HAMLIN 1140, 1141, 1142,
DIMENSIA 0145 0123, 0124, 0131, 1145, 1118, 1112
EMERSON 0143, 0126, 0119, 0146, 0101, 0102, HITACHI 1103, 1124
0103, 0125, 0142, 0170, 0172, 0174, MACOM 1103, 1104, 1105,
0120, 0118 0176, 0183 1108
FISHER 0105, 0108, 0109, REALISTIC 0124, 0105, 0136, MAGNAVOX 1133
0107, 0113, 0165 0109, 0140, 0127 MEMOREX 1130
FUNAI 0127, 0126, 0120, Replay TV 7102 MOVIETIME 1132, 1105
0134 SAMSUNG 0137, 0102, 0104, OAK 1139, 1137, 1102
GE 0133, 0145, 0124 0133 PANASONIC 1109, 1110, 1114,
GO VIDEO 0137, 0151, 0163, SAMTRON 0163 1151, 1153
0149, 0150, 0182 SANSUI 0139, 0126, 0120, PHILIPS 1128, 1129, 1130,
GOLDSTAR 0106 0152 1106, 1107, 1150,
GRADIENTE 0170, 0171, 0168, SANYO 0105, 0109, 0113 1131
0134, 0156 SCOTT 0101, 0102, 0104, PIONEER 1101, 1116
HITACHI 0123, 0145, 0100, 0109, 0138, 0140, PULSAR 1105, 1132
0127, 0168 0147, 0148, 0126 PUSER 1132
INSTANT REPLAY 0124, 0123 SEARS 0105, 0106, 0107, RCA 1115
JENSEN 0139 0108, 0100 REALISTIC 1132
JVC 0139, 0110, 0111, SHARP 0135, 0136, 0167, REGAL 1112, 1118, 1140,
0134, 0157, 0158, 0162 1141, 1142, 1145,
0184, 0185, 7104 SHINTOM 0117 1149
KENWOOD 0139, 0110, 0106, SIGNATURE 2000 0127, 0135 REGENCY 1134
0111 SINGER 0117 REMBRANT 1137, 1132, 1105,
LG 0159 SONY 0128, 0129, 0130, 1138
LXI 0127, 0106, 0100, 0153, 0154, 0155, SAMSUNG 1105
0107, 0108, 0105, 7101 S.A. 1111, 1112, 1113
0109 SV2000 0127 SLMARK 1105, 1101
MAGNAVOX 0131, 0123, 0124, SYLVANIA 0131, 0123, 0124, SPRUCER 1105, 1110
0173 0127, 0178 STARGATE 1132, 1105
MARANTZ 0139, 0110, 0111 SYMPHONIC 0127, 0168, 0177 TELECAPTION 1148
MARTA 0106 TASHIRO 0106 TELEVIEW 1101, 1105
MEMOREX 0124, 0109 TATUNG 0139, 0110, 0111 TEXSCAN 1144
MGA 0138, 0140, 0147, TEAC 0139, 0110, 0127, TOCOM 1135, 1136, 1147
0148, 0141, 0142 0111 TOSHIBA 1104, 1146
MINOLTA 0100, 0145 TECHNICS 0121, 0122, 0123, UNIKA 1132, 1125
MITSUBISHI 0138, 0140, 0147, 0124 UNIVERSAL 1122, 1132
0148, 0141, 0142, TEKNICA 0124, 0127, 0112 VIDEOWAY 1106
0161, 0164 THOMSON 0179, 0183 VIEWSTAR 1129, 1130
MULTITECH 0147, 0127, 0104 Tivo 7100, 7101 ZENITH 1117, 1100
NEC 0139, 0110, 0111, TOSHIBA 0101, 0146, 0166, ZENITH/DRAKE 1100
0134 0160 SATELLITE
OLYMPIC 0124, 0123 VECTOR RESEARCH 0111
OPTIMUS 0128, 0121, 0135, WARDS 0135, 0136, 0109,
0106 0144, 0106
ORION 0126, 0120, 0132 YAMAHA 0105, 0139, 0110,
PANASONIC 0123, 0124, 0121, 0111
0122 ZENITH 0144, 0106, 0169,
PENNEY 0124, 0100, 0145, 0180
0105, 0139, 0110,
0111
PENTAX 0100, 0111, 0145

Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.

38
 Chapter 3: Using the remote control

Multi-brand remote control device codes (continued)

CD players Receivers (cont.) DVD players
Brand Code Brand Code Brand Code
ADMIRAL 6126 PIONEER 4105, 4107, 4150 AIWA 3123
AIWA 6133, 6135 QUASAR 4119, 4118, 4121 APEX 3120
CARVER 6129 RCA 4103, 4105, 4127, DENON 3100, 3117
DENON 6142, 6151 4131, 4130, 4149 FERGUSON 3101
EMERSON 6139 SANSUI 4103, 4111, 4139 HITACHI 3111
FISHER 6105, 6106 SHARP 4134, 4137 JVC 3109
GARRARD 6117 SONY 4122 KENWOOD 3115, 3129
HARMAN/KARDON 6120, 6121, 6123, SOUNDE-SIGH 4138 KONKA 3119
6119 TEAC 4112, 4113, 4111, MITSUBISHI 3105
HITACHI 6107 4110 NORDMENDE 3101
JENSEN 6134 TECHNICS 4121, 4118, 4119 ONKYO 3121
JVC 6140, 6141, 6145, VICTOR 4132, 4133 ORITRON 3124
6148, 6151 YAMAHA 4101, 4102 PANASONIC 3100
KENWOOD 6100, 6101, 6111, PHILIPS 3103, 3116
6145 Laser disks PIONEER 3102
LXI 6136 Brand Code RAITE 3113
MAGNAVOX 6129, 6132 DENON 5114 RCA 3101, 3106
MARANTZ 6129 HITACHI 5100 SABA 3101
MACINTOSH 6121 KENWOOD 5102, 5103 SAMPO 3114
NAKAMICHI 6110 MAGNAVOX 5101 SAMSUNG 3110
ONKYO 6114, 6115 MARANTZ 5114 SHARP 3108
OPTIMUS 6108, 6118, 6120, MITSUBISHI 5114, 5118, 5119 SYLVANIA 3132, 3118
6122 NEC 5114 SMC 3125
PANASONIC 6124, 6125, 6127, PANASONIC 5104, 5105, 5106, SONY 3104, 3126, 3127,
6150 5115 3128
PHILIPS 6129, 6130, 6149 PHILIPS 5111 TECHNICS 3100
PIONEER 6108 PIONEER 5114 THOMSON 3101
QUASAR 6125, 6127, 6124 PROSCAN 5114 TOSHIBA 3103
RCA 6147, 6137, 6138, QUASAR 5104, 5105, 5106, WAVE 3122
6131, 6152 5115 YAMAHA 3100, 3130
SANSUI 6110, 6146, 6113 RCA 5114 ZENITH 3107, 3112
SANYO 6105 SAMSUNG 5112 VIALTA 3131
SCOTT 6110, 6146 SANYO 5114, 5117 FUNAI 3132, 3118
SHARP 6142, 6143 SHARP 5113, 5116
SHERWOOD 6120 SONY 5107, 5108, 5109,
Satellite receivers
SONY 6128 5110 Brand Code
SOUNDE-SIGH 6144 TEAC 5114 DISH NETWORK 2105, 2115, 2116,
TEAC 6112, 6116, 6118 TOSHIBA 5114 (Echostar) 2117
TECHNICS 6127, 6124, 6125 YAMAHA 5101 ECHOSTAR 2105
VICTOR 6140, 6141, 6145 EXPRESS VU 2105, 2115
YAMAHA 6102, 6103, 6104 G.E. 2106
G.I.(GENERAL 2108
Receivers INSTRUMENT)
Brand Code GRADIENTE 2114
ADMIRAL 4120 HITACHI 2103, 2111, 2112
AIWA 4125, 4126, 4146 HNS(Hughes) 2103
DENON 4134, 4135, 4136, MAGNAVOX 2101, 2102
4143 PANASONIC 2104
FISHER 4104 PHILIPS 2101, 2102, 2118
GARRARD 4113 PRIMESTAR 2108
HARMAN KARDON 4115, 4123, 4145 PROSCAN 2106, 2109, 2110,
JENSEN 4129 2113
JVC 4132, 4133, 4140, RCA 2106, 2109, 2110,
4144 2113
KENWOOD 4100, 4108, 4141, SONY 2107
4142, 4147 STAR CHOICE 2103, 2108
MAGNAVOX 4127, 4128 TOSHIBA 2100, 2103, 2119,
MARANTZ 4124 2120, 2121, 2122,
MCNTOSH 4116 2123, 2124, 2125
MITSUBISHI 4148 UNIDEN 2101, 2102
NAKAMICHI 4106, 4117
ONKYO 4109, 4114
OPTIMUS 4103, 4127, 4131,
4130
PANASONIC 4119, 4118, 4121
PHILIPS 4123

Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.

39
 4 Menu layout and navigation
The illustrations below and on the next page provide a quick overview of your TV’s menu system.

Main menu layout

To open the main menus (illustrated below), press MENU on the remote control or TV control panel.
➞ TV Guide On Screen™ ➞ Launch Gemstar / TV GUIDE
➞ Audio Player ➞ Launch MP3 audio player
Applications ➞ Picture Viewer ➞ Launch the picture viewer
➞ Digital CC / Audio Selector ➞ Launch the ATSC Digital CC Selector
➞ CableCARD™ ➞ Dynamic list of items provided by inserted CableCARD™.
(This option is not available if a CableCARD™ is not inserted.)

➞ Picture Settings ➞ [ Picture Settings Edit Window ]

Video ➞ Advanced Picture Settings ➞ [ Advanced Picture Settings Edit Window ]
➞ Theater Settings ➞ [ Theater Settings Edit Window ]

➞ Audio Settings ➞ [ Audio Settings Window ]

Audio ➞ Advanced Audio Settings ➞ [ Advanced Audio Settings Window ]
➞ Audio Setup ➞ [ Audio Setup Window ]

➞ Favorite Channels ➞ [ Favorite Channels Edit Window ]

Preferences ➞ Closed Caption Mode ➞ Off / CC1 / CC2 / CC3 / CC4 / T1 / T2 / T3 / T4
➞ Closed Caption Advanced ➞ [ Advanced Closed Captions Window ]
➞ Input Labeling ➞ [ Input Labeling Edit Window ]
➞ Menu Language ➞ English / Français / Español
➞ Home CH Setup ➞ [ Home channel Setup Window ]

➞ Enable Rating Blocking ➞ Off / On

Locks ➞ Edit Rating Limits ➞ [ Edit Rating Limits Edit Window ]
➞ Channels Block ➞ [ Channels Block Edit Window ] Applications
TV Guide On Screen
➞ Input Lock ➞ Off / Video / Video+ Audio Player
Picture Viewer
➞ Front Panel Lock ➞ Off / On Digital CC/Audio Selector
CableCARD

➞ GameTimer™ ➞ Off / 30 Min / 60 Min / 90 Min / 120 Min

➞ New PIN Code ➞ [ New PIN Code Entry Window ] Navigate Select CH RTN Back EXIT Exit

Note: Depending on receiving

➞ Installation ➞ [ Installation sub menu is launched (see page 41
signals, the background of the menu
for details) ]
picture will appear black.
➞ Sleep Timer ➞ [ Sleep Timer Edit Window ]
Setup ➞ On/Off Timer ➞ [ On/Off Timer window ]
➞ PC Settings ➞ [ PC Settings Edit Window ]
➞ HDMI 1 Audio ➞ Auto / Digital / Analog
➞ HDMI 2 Audio ➞ Auto / Digital / Analog
➞ Slide Show Interval ➞ 2 sec. / 5 sec. / 10 sec. / 15 sec. / 20 sec.
➞ AVHD Skip Time ➞ 1 min. / 3 min. / 5 min. / 15 min.
➞ Gray Level ➞ 1 / 2 / 3
➞ Quick Restart ➞ Off / On

Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.

40
 Chapter 4: Menu layout and navigation

Setup / Installation menu layout

To open the Installation menu (illustrated below), press MENU on the remote control or TV control panel, open the Setup menu,
select Installation, and press ENTER.

From Main Menu/Setup

menu, select “Installation” ➞ Input Configuration ➞ [ Input Configuration Window ]
➞ Channel Program ➞ ANT1
sub-menu ➔ Terrestrial
➞ ANT2 }
➞ [ Scan for new channels on desired Antenna ]

➞ Channel Add/Delete ➞ [ Channel Add / Delete Window ]

➞ Signal Meter ➞ [ Signal Meter Window ]

➞ IEEE1394 Devices ➞ [ IEEE1394 Device Management Window ]

Devices
➞ TheaterNet Devices ➞ [ TheaterNet Setup Window ]

➞ Basic Network Setup

Network ➞ E-mail Scheduling Setup
➞ Home File Server Setup

TV Guide On Screen™ Setup ➞ Start ➞ [ Launches TV Guide On Screen™ system setup ]

Time and Date ➞ Start Setup ➞ [ Time And Date Setup Window ]

System Status ➞ System Information ➞ [ System Information Window ]

Navigating the menu system

You can use the buttons on the remote control or TV control
TV control panel Remote control
panel to access and navigate your TV’s on-screen menu system.
• Press MENU to open the menu system.
• Use the up/down/left/right arrow buttons (yzx •) on the MENU
remote control or TV control panel to move in the (ENTER*)
corresponding direction in a menu. y
• Press ENTER to save your menu settings or select a
z
highlighted item. (A highlighted menu item appears in a •
different color in the menu.) MENU
x
• All menus close automatically if you do not make a EXIT
selection within 60 seconds, except the signal meter menu
ENTER
which closes automatically after 5 minutes.
y
• To close a menu instantly, press EXIT. *The MENU button on the TV x •
control panel functions as z
the ENTER button when a
menu is on-screen. EXIT

Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.

41
 5 TV Guide On Screen™ setup
Setting up the TV Guide On Screen™ system
The TV Guide On Screen™ system in your TV is a no-fee Configuring the location of your TV
interactive program guide that uses the information you enter Screen 1: Select the TV location (USA or Canada), and then
during the following setup process to provide you with a press ENTER.
channel lineup and program listings for your area. The listings
are automatically updated several times a day.
Note:
• You must first set up your TV according to the applicable
connection instructions in Chapter 2.
• If you connected a Toshiba AVHD Recorder, you
must perform the following TV Guide On Screen™ system setup
in order to use the Symbio’s full functionality. See pages 26 and
55 for further details about AVHD digital recorders.
To set up the TV Guide On Screen™ system:
Screen 2: Enter the ZIP code (U.S.A.) or postal code (Canada)
1. Press MENU and open the Setup menu. for your location (use the Number buttons on the remote
2. Highlight Installation and press ENTER. control for numbers and the yz buttons for letters), and
then press ENTER. Screen 3 appears.
Setup
Installation
Sleep Timer
On/Off Timer
PC Settings
HDMI 1 Audio Auto
HDMI 2 Audio Auto
Slide Show Interval 2 Sec

Navigate Select CH RTN Back EXIT Exit

3. A new set of Installation

menu icons appears TV Guide On Screen Setup
Screen 3: Do you have Cable service connected?
on-screen (see Start If you select Yes (and press ENTER), screen 4 appears.
illustration at right). If you select No (and press ENTER), screen 12 appears.
Open the TV Guide
On Screen™ Setup
menu, highlight Start, Navigate Select CH RTN Back EXIT Exit

and press ENTER.

4. The following screen appears. Highlight “Set up TV Guide

On Screen™ now” and press ENTER to continue.

Screen 4: Do you have a Cable box connected?

If you select Yes (and press ENTER), screen 5 appears.
If you select No (and press ENTER), screen 13 appears.

5. The following screen appears. Press ENTER to continue.

Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.

42
 Chapter 5: TV Guide On Screen™ setup
Setting up the TV Guide On Screen™ system (continued)
Screen 5: Which TV input is your cable box plugged into?
If you select ANT 1, screen 6 appears.
If you select Video 1, screen 7 appears.
Screen 6: Select the channel your TV is tuned to when using
your cable box, and then press ENTER. Screen 7 appears.
Screen 7: The on-screen diagram shows the correct way to
connect your Cable box to the G-LINK™ terminal on the
TV. Make sure the G-LINK™ cable is installed properly.
For additional details, see page 28.
Press ENTER to display screen 8.
Screen 8: Highlight your Cable box brand, and then press
ENTER to display screen 9.
Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.
Screen 9: To allow the TV Guide On Screen™ system to find
the correct code for your brand of Cable box, tune your
Cable box to channel 02, leave the Cable box and TV ON,
and then press ENTER. Screen 10 appears.
Screen 10: The TV Guide On Screen™ system will test the code
for the brand of Cable box you selected. Do not press any
keys on the TV, remote control, or Cable box until the
testing process is completed. When testing is completed,
screen 11 appears.
Screen 11: If your Cable box tuned itself to channel 09 after
testing, select Yes and press ENTER. If you selected ANT 1
in screen 5, screen 13 appears. If you selected Video 1 in
screen 5, screen 12 appears.
If your Cable box did not tune itself to channel 09 after
testing and you want to test the same code again, select
“Test this code again” and press ENTER.
If you want to test a different code, select No and press
ENTER. Screen 10 appears.
Note: Many cable boxes require testing more than one code.
(Continued on next page)
43
 Chapter 5: TV Guide On Screen™ setup

Setting up the TV Guide On Screen™ system (continued)

Screen 12: Do you have an antenna connected?
Select either Yes or No, and then press ENTER. Screen 13
appears.
Note: If you selected NO in screen 3, you must select YES in
this screen to receive a channel lineup and program listings.
Screen 16: The on-screen diagram shows the correct way to
connect your VCR to the G-LINK™ terminal on the TV.
Make sure the G-LINK™ cable is installed properly. For
additional details, see page 28.
Press ENTER to display screen 17.

Screen 13: Are the settings correct? Screen 17: Select your VCR brand, and then press ENTER.
If you select Yes, screen 14 appears. Screen 18 appears.
If you select No, screen 1 appears.

Screen 18: Turn on your VCR, insert a tape (either blank or

Screen 14: Congratulations! You have completed basic previously recorded), and then press PLAY. Screen 19
TV Guide On Screen™ system setup. appears.
Note: Read the on-screen information regarding the amount
of time it may take for listing information to download from
the TV Guide On Screen™ service.
Press ENTER to display screen 15.

Screen 19: The TV Guide On Screen™ system will test the code
for the brand of VCR you selected. Do not press any keys
on the TV, remote control, or VCR until the testing process
is completed. When testing is completed, screen 20 appears.
Screen 15: Is a VCR connected?
If you select Yes, screen 16 appears.
If you select No, screen 21 appears.

Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.

44
 Chapter 5: TV Guide On Screen™ setup

Setting up the TV Guide On Screen™ system (continued)

Screen 20: If your VCR stopped playing the tape after testing,
select Yes and press ENTER. Screen 21 appears. TV Guide On Screen™ Reminder
If your VCR did not
The TV Guide On Screen™ system receives program listing
stop playing the tape
data through your Cable or over-the-air video signal. In
after testing and you Did your VCR stop playing?
order to receive regular program listing updates, remember
want to test the same
to do the following:
code again, select
“Test this code again” 1. Leave the TV in standby mode when it is not in use
and press ENTER. by turning it OFF but leaving the power cord
plugged in.
If you want to test a
2. If you have a Cable box connected, leave it ON.
different code, select No and press ENTER. Screen 19
appears. 3. If you have a VCR connected, turn it OFF when not
Note: Many VCRs require testing more than one code.
in use. (Do not unplug the power cord.) See pages 15-
16 for VCR connection instructions.
4. If you have more than one Cable system in your area,
Screen 21: Review the setup information displayed on your TV
you may be prompted to select which Cable system’s
screen (an example is shown below).
program data to download. If so prompted, follow the
If the information on on-screen instructions.
your TV screen is Note: If the TV power cord is unplugged for an
correct for your setup, extended period of time, it may take up to 24 hours with
select “Yes, end setup” the TV in standby mode (power cord plugged in and
and press ENTER. power OFF) to download the TV Guide On Screen™
Screen 22 appears. program schedule. It may take up to a week before an
entire program schedule is available.

If the information is incorrect, select “No, repeat setup

process” and press ENTER. Screen 1 appears. Turning off the TV Guide On Screen™
automatic display feature
Screen 22: Congratulations! You have successfully completed
TV Guide On Screen™ system setup. After you set up the TV Guide On Screen™ system, the
program guide will display automatically (by default) when
Press ENTER to you turn on the TV. To turn off the automatic program guide:
display screen 23.
1. Press TV GUIDE on the remote control to open the
TV Guide On Screen™ system (if it is not already open).
2. Use the x • buttons to select the Setup menu.
3. Use the yz buttons to select “Change Default
Options,” and then press ENTER.
4. Use the yz buttons to select “General Defaults,” and
then press ENTER.
Screen 23: This screen provides helpful information on using 5. Set the “Auto Guide” option to Off.
your TV Guide On Screen™ system. 6. Use the yz buttons to select Done, and then press
Press ENTER to exit ENTER.
the TV Guide
On Screen™ setup and
watch TV.

Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.

45
 6 Setting up your TV
For menu navigation instructions, see Chapter 4.

Selecting the menu language Configuring the antenna input

sources
You can choose from three different languages (English, French
and Spanish) for the on-screen display of menus and messages.
(The TV Guide On Screen™ menus are in English, regardless of To configure the ANT 1 and ANT 2 input sources:
the language selected in this menu.) 1. Press MENU and open the Setup menu.
To select the menu language: 2. Highlight Installation and press ENTER. (A new set of
Installation menu icons will appear on-screen, as shown in
1. Press MENU and open the Preferences menu.
step 3 below.)
2. Highlight Menu Language and press •.
3. Press y or z to select your preferred menu language and
press ENTER. Setup
Installation
Sleep Timer
On/Off Timer
PC Settings
Preferences HDMI 1 Audio Auto
Favorite Channels English HDMI 2 Audio Auto
Closed Caption Mode Off Français Slide Show Interval 2 Sec
Closed Caption Advanced Español
Input Labeling Navigate Select CH RTN Back EXIT Exit
Menu Language English
Home CH Setup
3. Open the Terrestrial menu, highlight Input Configuration,
Navigate Select CH RTN Back EXIT Exit and press ENTER.
Note: The Terrestrial menu may not be accessible (items will
4. Press EXIT to close the Preferences menu.
be “grayed out”) in some instances (for example, if a cable
box is connected to the ANT 1 input or if one of the VIDEO
modes is the current input during TV Guide On Screen™
setup).

Terrestrial
Input Configuration
Channel Program
Channel Add/Delete
Signal Meter

Navigate Select CH RTN Back EXIT Exit

4. Press x or • to select the input source (Cable or Antenna)

for the ANT 1 input on the TV.
Note: If a cable box is connected to the ANT 1 input during
TV Guide On Screen™ setup, the entire Terrestrial menu will
not be accessible, including the input source for ANT 1, which
will automatically display “Cable Box.”
5. Press z and then x or • to select the input source (Cable
or antenna) for the ANT 2 input on the TV, if applicable. If
you have not connected anything to ANT 2, skip this step.
Input Configuration
Antenna 1 In Cable
Antenna 2 In Antenna

Cancel Done

6. To save your new settings, highlight Done and press

ENTER. To revert to your original settings, highlight
Cancel and press ENTER.

Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.

46
 Chapter 6: Setting up your TV

Programming channels into the TV’s channel memory

When you press CHANNEL y or z on the remote control or 4. Open the Terrestrial menu, highlight Channel Program,
TV control panel, your TV will stop only on the channels stored and press ENTER.
in the TV’s channel memory. 5. Highlight ANT 1 or
Follow the steps below to program channels into the TV’s ANT 2, depending on
channel memory. which antenna input Terrestrial
Input Configuration
you want to program Channel Program
Channel Add/Delete
channels for, and then
Programming channels automatically press ENTER to start
Signal Meter

Your TV can automatically detect all active channels in your area automatic channel
and store them in its memory. After the channels are programming. Navigate Select CH RTN Back EXIT Exit

programmed automatically, you can manually add or erase

individual channels. ANT 1 Antenna
Scanning channels, please wait ...
Note: 52%

Abort
• You must configure the antenna input sources before
programming channels (see page 46).
The TV will automatically cycle through all the channels
• If the input signal type is set to CABLE for an antenna input, the
for the antenna input you selected, and store all active
automatic channel programming process erases channels that
were previously programmed into the TV’s memory.
channels in the channel memory. While the TV is cycling
through the channels, the message “Scanning channels,
• If the input signal type is set to ANTENNA, the automatic please wait” appears (as shown above).
channel programming process does NOT erase channels that
were previously programmed into the TV’s memory, but adds 6. To cancel channel programming, either press EXIT or
newly found channels to the existing set of programmed highlight Abort in the on-screen display and press ENTER.
channels. To remove a channel from the memory, you must When channel programming is done, press CHANNEL
manually delete it (see next page). y or z to view the programmed channels.
• To tune the TV to a channel not programmed in the channel
memory, you must use the Channel Number buttons on the
remote control.
• Programming channels for an antenna input configured for
CABLE will take substantially longer than for an antenna input
configured for ANTENNA. This is normal; however, once
channel programming is completed, you should not have to Channel
repeat the programming process again unless your Cable TV Numbers
service lineup changes significantly.
• If you have a CableCARD™ inserted (page 14), channel
programming for ANT 1 is disabled because the CableCARD™
automatically loads the Cable channel list into the TV’s channel
memory.
To program channels automatically:
1. Make sure you have configured the antenna input sources.
See page 46 for details.
2. Press MENU and open the Setup menu. TV control panel
CHANNEL yz
3. Highlight Installation and press ENTER. (A new set of
Installation menu icons will appear on-screen).
MENU
(ENTER)
Setup
CHANNEL /
Installation
Sleep Timer
On/Off Timer
PC Settings
HDMI 1 Audio Auto
HDMI 2 Audio Auto
Slide Show Interval 2 Sec

Navigate Select CH RTN Back EXIT Exit

Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.

47
 Chapter 6: Setting up your TV

Programming channels into the TV’s channel memory (continued)

Manually adding and deleting channels in To add a channel to the channel memory:
the channel memory Highlight the unchecked box next to the channel number
you want to add, and then press ENTER to check the box.
After automatically programming channels into the channel
memory, you can manually add or delete individual channels. To manually add digital subchannels on a physical channel:
Use the Channel Numbers and the Dash (–/100) on the
To add or delete channels in the channel memory: remote control to enter the channel number (for example,
1. Press MENU and open the Setup menu. 56–1).
2. Highlight Installation and press ENTER. (A new set of If the channel is found, the number will be added to the list
Installation menu icons will appear on-screen, as shown in and the box will be checked.
step 3). If the channel is not found, a message will appear.
To remove a channel from the channel memory:
Setup
Highlight the checked box next to the channel number you
Installation
Sleep Timer want to remove, and then press ENTER to uncheck the
On/Off Timer
PC Settings
box.
HDMI 1 Audio Auto
HDMI 2 Audio Auto To save your new settings:
Slide Show Interval 2 Sec
Highlight Done and press ENTER.
Navigate Select CH RTN Back EXIT Exit

To revert to your original settings:

3. Open the Terrestrial menu, highlight Channel Add/Delete, Highlight Cancel and press ENTER before saving.
and then press ENTER.
To remove all channels from the channel memory:
Highlight Reset and press ENTER, and then highlight
Terrestrial Done and press ENTER.
Input Configuration
Channel Program Note:
Channel Add/Delete
Signal Meter • This action applies to the current antenna input only. To
delete/add channels on the other input, highlight the input
you want (ANT1 or ANT 2) and press ENTER.
Navigate Select CH RTN Back EXIT Exit • This action cannot be cancelled unless you highlight Cancel
and press ENTER before saving your changes.
4. The illustration below left shows channels programmed for
Channel Add/Delete ANT 1
the ANT 1 antenna input. To view the list of channels 2 Analog ANT 1
programmed for the ANT 2 or Cable box antenna input, 2-1 Digital ANT 2

press the y z buttons to highlight either “ANT 2” or 2-2

3
Digital
Analog
Cable Box

“Cable Box” and press ENTER. 4 Analog

5 Digital
Note: “Cable Box” will appear only if you connected a cable 6 Analog

box to your TV. 7 Analog Reset

7-1 Digital Cancel
Channel Add/Delete ANT 1 Channel Add/Delete Cable Box 8 Analog Done
2 Analog ANT 1 1 Analog ANT 1
2-1 Digital ANT 2 2 Analog ANT 2
2-2 Digital Cable Box 3 Analog Cable Box
3 Analog 4 Analog
4 Analog 5 Analog
5 Analog 6 Analog
6 Analog 7 Analog
7 Analog Reset 8 Analog Reset
7-1 Digital Cancel 9 Analog Cancel
8 Analog Done 10 Analog Done

Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.

48
 Chapter 6: Setting up your TV

Programming your favorite channels

You can program up to 27 channels as favorite channels into To clear your favorite channel lists:
three Favorite Channel sets (nine channels from the ANT 1 1. Press MENU and open the Preferences menu.
input, nine from the ANT 2 input, and nine from the Cable 2. Highlight Favorite Channels and press ENTER.
box input). You can then scan through your favorite channels
only, skipping other channels you do not normally watch. 3. Highlight Edit and press Edit Favorite Channels ANT 2

ENTER. 2
2-1
To add and delete channels in the Favorite Channels sets: 4. Highlight Reset and press 2-2
4-1
1. Press MENU and open the Preferences menu. ENTER. 5
17 - 1
2. Highlight Favorite Channels and press ENTER. 5. Highlight Done and press 17 - 2
28 - 1 Reset
3. Use the yz buttons to select either ANT 1, ANT 2, or ENTER. 28 - 2 Cancel

Cable box and press ENTER. 28 - 3 Done

4. Highlight Edit and press ENTER.

To tune your favorite channels for the current ANT input:
Preferences Favorite Channels ANT 1 Press FAV CH yz.
Favorite Channels
ANT 1
Closed Caption Mode
Closed Caption Advanced
Off Empty Empty Empty
ANT 2 To tune your favorite channels using the favorite channel
Input Labeling
Menu Language English
Empty Empty Empty
Cable Box
list:
Home CH Setup
Empty Empty Empty
Edit
Done
1. Press 100 to display the favorite channel list. 1 CH 4-1
2 CH 4-2
Navigate Select CH RTN Back EXIT Exit
2. Press the corresponding number button (1-9) 3 CH 9
4 CH 10
to select your desired channel.
To add a channel to the selected Favorite Channel set: Use the 5 CH 12

yz buttons to highlight an unchecked box next to a channel you Note: To tune your favorite channels for another 6 CH 17
7 CH 19
input, you will need to change the Input Selection
want to set as a favorite, and then press ENTER to check the box. 8 ---
first. 9 ---
To delete the channel from the selected Favorite Channels set:
Highlight a checked box and press Edit Favorite Channels ANT 1
To quickly scan through your favorite channels in a nine
ENTER to uncheck it. 2
picture multi-window (for the current ANT input):
3

Note: If you try to add more than 4 Press FAV SCAN. See page 83 for details.
5
Only 9 favorite channels are allowed,
nine favorite channels per input, an please
6 deselect other channels first.
Note:
error message will appear. You will 7
OK
8
need to delete (uncheck) a channel 9 Reset
• To tune to a channel from the FAV SCAN mode, highlight a
before you can add another. 10 Cancel window and press ENTER.
11 Done
• To scan your favorite channels for another input, you will need to
When done, highlight Done and press ENTER. change the Input Selection first.
To program favorite channels for another input:
Either... Highlight ANT 1, ANT 2, or Cable Box, which
will change the favorite channel settings in the selected
input. (This will not change the TV’s current input.) Channel Numbers
Or... Press INPUT to select ANT 1, ANT 2, or Cable Box 100
and then repeat steps 1–4.
“Cable Box” will appear only if you connected a cable box y
to your TV. x •
z
Favorite Channels ANT 2

ANT 1
CH 6 Empty Empty
ANT 2
Cable Box
Empty Empty Empty
FAV CH yz
Edit
Empty Empty Empty
Done
FAV SCAN

Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.

49
 Chapter 6: Setting up your TV

Setting up and using TheaterNet™ on-screen device control

The TheaterNet feature allows you to control many brands of 5. The TheaterNet Setup menu opens.
IEEE1394 and/or infrared remote-controlled A/V devices
TheaterNet Setup
through your TV using on-screen control icons and the TV’s Input Video 1 Select device
remote control. Type Cable type, brand,
and IR code
Brand General Instrum... from owners
Note: IR List 0000 manual.
IR Code 0 0 0 0 Test
• Although the TheaterNet on-screen device control feature includes
Reset Done
codes for many devices, it may not include codes for some or all of
the features on certain devices you wish to control. If you are
unable to program the TheaterNet feature to operate your device Using the x • buttons, select the Input the device is
or some of the features on that device, use the device’s remote connected to.
control or the controls on the device. Note: When the input is changed, all unsaved settings will be
• For IR pass-through device control information, see “Connecting a lost.
device to the IR blaster (IR pass-through)” on page 22. 6. Press z and then x • to select the device Type.
7. Press z and then x • to select the device Brand.
Setting up TheaterNet Note: When selecting a new brand, the IR code will be set to 0.
All device types except IEEE1394 require the following setup 8. Press z and then x • to select the device’s IR List.
process before you can control them using the TheaterNet on- 9. If the desired IR code is found, skip to step 10.
screen icons. If the desired IR code is not in the list, press z and use the
All compatible IEEE1394 devices are automatically recognized Channel Number buttons to enter the device IR code.
by the TheaterNet feature and do not require setup. Note: You can find the IR code for your device in the on-
Note: See page 25 for details about the IEEE1394 ports. If your screen list or in the TheaterNet device code table on pages
IEEE1394 device is not recognized through the IEEE1394 port or 52–54.
through the TheaterNet feature, it may be possible to set it up for IR
pass-through control as an infrared device (see page 22).
10. Highlight Test and press ENTER to test whether the device
responds to the code. If the device does not respond to the
To set up TheaterNet device control: code, repeat steps 8 and 9 using another code for the same
1. Make sure you have properly connected your infrared device.
remote-controlled device(s). See page 22 for details. When done, highlight Done and press ENTER or choose a
2. Press MENU and open the Setup menu. different Input for which to setup TheaterNet device
control.
3. Highlight Installation and press ENTER. (A new set of
Installation menu icons will appear on-screen, as shown in To remove a device from TheaterNet:
step 4).
1. Follow steps 1–5 above.
2. Highlight Reset and press ENTER.
Setup
Installation
Sleep Timer
On/Off Timer
PC Settings
HDMI 1 Audio Auto
HDMI 2 Audio Auto
Slide Show Interval 2 Sec

Navigate Select CH RTN Back EXIT Exit

4. Open the Devices menu, highlight TheaterNet Devices,

and then press ENTER.

Devices
IEEE1394 Devices
TheaterNet Devices

Navigate Select CH RTN Back EXIT Exit

Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.

50
 Chapter 6: Setting up your TV

Setting up and using TheaterNet™ on-screen device control (continued)

Using the TheaterNet control icons The following are examples of the TheaterNet on-screen
control icons for various devices.
1. Set up your infrared devices in TheaterNet, if you have not
already done so (see page 50). Toshiba Symbio™ AVHD Recorder control*
Note: IEEE1394 devices do not need to be set up in
TheaterNet because they appear automatically in the
TheaterNet menu.
2. Press DEVICE on the remote control to display the device
control selection screen. * If you connected a Toshiba AVHD Recorder, you must
TM

set up the TV Guide On Screen™ system in order to use the

Symbio’s full functionality. See Chapter 5 for details on setting up the
TV Guide On Screen™ system. See pages 26 and 55 for further
details about AVHD digital recorders.

TheaterNet

0 Video 2 1 Video 3

Toshiba Toshiba

DEVICE 2 ColorStream HD1 3 ColorStream HD2

Toshiba Toshiba
CTRL
y
x •
z
ENTER Toshiba

EXIT

3. Using the yzx • buttons, highlight the device you want

to control and press ENTER. Toshiba

TheaterNet

0 Video 2 1 Video 3
CH

Toshiba Toshiba

2 ColorStream HD1 3 ColorStream HD2

Toshiba Toshiba

4. The input automatically changes to the input for the

selected device, and the device’s control icons display on-
screen.
Toshiba ColorStream HD1

ENTER
TOP MENU SELECT EXIT

Highlight the icon for the function you want to control and
press ENTER.
To select the device’s control icons directly:
Press CTRL.
To close the on-screen control icons:
Press EXIT.
To view another source:
Press DEVICE and select the input source you want to
view.

Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.

51
 Chapter 6: Setting up your TV

TheaterNet™ IR device codes

Amplifiers Cable boxes (cont.) CD players (cont.)
Brand Code Brand Code Brand Code
Aiwa 0406 RadioShack 0015 Proton 0157
Bose 0674 Regal 0020, 0273, 0279 QED 0157
Carver 0269 Rembrandt 0011 Quasar 0029
Curtis Mathes 0300 Runco 0000 RCA 1062, 0032, 0053,
Denon 0160 Samsung 0144 0179, 0305, 0468,
GE 0078 Scientific Atlanta 0877, 0008, 0017, 0764
Harman/Kardon 0892 0477, 1877 Realistic 0179, 0180, 0420
JVC 0331 Signal 0015 Rotel 0157, 0420
Left Coast 0892 Signature 0011 SAE 0157
Linn 0269 Sony 1006 Sansui 0157, 0305
Luxman 0165 Starcom 0003, 0015 Sanyo 0179
Magnavox 0269 Stargate 0015 Scott 0305
Marantz 0892, 0321, 0269 Starquest 0015 Sears 0305
NEC 0264 Supercable 0276 Sharp 0861, 0037, 0180
Nakamichi 0321 Tocom 0012 Sherwood 1067, 0180
Optimus 0395, 0300 Torx 0003 Sonic Frontiers 0157
Panasonic 0308, 0521 Toshiba 0000 Sony 0490, 0000, 0100,
Parasound 0246 Tusa 0015 0185, 0604, 1364
Philips 0892, 0269 United Artists 0007 Soundesign 0145
Pioneer 0013, 0300 Zenith 0000, 0525, 0899 TDK 1208
Polk Audio 0892, 0269 Tascam 0420
RCA 0300 CD players Teac 0174, 0180, 0393,
Realistic 0395 Brand Code 0420
Sansui 0321 Aiwa 0157, 0124 Technics 0029, 0303
Shure 0264 Burmester 0420 Victor 0072
Sony 0689, 0220 California Audio Labs 0029, 0303 Wards 0157, 0053
Soundesign 0078, 0211 Carver 0157, 0179, 0437 Yamaha 0888, 0036, 0187,
Technics 0308, 0521 Classic 1297 1292
Victor 0331 DKK 0000 Yorx 0461
Wards 0078, 0013, 0211 DMX Electronics 0157
Yamaha 0354, 0133 Denon 0873, 0003 Laser disk players
Emerson 0305 Brand Code
Fisher 0174, 0179, 1325 Aiwa 0203
Cable boxes GPX 1296 Carver 0064, 0194, 0323
Brand Code Garrard 0393, 0420 Denon 0059, 0172
ABC 0003, 0008, 0014, Genexxa 0032, 0305 Disco Vision 0023
0007, 0011, 0017 Harman/Kardon 0157, 0173 Funai 0203
Americast 0899 Hitachi 0032 Harman/Kardon 0194
Bell & Howell 0014 JVC 0072, 1294 Hitachi 0023
Bell South 0899 KLH 1318, 1372, 1373 Magnavox 0194, 0217
Contec 0019 Kenwood 0681, 0826, 0626, Marantz 0064, 0194
Director 0476 0028, 0037, 0190 Mitsubishi 0059
Everquest 0015 Koss 1317 NAD 0059
Gemini 0015 Krell 0157 Optimus 0059
General Instrument 0476, 0003, 0276, LXI 0305 Panasonic 0204
0011, 0810 Linn 0157 Philips 0064, 0194
GoldStar 0144 MCS 0029 Pioneer 0059, 0023
Hamlin 0009, 0020, 0273 MTC 0420 Polk Audio 0194
Hitachi 0011 Magnavox 0157, 0305 Quasar 0204
Hytex 0007 Marantz 0626, 0029, 0157, Realistic 0203
Jasco 0015 0180 Samsung 0323
Jerrold 0476, 0003, 0276, Miro 0000 Sega 0023
0012, 0014, 0015, Mission 0157 Sony 0193, 0201
0011, 0810 NSM 0157 Technics 0204
Memorex 0000 Nikko 0174 Theta Digital 0194
Motorola 0476, 1106, 0276, Onkyo 0868, 0101 Yamaha 0217
0810 Optimus 1063, 0000, 0032,
Oak 0019, 0007 0037, 0145, 0179, Miscellaneous audio devices
Pace 0237 0305, 0420, 0437, Brand Code
Panasonic 0000, 0107 0468 Aiwa 0010, 0159, 0404
Paragon 0000 Panasonic 0029, 0303 Fisher 0052
Philips 0305, 0317 Parasound 0420 JVC 0073
Pioneer 0877, 0144, 0533, Philips 0626, 0157 Jerrold 0520, 0459
1877 Pioneer 1063, 1062, 0032, Scientific Atlanta 0460
Pulsar 0000 0305, 0468 Sony 0010, 0159, 0576
Quasar 0000 Polk Audio 0157 Starcom 0459

Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.

52
 Chapter 6: Setting up your TV

TheaterNet™ IR device codes (continued)

Video accessory (HDTV decoder) Receivers (cont.) VCRs
Brand Code Brand Code Brand Code
Panasonic 1120 Proscan 1254 Admiral 0048, 0209
Pioneer 1010 Quasar 0039 Adventura 0000
Princeton 0113, 0295 RCA 1023, 1254, 0080, Aiko 0278
Samsung 1190 0531, 1390, 1609 Aiwa 0037, 0000
Sensory Science 1126 Realistic 0181, 0195 Akai 0041
Sharp 1010 Samsung 1295 America Action 0278
Sansui 1089, 0189 American High 0035
Sanyo 0801, 1251 Asha 0240
Receivers Sharp 0186, 1286 Audiovox 0037, 0278
Brand Code Sherwood 0491, 0502, 1653 Beaumark 0240
ADC 0531 Sony 1058, 1258, 1158, Bell & Howell 0104
Aiwa 1089, 1405, 0121, 0158, 0474, 1367, Broksonic 0184, 0121, 0209,
0158, 0189, 0405, 1558, 1658,1758 0002, 0479, 1479
1388, 1641 Soundesign 0670 CCE 0072, 0278
Alco 1390 Stereophonics 1023 Calix 0037
Anam 1609 Sunfire 1313 Canon 0035
Apex Digital 1257 Teac 0463 Carver 0081
Arcam 1120 Technics 1308, 1309, 1518, Cineral 0278
Audiotronic 1189 0039, 0309 Citizen 0037, 0278, 1278
Audiovox 1390 Thorens 1189 Colt 0072
Bose 1229 Venturer 1390 Craig 0037, 0047, 0240,
Cambridge Soundworks 1370 Victor 0074 0072
Capetronic 0531 Wards 0014, 0080, 0158, Curtis Mathes 0060, 0035, 0162,
Carver 1089, 1189, 0042, 0189 0041, 0760, 1035
0189 Yamaha 0176, 0186, 1176 Cybernex 0240
Casio 0195 Yorx 0195 Daewoo 0045, 0278, 1278
Clarinette 0195 Zenith 0857 Denon 0042
Compaq 1136 Dynatech 0000
Curtis Mathes 0080 Electrohome 0037
Daewoo 1250 Satellite receivers Electrophonic 0037
Denon 1104, 1160, 0004, Brand Code Emerex 0032
1360 AlphaStar 0772 Emerson 0037, 0184, 0000,
Fisher 0042, 1801 Chaparral 0216 0121, 0043, 0209,
Garrard 0463 Crossdigital 1109 0002, 0278, 0479,
Harman/Kardon 0110, 0189, 0891 DishPro 1005, 0775 1278, 1479
Hewlett Packard 1181 Echostar 1005, 0775 Fisher 0047, 0104
JBL 0110, 1306 Expressvu 0775 Fuji 0035, 0033
JVC 0074, 1374 GE 0566 Funai 0000
KLH 1390 GOI 0775 GE 0060, 0035, 0240,
Kenwood 1313, 1027, 1570, General Instrument 0869 0760, 0807, 1035,
1569, 0027, 0042, HTS 0775 1060
0186 Hitachi 0819 Garrard 0000
Koss 1366 Hughes Network Systems 1142, 0749, 1749 Go Video 0432
LXI 0181 JVC 0775 GoldStar 0037, 0038, 1237
Lasonic 1798 Magnavox 0724, 0722 Gradiente 0000
Linn 0189 Memorex 0724 HI-Q 0047
Lloyd’s 0195 Mitsubishi 0749 Harley Davidson 0000
MCS 0039 Motorola 0869 Harman/Kardon 0081, 0038
Magnavox 1089, 1189, 0189, Next Level 0869 Harwood 0072
0195, 0391, 0531 Panasonic 0247, 0701 Headquarter 0046
Marantz 1089, 1189, 0039, Paysat 0724 Hitachi 0000, 0042, 0041
0189 Philips 1142, 0749, 0724, Hughes Network Systems 0042
Modulaire 0195 1076, 0722, 1749 JVC 0067, 0041
Musicmagic 1089 Proscan 0392 Jensen 0041
Nakamichi 0097 RCA 0392, 0566, 0855, KEC 0037, 0278
Onkyo 0135, 0842, 1298 0143 KLH 0072
Optimus 1023, 0042, 0080, RadioShack 0869 Keen 0693
0181, 0186, 0531, SKY 0856 Kenwood 0067, 0041, 0038
0670, 0738, 0801 Samsung 1109 Kodak 0035, 0037
Panasonic 1518, 0039, 0309, Sony 0639 LXI 0037
0367 Star Choice 0869 Lloyd’s 0000
Penney 0195 Toshiba 0749, 0790, 1052, Logik 0072
Philips 1089, 1189, 1269, 1053, 1054, 1285, MEI 0035
0189, 0391, 1120 1286, 1287, 1289, MGA 0240, 0043
Pioneer 1023, 0014, 0080, 1749 MGN Technology 0240
0150, 0244, 0531, Uniden 0724, 0722 MTC 0240, 0000
0630, 1384 Zenith 0856, 1856 Magnasonic 1278
Polk Audio 0189
Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.
53
 Chapter 6: Setting up your TV

TheaterNet™ IR device codes (continued)

VCRs (cont.) VCRs (cont.) DVD players (cont.)
Brand Code Brand Code Brand Code
Magnavox 0035, 0039, 0081, Scott 0184, 0045, 0121, Hitachi 0573, 0664
0000, 0149, 0563, 0043 Hiteker 0672
1781 Sears 0035, 0037, 0047, JBL 0702
Magnin 0240 0000, 0042, 0104, JVC 0558, 0623, 0867
Marantz 0035, 0081 0046, 1237 KLH 0717
Marta 0037 Semp 0045 Kenwood 0490, 0534, 0682,
Matsushita 0035, 0162, 0454 Sharp 0048, 0807, 0848 0737
Memorex 0035, 0162, 0037, Shintom 0072 Konka 0711, 0719, 0720,
0048, 0039, 0047, Shogun 0240 0721
0240, 0000, 0104, Singer 0072 Koss 0651
0209, 0046, 0454, Sonic Blue 0614, 0616 Lasonic 0798
0479, 1037, 1162, Sony 0035, 0032, 0000, Magnavox 0503, 0675
1237, 1262 0033, 0636, 1032, Malata 0782
Minolta 0042 1232 Marantz 0539
Mitsubishi 0067, 0043, 0807 Sylvania 0035, 0081, 0000, Microsoft 0522
Motorola 0035, 0048 0043, 1781 Mintek 0717
Multitech 0000, 0072 Symphonic 0000 Mitsubishi 0521
NEC 0104, 0067, 0041, TMK 0240 Nesa 0717
0038 Tatung 0041 Next Base 0826
Nikko 0037 Teac 0000, 0041 Norcent 0872
Noblex 0240 Technics 0035, 0162 Onkyo 0503, 0627
Olympus 0035 Teknika 0035, 0037, 0000 Oritron 0651
Optimus 1062, 0162, 0037, Thomas 0000 Panasonic 0490, 0632, 1362,
0048, 0104, 0432, Tivo 0618, 0636 1462, 1490
0454, 1048, 1162, Toshiba 0045, 0043, 0845 Philips 0503, 0539, 0646,
1262 Totevision 0037, 0240 0854
Orion 0184, 0209, 0002, Unitech 0240 Pioneer 0525, 0571, 0632
0479, 1479 Vector 0045 Polk Audio 0539
Panasonic 1062, 0035, 0162, Vector Research 0038 Princeton 0674
0225, 0454, 0616, Video Concepts 0045 Proscan 0522
1035, 1162, 1262 Videomagic 0037 RCA 0522, 0571, 0717,
Penney 0035, 0037, 0240, Videosonic 0240 0822
0042, 0038, 1035, Villain 0000 Rotel 0623
1237 Wards 0060, 0035, 0048, Rowa 0823
Pentax 0042 0047, 0081, 0240, Sampo 0698
Philco 0035, 0209, 0479 0000, 0042, 0072, Samsung 0573, 0820
Philips 0035, 0081, 0618, 0149, 0760 Sansui 0695
1081, 1181 White Westinghouse 0209, 0072, 1278 Sanyo 0670
Pilot 0037 XR-1000 0035, 0000, 0072 Sharp 0630
Pioneer 0067 Yamaha 0038 Sherwood 0633
Polk Audio 0081 Zenith 0039, 0000, 0209, Shinsonic 0533
Profitronic 0240 0033, 0479, 1479 Sony 0533, 0864, 1533
Proscan 0060, 0760, 1060 Sylvania 0675, 0821
Protec 0072 Technics 0490
Pulsar 0039 DVD players Techwood 0692
Quarter 0046 Brand Code Theta Digital 0571
Quartz 0046 Toshiba 0503, 0695, 1045
Aiwa 0641
Quasar 0035, 0162, 0454, Tredex 0800
Apex Digital 0672, 0717, 0755,
1035, 1162 Urban Concepts 0503
0794, 0796, 0797,
RCA 0060, 0240, 0042, XBox 0522
0830, 0856, 1100
0149, 0760, 0807,
Audiologic 0736
1035, 1060
B&K 0655, 0662
RadioShack 0000, 1037
Blue Parade 0571
Radix 0037
Broksonic 0695
Randex 0037
DVD2000 0521
Realistic 0035, 0037, 0048,
Daewoo 0784
0047, 0000, 0104,
Denon 0490, 0634
0046
Emerson 0591
ReplayTV 0614, 0616
Enterprise 0591
Runco 0039
Fisher 0670
STS 0042
GE 0522, 0717
Samsung 0240, 0045
GPX 0699, 0769
Sanky 0048, 0039
Go Video 0715
Sansui 0000, 0067, 0209,
Gradiente 0651
0041, 0479, 1479
Greenhill 0717
Sanyo 0047, 0240, 0104,
Harman/Kardon 0582, 0702
0046

Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.

54
 Chapter 6: Setting up your TV

Setting the AVHD device skip time Setting the time and date
When you connect an external AVHD (audio/video hard drive) Note: If you already set up the TV Guide On Screen™ system, the
device—such as the Toshiba Symbio™ AVHD Recorder—to time and date were set automatically and you can skip this step.
one of the TV’s IEEE1394 ports, you can use the AVHD device
To set the time and date:
skip time feature to set the number of minutes the device will
skip forward or backward when you press the SKIP buttons. 1. Press MENU and open the Setup menu.
Note: 2. Highlight Installation and press ENTER. (A new set of
Installation menu icons will appear on-screen, as shown in
• This TV will work best with the Toshiba AVHD
Recorder for recording high definition and standard definition
step 3 below.)
material from either tuner and for controlling live TV (pause/rewind/ 3. Open the Time And Date menu, highlight Start Setup, and
etc.). When the Symbio AVHD Recorder is connected to the TV, the press ENTER.
remote control keys (LIVE, STOP, REW, PAUSE, PLAY, etc.) are
automatically activated to allow pausing of live TV.
Time And Date
• When you connect an AVHD (or D-VHS) device, the TV Guide Start Setup
On Screen™ system is automatically configured to allow recording. See
page 26 for device connection information. See Chapters 5 and 7 for
details about setting up and using the TV Guide On screen™ system.

To set the AVHD device skip time:

Navigate Select CH RTN Back EXIT Exit
1. Press MENU and open
the Setup menu.
2. Highlight AVHD Skip
Setup
If you have not set up the TV Guide On Screen™ system, the
Sleep Timer 1 min

Time and press •. On/Off Timer 3 min following screen will appear. To set the time, highlight
PC Settings
Auto
Auto
5 min
Analog
15 min
TV Guide On Screen™ and press ENTER. The TV Guide
3. Press y or z to select HDMI 1 Audio
HDMI 2 Audio Auto
Auto On Screen™ setup sequence will start, and the time and date
the AVHD skip time (1, Slide Show Interval
AVHD Skip Time
2 Sec
15 min will be set automatically.
3, 5, or 15 minutes) and
Navigate Select CH RTN Back EXIT Exit
press ENTER. Time And Date

Your TV Guide On Screen system can provide accurate

time and date information.

It is recommended you set up TV Guide On Screen

first and use it to obtain the time and date.

Setting the HDMI™ audio mode Manual TV Guide On Screen Cancel

To set the HDMI audio mode: If you have already set up the TV Guide On Screen™ system, or
1. Press MENU and open if you have not set up the time, the time and date setting screen
the Setup menu. will appear and you will need to manually set the time and date.
Setup
2. Highlight HDMI 1 (or Installation Auto
Time And Date

2) Audio and press •. Sleep Timer

On/Off Timer
Digital
Analog Date (MM/DD/YY) 0 6/3 0/0 5
PC Settings Auto
3. Press z or y to select HDMI 1 Audio Auto Time (HH:MM) 1 1 : 1 1 AM
the HDMI audio mode HDMI 2 Audio
Slide Show Interval
Auto
2 Sec
(Auto, Digital, or
Navigate Select CH RTN Back EXIT Exit
Analog) and press
Cancel Done
ENTER. (Auto is the
recommended mode). See “Connecting an HDMI or a
DVI device to the HDMI input” on page 21. Note:
• If you highlight TV Guide On Screen™ (above) to set the time
and date through the TV Guide On Screen™ system and a
power outage occurs, the time and date will be updated
automatically when the power is restored.
• If you highlight Manual (above) to set the time and date
manually and a power outage occurs, you will lose the time
and date settings when the power is restored.
• If you manually set the time and date and then perform TV Guide
On Screen™ setup, the manual time and date settings will be
overridden by the TV Guide On Screen™ settings.
Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.
55
 Chapter 6: Setting up your TV

Viewing the CableCARD™ menu Setting the Quick Restart™ feature

A CableCARD™ enables you to view encrypted digital channels. With the Quick Restart™ feature set to ON, the TV will stay in
See page 14 for connection and subscription information. Shutdown mode for several minutes after the TV is turned off
After the CableCARD™ is inserted, a CableCARD™ option (see Notes below).
appears in the Applications menu, with informational screens If the TV is turned on from Shutdown mode, the full picture
provided by your digital CableCARD™ service (see illustrations appears immediately.
below).
To set the Quick Restart™ feature:
CableCard Connected -- Acquiring
channel information.
1. Press MENU, and then press x or • until the Setup menu
appears.
CableCard services will only operate
with cable signal connected to Antenna 1. 2. Highlight Quick Restart and press •.
3. Press z or y to select either On or Off.
To view the CableCARD™ menu:
1. Press MENU and open the Applications menu. Setup

2. Highlight CableCARD™ and press •. PC Settings

HDMI 1 Audio Auto
Auto
Off
On

3. Press z or y to select one of the side menu items and press HDMI 2 Audio
Slide Show Interval
Auto
Auto
2 Sec
ENTER to display the information. AVHD Skip Time 15 min
Gray Level 1
Quick Restart On

Navigate Select CH RTN Back EXIT Exit

Applications
TV Guide On Screen IP Service
Audio Player Conditional Access
Note:
Picture Viewer CableCARD(tm) Status
Digital CC/Audio Selector Network Setup
If Quick Restart is set to Off and you turn off the TV, it can take
CableCARD CableCARD(tm) Pairing several seconds for the picture to appear when you turn on the TV
again. See “IMPORTANT NOTICE ABOUT HOT LAMP RESTART,”
below.
Navigate Select CH RTN Back EXIT Exit

Note: The CableCARD™ menu is for informational purposes
only and has no user-adjustable options.
If Quick Restart is set to On and you turn off the TV, the following
will occur for a few minutes:
• The screen (lamp) lights dimly.
• The fans continue to run.
This is a function of the Quick Restart Shutdown mode and is not a
TV malfunction. If you do not prefer this, set the Quick Restart
feature to Off.
When the Quick Restart feature is set to Off, if you repeatedly turn
the TV on and off in a short period of time, the useful service life of
the lamp may be shorter than the average useful service life. See
page 128.

IMPORTANT NOTICE ABOUT

“HOT LAMP RESTART”
When the TV has been powered on long enough for the lamp unit
to get hot, it may take several minutes for the picture to appear
on-screen in the following situations:
• When the Quick Restart™ feature is set to OFF and you turn
the TV off and then on again within a few minutes.
• If the TV is on when a short-term power failure, power surge,
or other similar power failure occurs, such that the TV loses
and regains power within a few minutes.
This is a property of DLP TV lamp technology
and is NOT a sign of malfunction.
If this occurs, the yellow LED on the TV front panel will blink (and
the blue LED will be lit solid) until the TV is finished restarting the
lamp and the normal picture appears. If BOTH yellow and blue
LEDs are blinking at a one-second rate, you will need to turn the
TV off and then on again to restart the lamp.

Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.

56
 Chapter 6: Setting up your TV

Viewing the digital signal meter Viewing the system status

You can view the digital signal meter for ANT 1 and ANT 2 To view the system status:
digital TV input sources only. 1. Press MENU and open the Setup menu.
To view the digital signal meter: 2. Highlight Installation and press ENTER. (A new set of
1. Press MENU and open the Setup menu. Installation menu icons will appear on-screen, as shown
2. Highlight Installation and press ENTER. (A new set of below right).
Installation menu icons will appear on-screen, as shown in
step 3 below.) Setup System Status
Installation System Infomation
Sleep Timer
On/Off Timer
PC Settings
Setup HDMI 1 Audio Auto
Installation HDMI 2 Audio Auto
Slide Show Interval 2 Sec
Sleep Timer
On/Off Timer
Navigate Select CH RTN Back EXIT Exit Navigate Select CH RTN Back EXIT Exit
PC Settings
HDMI 1 Audio Auto
HDMI 2 Audio Auto 3. Open the System Status menu, highlight System
Slide Show Interval 2 Sec
Information, and then press ENTER.
Navigate Select CH RTN Back EXIT Exit
4. Use the x • to scroll through the menu bar to check the
3. Open the Terrestrial menu, highlight Signal Meter, and Product Information and Software Version.
press ENTER. System Information System Information

Product Information Software Version

Brand: Toshiba 0.3.0

Model: 62MX195 Mar 9 2005 - 12:37:10
IEEE1394 GUID: 00003914-28343803 FW:0.12
Terrestrial Sub:47
Input Configuration
Channel program
Channel Add/Delete Done Done

Signal Meter

To close the screen and return to the Installation menu:

Navigate Select CH RTN Back EXIT Exit Highlight Done and press ENTER.
To return to normal viewing:
4. Use the yzx • to select the antenna input and digital Press EXIT.
channel whose signal you want to check.
Note: The physical digital channel number listed in the Signal Restore Factory Defaults
Meter screen may not correspond to a virtual TV channel
number. Contact your local broadcasters to obtain the RF To restore all settings and channels to their factory default
channel numbers for your local digital stations. values:
Signal Meter
1. Follow steps 1–3 above.
Signal Locked 2. Use the x • to scroll through the menu bar to select
0 Peak 0
Factory Defaults.
Antenna
Physical Digital Channel
1
13
3. Enter your PIN code (or 0000 if no PIN code has been set).
Virtual Digital Channel N/A

Done
4. Highlight Yes and press ENTER. The TV will turn off
automatically after a few seconds. After the TV turns off,
unplug the TV power cord and then plug it in again to
To close the screen and return to the Terrestrial menu:
complete the restore process.
Highlight Done and press ENTER.
System Information

To return to normal viewing: Press YES to confirm. After the TV

turns off, unplug it and plug it dack

Press EXIT. in to complete the reset.

Yes No

To cancel the reset:

Highlight No and press ENTER.

Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.

57
 7 Using the TV Guide On Screen™
interactive program guide
The TV Guide On Screen™ system is a free, interactive,
on-screen program guide built in to your Toshiba TV that lists
schedules and information for TV programs in your area.
Note: Over-the-air or cable access to stations carrying TV Guide
On Screen™ data is required for the TV Guide On Screen™ system to operate.
TV Guide On Screen™ system does not work with satellite programming.
Toshiba does not provide the TV Guide On Screen™ data; rather, such
data is provided by a third party, which is responsible for its accuracy and
availability. Additionally, occasional compatibility issues may exist between
the TV Guide On Screen™ system contained in your TV and the data
provided by the third party. If you experience any performance issues with
your TV Guide On Screen™ system, please contact the following:
• In the U.S., call TACP Consumer Solutions at (800) 631-
3811 or visit
http://www.tacp.com/customersupport/contact.asp.
• In Canada, call TCL Customer Service at 1-800-268-3404
The TV Guide On Screen™ system includes the following
features:
• Streamlined on-screen assisted setup—Quickly and easily set
• Direct tuning—Directly tune the TV to a current program
you want to watch by selecting it in the program guide.
• Reminders—Schedule show reminders that will either display
an on-screen notification banner or automatically tune the TV
to the channel of the show for which you set the reminder.
• Recording—Easily schedule recording of one or more
programs.
Note: A VCR or IEEE1394 recording device is required for recording.
It is recommended that you connect your devices according to the
instructions in Chapter 2.
• Search—Search for shows by category, keyword, or
alphabetically.
• On-screen help—The TV Guide On Screen™ system contains
on-screen feature definitions and navigation instructions.
To open the TV Guide On Screen™ system:
• While watching TV, press
the TV GUIDE button
Applications

up your TV Guide On Screen™ system using the on-screen on the remote control; TV Guide On Screen
—or— Audio Player
prompts (see “Setting up the TV Guide On Screen™ system” Picture Viewer

below). • Press MENU, open the Digital CC/Audio Selector

CableCARD
Applications menu,
• Program listings and INFO windows—Scroll through eight
highlight TV Guide
days of TV listings and view program information such as
On Screen™, and press Navigate Select CH RTN Back EXIT Exit
rating, stereo, HDTV, new episode.
ENTER.
• Watch TV and display TV Guide On Screen™ information
simultaneously. Note: After setting up the TV Guide On Screen™ system, the program
guide opens automatically by default when you turn on the TV. To turn
• Channel lineup customization—Customize your channel off this feature, see page 45.
lineup so your favorite stations are listed first.

Setting up the TV Guide On Screen™ system

Follow these instructions to set up the TV Guide On Screen™
system so it can receive current program data for your area.
Note: If you move the TV to a different ZIP/postal code, you will
need to perform the TV Guide On Screen™ Setup process to
reconfigure your TV Guide On Screen™ system.
1. Press MENU and open the Setup menu.
2. Highlight Installation and then press ENTER to open the
Installation menus. (A new set of menu icons will appear
on-screen, as shown in step 3 below.)

If you have not already connected your antenna, cable box, 3. Open the TV Guide On Screen™ Setup menu, highlight
and/or recording device, see Chapter 2 for connection Start, and then press ENTER.
instructions.
Note: You must connect a VCR or an IEEE1394 compatible Setup TV Guide On Screen Setup

recording device to use the TV Guide On Screen™ system’s Installation Start

Sleep Timer
one-touch recording feature. It is recommended that you On/Off Timer
PC Settings
connect your devices according to the connection instructions HDMI 1 Audio Auto

in Chapter 2. HDMI 2 Audio

Slide Show Interval
Auto
2 Sec
Navigate Select CH RTN Back EXIT Exit

Navigate Select CH RTN Back EXIT Exit

The unauthorized recording, use, distribution, or revision of
television programs, videotapes, DVDs, and other materials is
prohibited under the Copyright Laws of the United States and 4. Go to Chapter 5 for instructions on completing the setup.
other countries, and may subject you to civil and criminal liability. Read this chapter for details on using the TV Guide
On Screen™ interactive program guide.
Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.
58
 Chapter 7: Using the TV Guide On Screen™ interactive program guide

Navigating the TV Guide On Screen™ system

• While watching TV, press
the TV GUIDE button
to enter the TV Guide
On Screen™ system. The
LISTINGS screen will
appear with the current show
highlighted.
• When in the TV Guide
On Screen™ system, if you press
the TV GUIDE button from
any screen, the TV will tune to
the show displayed in the Video
Window.
• Use the arrow keys on the
remote control (yzx •) to
highlight any show, and then
press ENTER to tune to that
show.
• Scroll left or right (x •)
to view eight days of listings.
• Press MENU to display a panel menu with options for the currently Note:
highlighted program or tile, including setting recordings and reminders. • The TV Guide On Screen™ menus shown in this manual are
• To access another Service screen: for illustration purposes only. The channels, programs, and
TV Guide On Screen™ information as illustrated may not be
1. Press y to highlight the Service Bar. available in your area. The options and features as illustrated
2. Press x or • to highlight a different Service (LISTINGS, SEARCH, are subject to change when updates are downloaded from the
SETUP, SCHEDULE, or RECORDINGS). TV Guide On Screen™ service to your TV.
• The TV Guide On Screen™ interactive program guide supports
3. Press z to use that Service. cable-ready, cable box, and digital cable services, as well as
Note: Helpful information about each Service appears in the Info Box. over-the-air broadcasts. It does not provide listings for satellite
services.

TV Guide On Screen™ remote control functions

BUTTON FUNCTION
Numbers

}
TV GUIDE • When watching TV, enters the TV Guide On Screen™ system and highlights the current show
listing.
• When in the TV Guide On Screen™ system, returns to watching TV and displays the show in
the Video Window.
– (digital
Numbers • For direct channel tuning, priority ordering, and channel editing. separator)
– (digital separator) • For entering digital channel numbers. MENU
MENU • Displays the panel menu, in which you can choose options (for example, record, remind, INFO
keyword).
INFO • Cycles between levels of information, as available, in a Service screen or other type of screen. TV GUIDE
ENTER • Makes a selection or executes an action. ENTER
• With a currently airing show listing highlighted, returns to watching TV and tunes to the show
y
x •
channel. z
• With a future airing show listing highlighted, displays a panel menu with viewing options. PAGE UP/
y zx • • Provide directional control. DOWN
• When watching TV, y and z provide surfing through channels turned ON in the LISTINGS
screen.
PAGE UP/DOWN • When in the TV Guide On Screen™ system, moves from one set of screen information to the SS| and |TT
next, when applicable.
REC • When in the TV Guide On Screen™ system or watching TV, initiates the recording process.
REC
SPLIT • When in the TV Guide On Screen™ system, toggles between locking and unlocking the Video
Window. SPLIT
SS| and |TT • Jump forward and backward one day in the LISTINGS screen.

Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.

59
 Chapter 7: Using the TV Guide On Screen™ interactive program guide

Navigating the TV Guide On Screen™ system (continued)

Video Window
• When you open the
TV Guide
On Screen™ system,
the current program
appears in the Video
Window.
• As you scroll through
the listings, the Video
Window will change
to display the selected
program. Info Box

• The lock/unlock icon indicates the status of the Video Window.

• You can set the Video Window to remain on a single channel (locked) or to
change channels (unlocked) as you navigate through listings.
To lock/unlock the Video Window:
Press the SPLIT button on the remote control to toggle between locking
and unlocking the Video Window.
—or—
Highlight a channel logo or the LISTINGS Service Bar Label and press
MENU to display the option to lock/unlock the Video Window.

Panel Menus
• A panel menu appears:
– when you press MENU on a highlighted tile (if additional options
are available); or
– when you press ENTER on a show starting in the future.
• When a panel menu appears, the highlighted tile changes color to
indicate that the panel menu relates to the tile.
• Press INFO to display help for the current panel menu.
• Press y and z to move among the options.
• Press x and • to move to adjacent options or, if the highlight is on a
odometer, to change the odometer choice.
• To move the highlight to the default command button, press ENTER
from an odometer or entry box.
• To execute the action and close the panel menu, highlight the
command button and press ENTER.
• To cancel any changes and close the panel menu:
– press MENU; or
– highlight Cancel and press ENTER.
• If a panel menu contains more options than can be displayed in one
panel, the word “more” appears at the bottom of the menu. To access
the additional options, either scroll down using the z button or the
PAGE UP/DOWN (CH yz) button.

Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.

60
 Chapter 7: Using the TV Guide On Screen™ interactive program guide

Navigating the TV Guide On Screen™ system (continued)

Info Box
• An Info Box contains information about a show, Service, or Panel Ad, or Info Action Bar
provides general help (for example, for a panel menu).
• An Info Box for a program in the LISTINGS screen can have up to three
sizes: Small, Large, or “No.”
– Press INFO on the remote control to cycle among the sizes.
– The default Info Box size is Small. To change the default size, open the
SETUP Service screen (see page 70). Small Info Box
• The Info Button icon ( ) appears on the Info Action Bar if the Info
Box size can change and/or if there are additional Info screens. Press the
INFO key on the remote control to change the size and/or to display
additional Info screens.
• In some instances, the INFO button on the remote control is used to page
forward (for example, if there are additional pages of information in a Panel
Large Info Box
Ad, a Channel Ad, or help text).

TV Guide On Screen™ Icons

ICON NAME DESCRIPTION

Info Button • Additional Info Box information is available, or the Info Box has additional sizes.

Progress Bar • Elapsed time in current show.

• Progress bar appears in LISTINGS and SEARCH and when the Info Button is pressed while watching TV.
HDTV • Show is presented in high-definition TV, if available.

New • Show is new (not a repeat).

Stereo • Show is available in stereo.

Dolby Digital • Show is available with Dolby Digital 5.1 audio (digital channels only).

CC • Closed captioning is available for the show.

TV Rating • TV rating for the show.

Record Once • Show is set to record once.

• Other frequencies are Daily (manual recording only),
Regularly, and Weekly.

Record Off • Show is set to record but recording is currently Off (show remains in schedule).

Record • Recording is suspended due to a schedule conflict (show remains in schedule).

Suspended • Recording resumes when the conflict no longer exists.
Remind Once • Show is set to remind once.
• Other frequencies are Daily (manual reminding only),
Regularly, and Weekly.

Remind Off • Show is set to remind but reminder is currently Off (show remains in schedule).

Remind • Reminder is suspended due to a schedule conflict (show remains in schedule).

Suspended • Reminder resumes when the conflict no longer exists.

Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.

61
 Chapter 7: Using the TV Guide On Screen™ interactive program guide

TV Guide On Screen™ Services

The TV Guide On Screen™ system consists of five main services: LISTINGS, SEARCH, RECORDINGS, SCHEDULE, and SETUP.
Note:
• For the RECORDINGS service to display, an IEEE1394 recording device must be connected to the television (see Chapter 2); otherwise, only
four services display. Recording to other devices, such as a VCR, are possible from within the LISTINGS service.
• When using the TV Guide On Screen™ system to record a program for the first time, it is recommended that you perform a test recording to
make sure your system is set up properly.
• If the power is cut or the plug becomes disconnected during timer recording, any recorded contents will be lost. It may take up to a week
before an entire program schedule is available.
• If the TV power cord is unplugged for an extended period of time, it may take up to 24 hours with the TV in standby mode (power cord
plugged in and power OFF) to download the entire TV Guide On Screen™ program schedule. It may take up to a week before an entire
program schedule is available. Be sure to follow the instructions under “TV Guide On Screen™ Reminder” on page 45.

LISTINGS screen
• When you open the TV Guide On Screen™ system,
LISTINGS is always the first service displayed.
• Use the Number keys on the remote control to jump to a
specific channel’s listings.
• To watch a show (if on now), highlight the show and press
ENTER.
• To display the Episode Options panel menu for a particular
show, highlight a show and press MENU.

• With LISTINGS highlighted in the Service Bar, press INFO

to display a help screen. Press INFO again to close the screen.

Episode Options panel menu

From the Episode Options panel menu, you can choose to set a
recording, set a reminder, or tune to the channel. The following
are descriptions of the buttons.
• Use the arrow keys to move the highlight within LISTINGS
to do the following: GO TO SERVICE BAR: Closes the menu, changes no
information, and returns to the Service Bar.
– View eight days of show listings
– Read show descriptions TUNE TO CHANNEL / WATCH NOW: Exits the TV Guide
On Screen™ system and tunes to the channel of the highlighted
show (if the show airs in the future) or tunes to the show (if the
show is currently airing). The button label changes according to
whether the show is currently airing or not.
SET RECORDING: Displays the Record Options panel menu,
from which you can set the show to record. For additional
information, see “SCHEDULE screen” and “Record features” on
page 66.
– Tune directly to a show currently airing SET REMINDER: Displays the Remind Options panel menu,
– Set a show to Remind (e.g., start time, frequency, automatic from which you can set a reminder for the show. For additional
power ON, auto-tune TV) information, see “SCHEDULE screen” on page 66 and
– Set a show to Record (e.g, start/end time, frequency) “Remind features” on page 68.
– Lock and unlock the Video Window CANCEL: Closes the menu, changes no information, and
– Access panel ads and channel ads returns to the highlighted show.
Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.
62
 Chapter 7: Using the TV Guide On Screen™ interactive program guide

TV Guide On Screen™ Services (continued)

SEARCH screen
• SEARCH allows you to find shows by keyword, Example: Category search
alphabetically, or by category (HDTV, Movies, Sports,
Children, Educational, News, Variety, Series). 1. From the SEARCH screen, press z to highlight a category
(in this example, MOVIES).

• With SEARCH highlighted in the Service Bar, press INFO to

display a help screen. Press INFO again to close the screen. 2. Press z to highlight a subcategory (in this example, ALL).

• Use the arrow keys to move the highlight within SEARCH. 3. Press ENTER to display a list of all movies, organized by
date and time.

4. Highlight a show and press ENTER to watch (if on now)

or press MENU to display the Episode Options panel
menu. (See “Episode Options panel menu” on page 62.)

Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.

63
 Chapter 7: Using the TV Guide On Screen™ interactive program guide

TV Guide On Screen™ Services (continued)

SEARCH screen (continued)

Example: Keyword search 6. A list of all matching shows for that keyword is displayed.
Keyword search lets you enter a word(s) to find a particular
show by category or for every show title that matches.
1. From the SEARCH screen, highlight KEYWORD, and
then press ENTER.
2. Highlight NEW SEARCH in the panel menu, and then
press ENTER.

7. Highlight a show and press ENTER to display all airings.

Then highlight a specific listing and press ENTER to watch
(if on now) or press MENU to display the Episode Options
panel menu. From the Episode Options menu, you can
choose to set a recording or reminder, or tune to the
channel (see “Episode Options panel menu” on page 62.)

3. The Search Options panel menu opens. Highlight

CATEGORY, and then use the arrow keys to highlight a
category to search (All, HDTV, Children, Sports, etc.).
4. After highlighting a category, press z to highlight ENTER
KEYWORD, and then press ENTER.

The TV Guide On Screen™ system stores all the keywords you

create.
To edit or delete a keyword:
From the SEARCH/KEYWORD screen, highlight the
keyword you want to edit or delete, and then press MENU
to display the Search Options panel menu, with the
5. The keyboard is displayed. Use the arrow keys to highlight following options:
a character and then press ENTER to display it. When – GO TO SERVICE BAR: Closes the menu, changes no
finished entering all characters, highlight DONE and press information, and returns to the Service Bar.
ENTER. – EDIT SEARCH: Displays the keyboard, from which you
can change the keyword.

– DELETE SEARCH: Displays the Confirmation panel

menu. Select YES to delete the search or NO to close the
panel menu.
– CANCEL: Closes the panel menu, changes no
information, and returns to the highlighted keyword.

Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.

64
 Chapter 7: Using the TV Guide On Screen™ interactive program guide

TV Guide On Screen™ Services (continued)

RECORDINGS screen
The RECORDINGS service screen displays a list of previously To view a recording, you can do one of the following:
recorded or currently recording shows on an IEEE1394 • Highlight an episode and press ENTER to view it now. The
recording device connected to the TV (see Chapter 2). episode either starts from the beginning or from where it
Note: RECORDINGS will not appear in the Service Bar unless you was last stopped (if viewed previously).
have an IEEE1394 video recording device connected to one of the • Highlight an episode and press MENU to display the
IEEE1394 ports on the TV. See Chapter 2 for details.
Episode Options panel menu, with the following options:
For additional details, see “Record features” on page 66.
– GO TO SERVICE BAR: Closes the menu, changes no
• With RECORDINGS highlighted in the Service Bar, press information, and returns to the Service Bar.
INFO to display a help screen. Press INFO again to close the
– RESUME: Starts from the beginning or from where it
screen.
was last stopped (if viewed previously).
– PLAY FROM BEGINNING: Starts from the beginning,
even if stopped previously.
– DELETE EPISODE: Deletes the episode from the
RECORDINGS list and deletes the recording from the
IEEE1394 recording device. A Confirm panel menu
displays. Press YES to delete the episode or NO to close
the panel menu.
To choose the way recordings are displayed: – CANCEL: Closes the panel menu, changes no
1. Highlight RECORDINGS on the Service Bar, and press information, and returns to the highlighted show.
MENU to display the Recording Options panel menu.
2. Press yz to choose between View As and Sort By, as
described below.
View As: Press x • to choose between the following:
• List—Displays every recorded episode for a show (see
example in Screen B, at right).
Note: In List view, highlight an episode to display an Info
Box with show information. Press MENU to display the
Screen A
Episode Options panel menu (see “Episode Options
panel menu” on page 62).
• Group—Displays recorded shows without listing every
recorded episode (see example in Screen A, at right).
Note: In Group view, highlight a show and press ENTER
to view all recorded episodes. Press ENTER again to
collapse the episode list.

Screen B

Sort By: Press x and • to choose between the following:

• Title—Displays recorded shows in alphabetical order (see
example in Screen A, at right).
• Date—Displays recorded shows by date and time, with
most recent first (see example in Screen B, at right).
The unauthorized recording, use, distribution, or revision of television
3. When finished, press ENTER to highlight DONE, and programs, videotapes, DVDs, and other materials is prohibited under the
then press ENTER again to close the panel menu and Copyright Laws of the United States and other countries, and may subject
display the recordings with the selected options. you to civil and criminal liability.

Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.

65
 Chapter 7: Using the TV Guide On Screen™ interactive program guide
TV Guide On Screen™ Services (continued)
SCHEDULE screen
The SCHEDULE service screen allows you to review, edit, or
delete Record and Remind events you set previously.
• With SCHEDULE highlighted in the Service Bar, press
INFO to display a help screen. Press INFO again to close
the screen.
• Highlight an event and press MENU to display the Schedule
Options panel menu, with the following options (as applicable):
– GO TO SERVICE BAR: Closes the menu, changes no
information, and returns to the Service Bar.
– WATCH NOW: Exits the TV Guide On Screen™ system
and tunes to the highlighted show.
– DELETE RECORDING: Removes the recording from
the schedule. A Confirm panel menu displays. Press YES
to delete the recording or NO to close the panel menu.
– EDIT RECORDING: Opens a menu in which you can
change existing recording information.
– SET REMINDER: Opens a menu in which you can set a
reminder for the show (Record is not cancelled).
– CANCEL: Closes the panel menu, changes no
information, and returns to the highlighted show.
An icon identifies the event type. For more details, see “Record
features,”at right, and “Remind features” on page 68.
Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.
66
Record features
You can set a show to Record, or edit the record settings for a
show, in LISTINGS, SEARCH, and SCHEDULE. There are
three ways to set a show to Record, as described below.
1) Set a show to Record using the REC key on the
remote control
Press the REC key on the remote control to record the
show Once with current default settings (start and end
recording on time). Each time you press REC, you change
the Record frequency (but not the default settings) among
Once (default), Regularly, Weekly, and Cancel.
Note: The related Record icon appears on the show tile
each time you press REC. See “Record icons,” on page 67.
2) Set a show to Record from a panel menu
1. Highlight a show and press MENU to display the
Episode Options panel menu.
2. Highlight SET RECORDING and press ENTER to
display the Record Options panel menu.
3. Highlight the FREQUENCY field, and press x or • to
choose among Once, Regularly, Weekly, or Off.
4. Highlight the START field, and press x or • to choose
in the range from 120 minutes early to 120 minutes late
or On Time (default = On Time).
5. Repeat step 4 for the END field.
6. Highlight the RECORDER field and press x or • to
choose the recording device.
Note: For connected IEEE1394 recording devices only.
7. Highlight the KEEP UNTIL field and press x or • to
choose how long you want to keep the Record event.
Note: For connected IEEE1394 recording devices only.
8. Press ENTER to highlight SCHEDULE RECORDING,
and press ENTER again to close the menu.
A Record icon for the selected frequency appears on the
show tile. See “Record icons” on page 67.
Note: For connected IEEE1394 recording devices only.
Or highlight CANCEL and press ENTER to close the
menu, change no information, and return to the
highlighted show.
Note: You can change the default values of the Record Options
panel menu fields. See “Change default options” on page 71.
 Chapter 7: Using the TV Guide On Screen™ interactive program guide

TV Guide On Screen™ Services (continued)

Record features (continued)

3) Manually set a show to Record Record conflict
1. Highlight SCHEDULE in the Service Bar, and press A conflict message appears for the following reasons:
MENU to display the Schedule Options panel menu. • A show set to Record overlaps with any part of another
2. Highlight NEW MANUAL RECORDING and press show previously set to Record.
ENTER to display the Record Options panel menu. • A show set to Record overlaps with a show previously set to
Press yzx • to move through the options. auto-tune. (For auto-tune details, see “Remind features” on
Press the Number keys or yzx • to change the page 68.)
information, as necessary. Select one of these options:
3. Enter the information in the panel menu fields. You will • Record Anyway—This show will override an existing show
need to set the start and end time for the recording. For set to Record or auto-tune.
details, see “Set a show to Record from a panel menu” on • Don’t Record This Show—Cancels the Recording.
the previous page.
Note: When setting a Manual Recording, the frequency
option “Daily” is available instead of “Regularly.” See “Record
icons,” below right, for a description of Record icons.
4. When finished entering the information in the fields,
press ENTER to highlight SCHEDULE RECORDING,
and press ENTER again to close the menu.
A Record icon for the selected frequency appears on the
show tile. See “Record icons,” below right.
Note: Manual recording is listed by channel number.
Or highlight CANCEL and press ENTER to close the
menu, change no information, and return to the Record icons
highlighted show. Following is a description of the Record icons that will appear
on the tile for a show set to Record.
When using the TV Guide On Screen™ system to record a program for the
first time, it is recommended that you perform a test recording to make • Record Once —Records the show one time.
sure your system is set up properly.

• Record Regularly —Records the show every time the

Recording notification banner
• If the TV is not on, the recording occurs as scheduled.
• If the TV is on and you are watching the channel that is set to
record, the recording occurs as scheduled.
• If the TV is on and you are watching a channel other than
the one that is set to record, a notification banner (illustrated
below) appears on-screen before recording starts. At that time
you can choose to start or cancel recording.
The default highlighted item in the notification banner is
“Change channel; start recording.” If no change is made
within 3 minutes, the notification banner will close
automatically, the channel will change to the one set to
record, and the recording will occur as scheduled. If you want
to cancel the recording, select “Don’t change; cancel
recording” in the notification banner and press ENTER.
show airs on the same channel and starts at the same time.
• Record Weekly —Records the show every time the show
airs on the same day of the week and on the same channel,
and starts at the same time.
• Record Daily —Records on the same channel and at the
same start time every weekday (Monday through Friday).
Note: This icon displays for manual recordings only.
• Record Suspend —Recording is Suspended due to a
schedule conflict (show remains in Schedule).
• Record Off —Keeps the Recording in the Schedule list
but will not record this show until the frequency is changed.
The unauthorized recording, use, distribution, or revision of television
programs, videotapes, DVDs, and other materials is prohibited under the
Copyright Laws of the United States and other countries, and may subject
you to civil and criminal liability.

Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.

67
 Chapter 7: Using the TV Guide On Screen™ interactive program guide

TV Guide On Screen™ Services (continued)

Remind features
You can set a Reminder to perform the following functions: Or highlight CANCEL and press ENTER to close the
• Automatically turn on the TV (if off ) at the scheduled menu, change no information, and return to the
reminder time, and tune the TV to the channel of the show highlighted show.
for which you set the reminder.
2) Manually set a show Reminder
• Automatically tune the TV, at the scheduled reminder time,
to the channel of the show for which you set the reminder. 1. Highlight SCHEDULE in the Service Bar, and press
MENU to display the Schedule Options panel menu.
• Display an on-screen notification banner (reminding you that
the show is about to start), from which you can choose to 2. Highlight NEW MANUAL REMINDER and press
tune the TV to the show’s channel or cancel the reminder. ENTER to display the Remind Options panel menu.
You can set a show reminder, or edit the reminder settings for a Press yzx • to move through the options.
show, in LISTINGS, SEARCH, and SCHEDULE. There are Press the Number keys or yzx • to change the
two ways to set a show reminder, as described below. information, as necessary.
1) Set a show Reminder from a panel menu
1. Highlight a show and press MENU to display the
Episode Options panel menu.
2. Highlight SET REMINDER and press ENTER to
display the Remind Options panel menu.

3. Enter the information in the panel menu fields. You will

need to set the start and end time for the reminder. For
details, see “Set a show reminder from a panel menu,”
at left.
Note: When setting a Manual Reminder, the frequency
option “Daily” is available instead of “Regularly.” See “Remind
icons,” on the following page, for a description of Reminder
3. Highlight the FREQUENCY field, and press x or • to icons.
choose among Once, Regularly, Weekly, or Off.
4. When finished entering the information in the fields,
4. Highlight the POWER ON TV field, and press x or • press ENTER to highlight SCHEDULE REMINDER,
to choose either Yes (to turn on the TV automatically, if and press ENTER again to close the menu.
off, at the scheduled Reminder time) or No (default).
A Remind icon for the selected frequency appears on the
5. Highlight the AUTO TUNE TV field, and press x or • show tile. See “Remind icons” on the following page.
to choose either Yes (to automatically tune the TV to the
channel you are setting the Reminder for at the Note: Manual reminders are listed by channel number.
scheduled Reminder time; the TV must be on at the Or highlight CANCEL and press ENTER to close the
time) or No (default). menu, change no information, and return to the
Note: You can change the default values of the Remind highlighted show.
Options panel menu fields. See “Change default options” on
page 71 for details.
6. Highlight the WHEN field (to set a time for displaying
the reminder screen), and press x or • to choose in the
range from 15 minutes early to 15 minutes late or On
Time (default = 1 minute early).
7. Press ENTER to highlight SCHEDULE REMINDER,
and press ENTER again to close the menu. A Remind
icon for the selected frequency appears on the show tile.
See “Remind icons” on page 69.

Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.

68
 Chapter 7: Using the TV Guide On Screen™ interactive program guide

TV Guide On Screen™ Services (continued)

Remind features (continued)

Reminder notification banner Remind icons
Based on your option settings, a notification banner will appear Following is a description of the Remind icons that will appear
on-screen, if your TV is on at the scheduled Reminder time. on the tile for a show set to Remind.
At that time you can either press ENTER to hide the Reminder
banner, or highlight the show and press ENTER to tune to • Remind Once —Displays a show reminder one time.
the show.
If no choice is made within 3 minutes, the notification banner • Remind Regularly —Displays a show reminder every
closes automatically and completes the highlighted item (default time the show airs on the same channel and starts at the same
is HIDE REMINDERS). time.
Note: If more than two reminders are set for the same time,
arrows appear on the Reminder notification banner. Press yz • Remind Daily —Displays a show Reminder every
to highlight the shows. weekday (Monday through Friday) for the same channel and
start time.
Note: This icon displays for manual reminders only.

• Remind Suspend —Reminder is Suspended due to a

schedule conflict (show remains in Schedule).
Remind conflict
A conflict message appears for the following reasons:
• Remind Off —Keeps the Reminder in the Schedule list
• A show set with an auto-tune Reminder has the same start but will not display a reminder until you change the
time as an existing auto-tune Reminder. frequency.
• A show set with an auto-tune Reminder overlaps with a
scheduled Recording.
Select one of these options:
• Auto-Tune Anyway—This show will override an existing
show set to auto-tune.
• Proceed, No Auto-Tune—Set the show as a Reminder but
do not auto-tune.
• Don’t Set This Reminder—Cancels the Reminder.

Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.

69
 Chapter 7: Using the TV Guide On Screen™ interactive program guide

TV Guide On Screen™ Services (continued)

SETUP screen Change channel display

After you complete the initial TV Guide On Screen™ setup (as
described in Chapter 5), you can change the following settings:
• Change system settings
• Change channel display
• Change default options
Highlight a choice, press ENTER, and follow the on-screen
instructions.
With SETUP highlighted in the Service Bar, press INFO to
display a help screen. Press INFO again to close the screen.
This option allows you to edit channel information that appears
in LISTINGS, including the following:
• Reorder the position the channels appear in LISTINGS.
• Change the “tune channel” number.
Note: The “tune channel” is the channel on which you receive
a station. For example, two viewers in the same zip code may
receive the same station on different channel numbers,
depending on whether they have Cable service or are using a
cable box.
• Switch a channel to one of the following settings:
– On (channel is always displayed in LISTINGS)
– Off (channel is never displayed in LISTINGS)
– Auto-Hide (channel is displayed in LISTINGS only
when program information is available)
1. From the SETUP screen, highlight CHANGE CHANNEL
DISPLAY and press ENTER.

2. Highlight the channel row you want to edit and press

ENTER to display the Grid Options panel menu.
Change system settings
This option appears only after you have completed the initial
TV Guide On Screen™ setup process (as described in Chapter 5).
1. From the SETUP screen, highlight CHANGE SYSTEM
SETTINGS and press ENTER.

3. To edit the options, press INFO and follow the on-screen

instructions.

2. Press ENTER again

to display the
Confirming Your
Settings screen.
3. Highlight one of the
options, press
ENTER, and follow
the on-screen
instructions.
Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.
70
 Chapter 7: Using the TV Guide On Screen™ interactive program guide

TV Guide On Screen™ Services (continued)

SETUP screen (continued)

Change default options Record defaults
This option allows you to change default settings in the 1. From the SETUP screen, highlight CHANGE DEFAULT
following categories: OPTIONS and press ENTER.
• General Defaults 2. Highlight RECORD DEFAULTS and press MENU to
display the Record Defaults panel menu.
• Record Defaults
• Remind Defaults
General defaults
1. From the SETUP screen, highlight CHANGE DEFAULT
OPTIONS and press ENTER.

3. Enter the required information in the panel menu fields

(start time, end time, recorder choice, how long to keep a
Record event, the quality of the recording). See “Record
features” on page 66 for details on entering values in these
fields.
4. When finished, press ENTER to highlight DONE, and
2. Highlight GENERAL DEFAULTS and press MENU to press ENTER again to close the menu and accept the
display the General defaults panel menu. changes (or highlight CANCEL to close the menu with
no changes).
Remind defaults
1. From the SETUP screen, highlight CHANGE DEFAULT
OPTIONS and press ENTER.
2. Highlight REMIND DEFAULTS and press MENU to
display the Remind Defaults panel menu.

3. Enter the following information in the panel menu fields:

• BOX SIZE: The initial Info Box size when you open the
TV Guide On Screen™ system. Choices are No, Small
(default), Large, and Last Used.
• BOX CYCLE: The Info Box size rotation when you press
INFO on the remote control when the TV Guide
On Screen™ system is open. Choices are No Only, Small
Only, Large Only, No & Small, No & Large, Small & 3. Enter the required information in the panel menu fields
Large, and All (default). (power On TV, auto-tune, when to display the Remind
• AUTO GUIDE: Automatic entry into the TV Guide screen). See “Remind features” on page 68 for details on
On Screen™ system when the TV is powered on. Choices entering values in these fields.
are On (default) and Off. 4. When finished, press ENTER to highlight DONE, and
Note: Set the AUTO GUIDE to Off if you do not want the press ENTER again to close the menu and accept the
TV Guide On Screen™ system to open every time you turn changes (or highlight CANCEL to close the menu with
on the TV. no changes).
4. When finished, press ENTER to highlight DONE, and
press ENTER again to close the menu and accept the
changes (or highlight CANCEL to close the menu with no
changes).
Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.
71
 8 Using the TV’s features
Selecting the video input source to view
To select the video input source to view:
1. Press INPUT on the remote control or TV/VIDEO on the
TV control panel.
2. Press 0–9 to select the input source you want to view, which
will depend on the input terminals you used to connect
your devices (see Chapter 2). Numbers
The current signal source displays in the top right corner of
the Input Selection screen. INPUT

Input Selection ANT 1 y

0 ANT 1
1 Video 1
2 Video 2
3 Video 3
z
4 ColorStream HD1
5 ColorStream HD2
6 HDMI 1
7 HDMI 2
8 PC
9 ANT 2

0 - 9 / INPUT to Select

Note:
• When the Input Selection screen is open, you also can use the yz
buttons on the remote control (or the Channel buttons on the
control panel) to change the input.
• You can repeatedly press the INPUT button on the remote control Remote control
or the TV/VIDEO button on the TV control panel to change the
input.
• To select an IEEE1394 input source, press the TheaterNet DEVICE
button on the remote control (see page 31 and 51).
• If an IEEE1394 device is the current input, it will appear at the TV control panel
bottom of the Input Selection list; however, it will not display in the
list if you change the input source.
• You can label the video input sources according to the specific
devices you have connected to the TV (see “Labeling the video
input sources” on the next page).
• The source can be “hidden.” See page 73 for details. CHANNEL
{
TV/VIDEO

Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.

72
 Chapter 8: Using the TV’s features

Labeling the video input sources

You can label each video input source according to the type of 4. Press x or • to select the desired label for that input source.
device you connected to each source, from the following preset If a particular input is not used, you can select “Hide” as
list of labels: the label, which will cause that input to be “grayed out” in
the input list and skipped over when you press the INPUT
– – (default label) button on the remote control.
Hide (to hide an unused input in the Input Selection Note: If you select “Hide” for all of the input labels, the POP
window) feature will be disabled. If you then attempt to access the POP
Audio Receiver feature, the message “NOT AVAILABLE” will appear on-screen.
VCR 5. To save the new input labels, highlight Done and press
Video Recorder ENTER. To revert to the factory default labels, highlight
Laser Disk Reset and press ENTER.
Compact Disc
Input labeling example:
DVD
DTV The screen below left shows the default Input Selection screen
(with none of the inputs labeled). The screen below right is an
Satellite/DSS
example of how you could label the inputs if you had connected
Cable a DVD player to VIDEO 1, Cable TV to VIDEO 2, an audio
Game Console receiver to VIDEO 3, a video recorder to ColorStream HD1, a
Note: DTV set-top box to HDMI 1, and a satellite/DSS set-top box to
• If you set up devices in TheaterNet,™ the associated inputs are HDMI 2. Also note that the ColorStream HD2 input is labeled
automatically labeled and cannot be relabeled until you remove the “Hidden,” which means that the input will be skipped over
device from TheaterNet (see page 50). when INPUT or TV/VIDEO is pressed.
• If you set up a cable box in VIDEO 1, that input will be labeled
automatically and cannot be relabeled until you remove the device
Input Selection ANT 1 Input Selection ANT 1
from the TV Guide On Screen™ setup.
0 ANT 1 0 ANT 1
• You cannot select IEEE1394 devices through the Input Selection 1 Video 1 1 DVD
window; however, you can select and control IEEE1394 devices 2 Video 2 2 Cable
3 Video 3 3 Audio Receiver
through TheaterNet (see page 50). 4 ColorStream HD1 4 Video Receiver
5 ColorStream HD2 5 ColorSteram HD2 (Hidden)
6 HDMI 1 6 DTV
To label the video input sources: 7 HDMI 2 7 Satellite/DSS
8 PC 8 PC
1. Press MENU and open the Preferences menu. 9 ANT 2 9 ANT 2

2. Highlight Input Labeling and press ENTER. 0 - 9 / INPUT to Select 0 - 9 / INPUT to Select

3. Press y or z to highlight the video source you want to Input Selection screen Input Selection screen with
label. with no inputs labeled all inputs labeled except input 5,
which has been hidden.

Preferences To clear the input labels:

Favorite Channels
Closed Caption Mode Off 1. Press MENU and open the Preferences menu.
Closed Caption Advanced
Input Labeling 2. Highlight Input Labeling and press ENTER.
Menu Language English
Home CH Setup 3. Highlight Reset and press ENTER.
Navigate Select CH RTN Back EXIT Exit Note: If you set up a device in TheaterNet, its input label will
not be cleared unless you remove the device from TheaterNet
Input Labeling (see page 50).
Video 1 DVD
Video 2 Cable
Video 3 Audio Receiver
ColorStream HD 1 Video Receiver
ColorStream HD 2 Hide
HDMI 1 DTV
HDMI 2 Satellite/DSS
PC --
ANT 2 --
Reset Done

Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.

73
 Chapter 8: Using the TV’s features

Tuning channels
Using the Channel Browser™
The Channel Browser stores the most recently viewed channels (up to 32) in the channel history. This feature allows you to:
• Keep a separate, temporary* history of the last 32 channels tuned from each of three inputs: ANT 1, ANT 2, and Cable Box.
*Note: Turning off the TV will clear the channel history for all three inputs.
• Quickly surf and tune your recently viewed channels from the Channel Browser banner (illustrated below).
• Surf via Browse mode (to immediately tune channels as you highlight them in the Channel Browser banner) or Select mode (to surf
over channels in the browser banner before you select one to tune).
• Set a “HOME” channel for the ANT 1, ANT 2, and Cable Box inputs.
To open the Channel Browser banner: Press x ( ), • ( ), or ENTER on the remote control.
– Press x ( ) to surf back from the most recently viewed channel through the last 32 channels that were tuned from the current
input, which are automatically stored in the channel history for the current input (ANT 1, ANT 2, or Cable Box only).
– Press • ( ) to surf forward from the previous channels in the channel history up to the most recently viewed channel.

Elements of the Channel Browser banner

Active channel Highlighted channel Channels stored Active channel Home channel instructions
status (Displays with a yellow in the channel (In Browse mode, because the highlighted [Press x ( ) or • ( )
(Displays in this area background in Select mode. history channel is tuned automatically, the active to surf the other channels
only if available.) Displays with a yellow channel and the highlighted channel in the channel history.]
outline in Browse mode.) will always be the same.)

12-3 14 26-1 17-2 3 Hold HOME key

12345678 ABCD-DTV QRS TUV XYZ 3 sec to program
CB Select Mode ANT 1 CABLE 3 XYZ 480p 17-2

Current mode Current Current Active Channel call Resolution Home channel
(Select or Browse) input antenna type channel letters
(cable or TV) number (if available)

To toggle between Browse mode and Select mode:

After opening the Channel Browser banner, press y or z to toggle between Browse mode and Select mode. The “Current mode”
field on the Channel Browser banner will flash green. Note: The Channel Browser banner opens in Browse mode by default.

To tune to a channel in Browse mode: To tune to a channel in Select mode:

1. While watching TV, press x ( ) or •( ) to open the
Channel Browser banner and surf back to a previous channel
or forward to the next channel in the channel history.
In Browse mode, when you stop on a channel number in
the browser banner, it will be highlighted with a yellow
outline and the TV will automatically tune to the channel.
2. Press EXIT to close the Channel Browser banner.
3 2 102-1
Browse Mode ANT 1 CABLE Ch.102-1 1080i
In Browse mode, the highlighted channel number is outlined
1. While watching TV, press x ( ) or •( ) to open the
Channel Browser banner and surf back to a previous channel
or forward to the next channel in the channel history.
In Select mode, when you stop on a channel number in
the browser banner, it will be highlighted with a yellow
background but the TV will not automatically tune to the
channel.
2. Press ENTER to tune the TV to the highlighted channel.
Hold HOME key
3 sec to program
3. Press EXIT to close the Channel Browser banner.
Ch.3
3 2 102-1 Hold HOME key
3 sec to program

in yellow and the channel will be tuned to automatically. Select Mode ANT 1 CABLE Ch.102-1 1080i Ch.3

Note: The Channel Browser banner will close automatically if In Select mode, the highlighted channel number has a
you do not make a selection within 60 seconds. yellow background. Press ENTER to tune to the channel.
Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.
74
 Chapter 8: Using the TV’s features

Tuning channels (continued)

Using the Channel Browser™ (continued)
Adding and clearing channels in the Setting a channel as the “Home” channel
channel history for an input
Adding channels to the channel history To set a channel as Home using the remote control:
The Channel Browser automatically creates a history of the 1. Tune the TV to the channel you would like to set as the
last 32 channels that were tuned in the current input (ANT 1, Home channel for the current antenna input.
ANT 2, and Cable Box inputs only). A separate history will be 2. Press and hold the HOME ( ) button on the remote
stored for each of these inputs. control for 3 seconds. When the Home channel is saved,
If you change the input you are viewing: the Channel Browser banner will appear at the bottom of
the screen with the home icon flashing green.
a) you will begin a channel history for that input if one did
not exist; or Note: You can set a different Home channel for each input
(ANT 1, ANT 2, and Cable Box inputs only).
b) you will return to the existing channel history for that input
if one had already been started. To set a channel as Home using the menus:
The Channel Browser will store the following channels: 1. Press MENU and open the Preferences menu.
• All channels that are tuned using the numeric buttons on the 2. Highlight Home CH Setup and press ENTER. The Home
remote control. CH Setup window will display.
• All channels that are tuned for at least 7 seconds using the Home CH Setup
CH yz buttons or the FAV CH y z buttons on the remote ANT 1 --
control. ANT 2 --
Cable Box --
Note:
• The Channel Browser banner will not appear when the POP double Reset Done

window is open; however, channels tuned while the POP double

window is open will be added to the Channel Browser history for the Note: "Cable Box" will appear in the Home CH Setup
current input. window only if you connected a cable box to your TV.
• The Channel Browser banner will not appear in the FAV SCAN 3. Use the y z buttons to select the input for which you
(favorite scan) multi-window. Channels that appear in the FAV SCAN
multi-window will not be added to the Channel Browser history;
want to set the Home channel.
however, the channel last selected from the multi-window will be 4. Use the numeric and dash (–) buttons on the remote
added to the channel history. control to enter the desired Home channel for each input.
5. To save your entries, highlight Done and press ENTER.
Clearing channels from the channel history
To clear your entries, highlight Reset and press ENTER.
• Turning off the TV will clear all three channel histories
(ANT 1, ANT 2, and Cable Box). To tune to the Home channel:
• Removing the CableCARD™ will clear the channel history While an input that has a set
for the ANT 1 input. Home channel is active, press the
• Reconfiguring the ANT 1, ANT 2, or Cable Box input HOME ( ) button on the
will clear the channel history for the newly configured remote control.
input(s). Note: If you press the HOME
Note: See page 46 for details on configuring the antenna inputs. button while an input other than
an antenna or Cable Box input is x /BACK
selected, the TV will tune to the •/NEXT
most recently tuned Home
channel and input.

HOME ( )

Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.

75
 Chapter 8: Using the TV’s features
Tuning channels (continued)
Tuning your favorite channels
To tune to the channels you programmed as Favorite Channels,
see page 49.
Tuning to the next programmed channel
To tune to the next programmed channel:
Press CHANNEL y or z on the remote control or TV control
panel.
Note:
• This feature will not work unless you program channels into the
TV’s channel memory (see page 47).
• If you are recording a digital channel, you will only be able to
change analog channels while the recording is in progress. If you
are recording an analog channel, you will only be able to change
digital channels while the recording is in progress. This is
because the TV tuner that is being recorded (digital or analog)
will be locked on the channel that is currently recording.
Tuning to a specific channel
(programmed or unprogrammed)
Tuning analog channels:
Press the Channel Number buttons (0–9) on the remote
control. For example, to select channel 125, press 1, 2, 5.
Tuning digital channels:
Press the Channel Number buttons (0–9) on the remote
control, followed by the – (dash) button and then the sub-
channel number. For example, to select digital channel 125-1,
press 1, 2, 5, –, 1.
Note: If a digital channel is not programmed—either through
the automatic channel scan (page 47) or the channel add/
delete function (page 48)—you will have to tune the RF
channel using the Channel Number and Dash buttons on the
remote control.
Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.
76
Switching between two channels using
Channel Return
The Channel Return feature allows you to switch between two
channels without entering an actual channel number each time.
1. Select the first channel you want to view.
2. Select a second channel using the Channel Number buttons
(and the dash (–) button if selecting a digital channel).
3. Press CH RTN on the remote control. The previous channel
will display. Each time you press CH RTN, the TV will switch
back and forth between the last two channels that were selected.
Note:
• If you press CH RTN from a non-antenna input, the TV will
return to the last-viewed ANT input and channel.
• If you are currently recording a program, this feature will
not be available.
Switching between two channels using
SurfLock™
The SurfLock™ feature temporarily “memorizes” one channel
in the CH RTN button, so you can return to that channel
quickly from any other channel by pressing CH RTN. To
memorize a channel in the CH RTN button:
1. Select the channel you want to program into the CH RTN
button.
2. Press and hold CH RTN for about 2 seconds until the
message “Channel Memorized” appears on the screen. The
channel has been programmed into the CH RTN button.
3. You can then change channels repeatedly, and when you
press CH RTN, the memorized channel will be selected.
The TV will return to the memorized channel one time only.
Once you press CH RTN and then change channels again, the
CH RTN memory will be cleared and the button will function
as Channel Return, by switching back and forth between the last
two channels that were selected.
Channel Numbers
— (dash)
CHANNEL yz
CH RTN
 Chapter 8: Using the TV’s features

Selecting the picture size

You can view many program formats in a variety of picture
sizes—Natural, TheaterWide 1, TheaterWide 2, TheaterWide 3,
and Full—as described below and on the next page.
The way the image displays in any of the picture sizes will vary Numbers
depending on the format of the program you are viewing. Select
the picture size that displays the current program the way that PIC SIZE
looks best to you.
Your picture size preferences can be saved for each input on your
TV. y

To select the picture size:

z
1. Press PIC SIZE on the remote control.
2. While the Picture Size menu is on-screen, press the
corresponding number button (0–4) to select the desired
picture size.
Note:
Picture Size
You also can select the picture size using the
0 Natural
1 TheaterWide 1
menu system. Select Picture Size in the
2 TheaterWide 2 Video/Theater Settings menu. Select the input
3 TheaterWide 3 for which you want to save your picture settings.
4 Full
To save your settings, highlight Done and press
0 - 4 / PIC SIZE to Select ENTER.
Note: Theater Settings
• You also can repeatedly press PIC SIZE to select the desired Picture Size Natural
Picture Scroll --
picture size (or press the yz buttons on the remote control
Cinema Mode Film
while the Picture Size screen is open).
Auto Aspect Ratio On
• “Full” may not be available for some program formats (it will Reset Done
be “grayed out” in the Picture Size screen).

Natural picture size

• The image is displayed close to its originally formatted
proportion. Some program formats will display with
sidebars and/or bars at the top and bottom.

Conventional picture on a Conventional picture in Natural size on

conventional TV screen your wide-screen TV

Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.

77
 Chapter 8: Using the TV’s features

Selecting the picture size (continued)

TheaterWide 1 picture size (For 4:3 format program) Note:
• The center of the picture remains close to its • If you select one of the TheaterWide® picture
sizes, the top and bottom edges of the
original proportion, but the left and right
picture (including subtitles or captions) may
edges are stretched wider to fill the screen.
be hidden. To view the hidden edges, either
scroll the picture (TheaterWide 2 and 3 only)
or try viewing the program in Full or Natural
picture size.
• When selecting the picture size, the way
the image displays will vary depending on
the format of the program you are
currently watching.

TheaterWide 1 picture size example

TheaterWide 2 picture size (for letter box programs)
• The picture is stretched wider to fill the width
of the screen, but only slightly stretched taller.
• The top and bottom edges of the picture are
hidden. To view the hidden areas, see
“Scrolling the TheaterWide® picture” on page
79.
Using these functions to change the
picture size (i.e., changing the height/
width ratio) for any purpose other than
your private viewing may be prohibited
under the Copyright Laws of the United
ABCDEFG---------------- States and other countries, and may
subject you to civil and criminal liability.

TheaterWide 2 picture size example

TheaterWide 3 picture size (for letter box programs with subtitles)
• The picture is stretched wider to fill the width
of the screen, but only slightly stretched taller.
• The top and bottom edges are hidden. To view
the hidden areas (such as subtitles or captions), ABCDEFG----------------

see “Scrolling the TheaterWide® picture” on

page 79.

ABCDEFG--------------------------

TheaterWide 3 picture size example

Full picture size (for 16:9 [480i, 480p] source programs only)
• If receiving a squeezed 4:3 format program, the
picture is stretched wider to fill the width of
the screen, but not stretched taller.
• None of the picture is hidden.

Full picture size example

Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.

78
 Chapter 8: Using the TV’s features

Scrolling the TheaterWide® picture Using the auto aspect ratio feature
(TheaterWide 2 and 3 only) When the auto aspect ratio feature is set to On, the picture size
is automatically selected when one of the following input
You can set separate scroll settings for the TheaterWide 2 and sources is received:
TheaterWide 3 modes for each input.
• A 480i signal from the VIDEO 1, VIDEO 2, VIDEO 3,
To set the scroll settings: ColorStream HD-1, or ColorStream HD-2 input.
1. Press INPUT on the remote control or TV/VIDEO on the • A 1080i, 480i, 480p, or 720p signal from the HDMI input.
TV to select the input for which you want to set the picture
size and scroll settings. Aspect ratio Automatic aspect size
of signal source (automatically selected
2. Press MENU and open the Video menu. when Auto Aspect is On)
3. Highlight Theater Settings and press ENTER. 4:3 normal Natural (with sidebars)
4:3 letter box TheaterWide 2
16:9 full Full
Video
Picture Settings Not defined
Advanced Picture Settings (no ID-1 data or User-selected picture size
Theater Settings
HDMI aspect data) (see pages 77–78)

Note:
• The auto aspect ratio feature is not applicable to antenna or Cable input
Navigate Select CH RTN Back EXIT Exit
sources.
4. In the Picture Size field, select either TheaterWide 2 or • The auto aspect ratio feature is not available when the POP double-window
TheaterWide 3 (you cannot scroll in any other mode). is open, the Freeze mode is active, or the TV Guide On Screen™ system is
5. Press z to highlight the Picture Scroll field. open.

6. Press x or • to scroll the picture up and down as needed, To turn on the auto aspect ratio feature:
from –10 to +20.
1. Press MENU and open the Video menu.
Theater Settings
2. Highlight Theater Settings and press ENTER.
Picture Size TheaterWide 2
Picture Scroll -5
Cinema Mode Film
Auto Aspect Ratio On Video
Picture Settings
Reset Done Advanced Picture Settings
Theater Settings

7. To save the new settings, highlight Done and press

ENTER. To revert to the factory defaults, highlight Reset
and press ENTER. Navigate Select CH RTN Back EXIT Exit

3. In the Auto Aspect Ratio field, select On.

Theater Settings
Picture Size Natural
Picture Scroll -1
Cinema Mode Film
Auto Aspect Ratio On

Reset Done

4. To save the new settings, highlight Done and press

ENTER. To revert to the factory defaults, highlight Reset
and press ENTER.
To turn off the auto aspect ratio feature:
Select Off in step 3 above.

Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.

79
 Chapter 8: Using the TV’s features

Selecting the cinema mode Selecting the lamp mode

(480i signals only) You can select either the High Bright or Low Power lamp mode.
• The High Bright mode is useful when additional picture
When you view a DVD (480i signal; 3:2 pulldown processed)
brightness is desired (such as in a bright room).
from a DVD player connected to the VIDEO 1, VIDEO 2,
ColorStream HD1/HD2 (component video), or HDMI inputs • The Low Power mode reduces wear on the projection lamp.
on the TV, smoother motion can be obtained by setting the Using this mode should result in longer lamp life.
Cinema Mode to Film. See “Lamp unit replacement and care” on page 128–130.
To set the Cinema Mode to Film: To select the lamp mode:
1. Press MENU and open the Video menu. 1. Press MENU and open the Video menu.
2. Highlight Theater Settings and press ENTER. 2. Highlight Advanced Picture Settings and press ENTER.

Video
Video
Picture Settings
Picture Settings
Advanced Picture Settings
Advanced Picture Settings
Theater Settings
Theater Settings

Navigate Select CH RTN Back EXIT Exit

Navigate Select CH RTN Back EXIT Exit

3. In the Cinema Mode field, select Film. 3. In the Lamp Mode field, select High Bright or Low Power,
Theater Settings whichever you prefer.
Picture Size Natural Advanced Picture Settings ANT 1
Picture Scroll -1
Dynamic Contrast On
Cinema Mode Film
MPEG Noise Reduction Low
Auto Aspect Ratio On
CableClear Auto
Reset Done Color Temperature Cool
Lamp Mode Low Power
4. To save the new settings, highlight Done and press Reset Done
ENTER. To revert to the factory defaults, highlight Reset
and press ENTER.
4. To save the new settings, highlight Done and press
ENTER. To revert to the factory defaults, highlight Reset
To set the Cinema Mode to Video:
and press ENTER.
Select Video in step 3 above.
Note:
If you set the lamp mode to Low Power, each time you turn on the TV, the
lamp will start out in High Bright mode but will switch to Low Power mode
in approximately 1 minute. You will notice a change in screen brightness
when this happens. This is normal and is not a sign of malfunction.

Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.

80
 Chapter 8: Using the TV’s features

Using the POP features

Using the POP double-window feature
Note:
The POP (picture-out-picture) double-window feature splits the screen into two
• When the main window is in the ANT1 or ANT2
windows so you can watch two programs at the same time. mode, the ANT1 and ANT2 inputs cannot be
To display a program in the POP window: selected for the POP window.
1. Select the program you want to watch in the main window. • When the main window is in Video 1/2/3,
ColorStream HD1/HD2, HDMI 1, or HDMI 2
2. Press SPLIT to open the POP double-window. mode, those inputs cannot be selected for the POP
POP double-window window.
• You cannot view IEEE1394 source programs in the
POP window.
• You cannot view two video or two antenna sources
in both the main and POP windows simultaneously.
Main window POP window (You can view a video source in one window and
an antenna source in the other.)
ANT1 POP
TV12 Video1 • The FREEZE feature is not available when the POP
double-window is open. If you press FREEZE
when the double-window is open, the message
“Not available” will appear.
Green border
(denotes active window)

3. Press • to highlight the POP (right) window. When highlighted, the window
will have a green border.
4. Press INPUT to open the POP Input Selection window. Select the input source
for the POP window by pressing the corresponding Number button (0–9). The Numbers
current source displays in purple in the POP Input Selection window.
INPUT
POP Input Selection
0 ANT 1
1 Video 1
2 Video 2
•
3 Video 3
4 ColorStream HD1
5 ColorStream HD2 ENTER
6 HDMI 1
7 HDMI 2
8 PC
9 ANT 2

0 - 9 / INPUT to Select

SPLIT
To close the POP window and tune to the highlighted window:
Press ENTER after highlighting the window you want to view as a normal picture.
To close the POP window:
Press SPLIT or EXIT.
Notes about recording:
• If the POP window is open and you attempt to start recording, the POP window will close and
recording will start.
• If you use the TV’s remote control to start recording, you will not be able to open the POP window
and the message “Not Available” will appear on-screen.
• It is recommended that you use the TV’s remote control to start recording. If you use a device other
than the TV’s remote control to start recording, you may be able to open the POP window during
the recording process. If this happens, the recorded audio will reflect the audio of the active window
(main or POP), which may not be the audio you intended to record.

Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.

81
 Chapter 8: Using the TV’s features

Using the POP features (continued)

Switching the speaker audio (main or POP)
While the POP window is open, press x or • to switch the sound (main or POP) that
is output from the TV speakers (and from the VARIABLE AUDIO OUT terminals).
The window with the active sound is outlined with a green border.
Example: Press x Example: Press •

x•

POP double-window aspect ratio

The POP double-window feature displays each picture according to its input signal
aspect ratio, as illustrated in the examples below.

480i 480i 480p/720p/1080i 480i

Note:
• The auto aspect ratio feature (page 79) does not
operate in POP double-window mode.
• Aspect ratio is the ratio of width to height of the
picture.

Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.

82
 Chapter 8: Using the TV’s features

Using the FREEZE feature

1. When viewing the TV, press FREEZE to make the picture a still picture.
2. To return to the moving picture, either press FREEZE again, press EXIT, or press
any other button. Using the FREEZE function for any
Note: purpose other than your private viewing
• The FREEZE feature is not available when the POP double-window or FAV SCAN may be prohibited under the Copyright
multi-window is open. If you press FREEZE when either window is open, the message Laws of the United States and other
“Not available” will appear. countries, and may subject you to civil
and criminal liability.
• If the TV is left in FREEZE mode, after 15 minutes it will automatically release the
FREEZE mode and return to the moving picture.

y
x •
z

Moving picture Still picture ENTER

EXIT

Using the favorite channel scan feature

FREEZE
You can use this feature to quickly scan and tune the channels you programmed as FAV SCAN
favorite channels from a nine-picture multi-window.
Note: To use the favorite channel scan feature, you must first program channels into the
favorite channel memory. See “Programming your favorite channels” on page 49.
To scan and tune your favorite channels:
1. Press FAV SCAN. The TV will display the channels you programmed as favorite
channels for the current ANT input in a nine-picture multi-window.
(To display the channels you programmed as favorite channels for the other input,
you must change antenna inputs first (page 72), and then press FAV SCAN.)
1 2 3

2 4–1 4–2
4 5 6

6 11 13
7 8 9

CABLE 18 18 31 36

2. Highlight the window for the channel you want to view:

• Either... press the channel’s multi-window position number (1-9, as illustrated
above, and not the actual channel number) to highlight the window;
• or... use the y z x • buttons to highlight the window.
The highlighted window will display as a moving picture.
3. Press ENTER to tune the TV to the highlighted channel and close the multi-window.

2 4–1 4–2

6 11 13

18 31 36

Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.

83
 Chapter 8: Using the TV’s features

Adjusting the picture

Selecting the picture mode Adjusting the picture quality
You can select your desired picture settings from four picture You can adjust the picture quality (contrast, brightness, color,
modes, as described below. tint, and sharpness) to your personal preferences.
Mode Picture Quality Selection x Pressing •
Sports Bright and dynamic picture (factory setting) contrast lower higher
Standard Standard picture settings (factory setting) brightness darker lighter
Movie Lower contrast for darkened room (factory setting) color paler deeper
Preference Your personal preferences tint reddish greenish
sharpness softer sharper
To select the picture mode:
To adjust the picture quality:
Press PIC MODE on the remote control.
The following popup menu appears on- 1. Press MENU and open the Video menu.
screen. 2. Highlight Picture Settings and press ENTER.
Picture Settings Mode: Standard
Mode Standard

Repeatedly press PIC MODE to cycle Video

among the modes or use x or • to PIC Picture Settings

Advanced Picture Settings
select the modes. MODE Theater Settings

To select the picture mode using the menu system: 3. Press y or z to select the picture quality you want to adjust
(Contrast, Brightness, Color, Tint, or Sharpness), and then
1. Press MENU and open the Video menu.
x and • to adjust the setting, as described in the table
2. Highlight Picture Settings and press ENTER. above.
Picture Settings ANT 1
Mode Sports
Contrast 100
Video
Brightness 50
Picture Settings Color 50
Advanced Picture Settings Tint 0
Theater Settings Sharpness 50

Reset Done

3. In the Mode field, select the mode you prefer.

Picture Settings Mode: Preference
Picture Settings ANT 1 Contrast 70

Mode Sports
Contrast
Brightness
100
50
4. To save the new settings, highlight Done and press
Color 50 ENTER. To revert to the factory defaults, highlight Reset
Tint
Sharpness
0
50
and press ENTER.
Reset Done
The picture qualities you adjusted are automatically saved in the
Picture Settings Mode: Standard
Preference mode (see “Selecting the picture mode,” above left).
Mode Standard

4. To save the new settings, highlight Done and press

ENTER. To revert to the factory defaults, highlight Reset
and press ENTER.
Note:
• The picture mode you selected is for the current input
selection only (ANT 1 in the example above). You can select
a different picture mode for each input selection.
• If you select one of the factory-set picture modes (Sports,
Standard, or Movie) and then change a picture quality setting
(for example, increase the contrast or change the color
temperature), the picture mode automatically changes to
Preference in the Picture Settings menu.

Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.

84
 Chapter 8: Using the TV’s features

Adjusting the picture (continued)

Using CableClear® /DNR (digital noise Selecting the color temperature
reduction) You can change the quality of the picture by selecting from three
preset color temperatures (cool, medium, and warm), as
The CableClear® digital noise reduction feature allows you to
described below.
reduce visible interference in your TV picture. This may be
useful when receiving a broadcast with a weak signal (especially Mode Picture Quality
a Cable channel) or playing a noisy video cassette or disc. This cool blueish
feature is enabled for 480i signals only. medium neutral
Note: The CableClear DNR feature does not function in warm reddish
ColorStream, HDMI (DVI), ATSC, IEEE1394, and digital Cable
modes. To select the color temperature:
To select CableClear/DNR preferences: 1. Press MENU and open the Video menu.
1. Press MENU and open the Video menu. 2. Highlight Advanced Picture Settings and press ENTER.
2. Highlight Advanced Picture Settings and press ENTER.
Video
Picture Settings
Video Advanced PictureSettings
Advanced Picture Settings
Theater Settings
Picture Settings
Advanced Picture Settings
Theater Settings
3. In the Color Temperature field, select the mode you prefer
3. In the CableClear/DNR field, select your desired setting. (Cool, Medium, or Warm).
Advanced Picture Settings ANT 1 Advanced Picture Settings ANT 1
Dynamic Contrast On Dynamic Contrast On
MPEG Noise Reduction Low MPEG Noise Reduction Low
CableClear Auto CableClear Auto
Color Temperature Cool Color Temperature Cool
Lamp Mode Low Power Lamp Mode Low Power

Reset Done Reset Done

Note:
• If the current input is Antenna, Video 1, Video 2, or Video 3,
the menu will display the text CableClear. The available
selections are Off, Low, Middle, High, and Auto.
• If the current input is ColorStream HD1, ColorStream HD2, or
HDMI, and the video resolution is 480i, the menu will display
the text “DNR.” The available selections are Off, Low, Middle,
High, and Auto. Auto will react proportionally to the strength of
the noise. Low, Middle, and High, will reduce the noise in
varying degrees from lowest to highest, respectively.
• If the current input is ColorStream HD1, ColorStream HD2, or
HDMI, and the video resolution is not 480i, the menu will
display the text “DNR”.
4. To save the new settings, highlight Done and press
ENTER. To revert to the factory defaults, highlight Reset
and press ENTER.
Note:
If you select one of the factory-set picture modes (Sports,
Standard, or Movie) and then change the color temperature
mode, the picture mode automatically changes to Preference in
the Picture Settings menu.

4. To save the new settings, highlight Done and press

ENTER. To revert to the factory defaults, highlight Reset
and press ENTER.

Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.

85
 Chapter 8: Using the TV’s features

Adjusting the picture (continued)

Using MPEG noise reduction
The MPEG noise reduction feature allows you to reduce visible
interference caused by MPEG compression. Choices for MPEG
noise reduction are High, Medium, Low and Off. Off is
automatically selected when this feature is disabled (“grayed
out”). This feature is not available in the PC input mode.
To select the MPEG noise reduction level:
1. Press MENU and open the Video menu.
2. Highlight Advanced Picture Settings and press ENTER.
Using dynamic contrast
When dynamic contrast is set to “On,” the TV will detect
changes in the picture quality that affect the appearance of your
contrast settings and then automatically adjust the video.
When dynamic contrast is set to “Off,” the settings selected in
the Contrast field in Picture Settings will be used.
To select dynamic contrast preferences:
1. Press MENU and open the Video menu.
2. Highlight Advanced Picture Settings and press ENTER.

Video
Picture Settings
Advanced Picture Settings Video
Theater Settings Picture Settings
Advanced Picture Settings
Theater Settings
3. In the MPEG Noise Reduction field, select either High,
Medium, Low, or Off. 3. In the Dynamic Contrast field, select either On or Off.
Advanced Picture Settings ANT 1
Advanced Picture Settings ANT 1
Dynamic Contrast On
Dynamic Contrast On
MPEG Noise Reduction Low
MPEG Noise Reduction Low
CableClear Auto
CableClear Auto
Color Temperature Cool
Color Temperature Cool
Lamp Mode Low Power
Lamp Mode Low Power
Reset Done
Reset Done

4. To save the new settings, highlight Done and press
ENTER. To revert to the factory defaults, highlight Reset
and press ENTER.
4. To save the new settings, highlight Done and press
ENTER. To revert to the factory defaults, highlight Reset
and press ENTER.
Note:
If you select one of the factory-set picture modes (Sports,
Standard, or Movie) and then set the dynamic contrast to “On,”
the picture mode automatically changes to Preference in the
Picture Settings menu.

Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.

86
 Chapter 8: Using the TV’s features

Using the closed caption mode

The closed caption mode has two options:
• Captions—An on-screen display of the dialogue, narration,
and sound effects of TV programs and videos that are
closed captioned (usually marked “CC” in program guides).
• Text—An on-screen display of information not related to
the current program, such as weather or stock data (when
provided by individual stations).
Advanced closed captions
You can customize the closed caption display characteristics by
changing the text size, type, edge, color, and the background
color. You cannot set the Caption Text and Background as the
same color.
Note: This feature is available for digital channels only.

To view captions or text: To customize the closed captions:

1. Press MENU and open the Preferences menu. 1. Press MENU and open
the Preferences menu.
2. Highlight Closed Caption Mode and then press •. Preferences
2. Highlight Closed Favorite Channels
3. Press z or y to select the desired closed caption mode and Caption Advanced and Closed Caption Mode CC1
Closed Caption Advanced
press ENTER. press ENTER. Input Labeling
Menu Language English
Home CH Setup
3. Press y or z to
Preferences highlight the Navigate Select CH RTN Back EXIT Exit
Favorite Channels
Closed Caption Mode Off
Off
CC1
characteristic you want
Closed Caption Advanced CC2 to change, and then
Input Labeling
Menu Language English
CC3
CC4
press x or • to select the format for that characteristic.
Home CH Setup T1
T2 4. To save the Advanced Closed Captions

Navigate Select CH RTN Back EXIT Exit

new settings, Caption Size Auto
highlight Caption Text Type Auto

• To view captions: Done and Caption Text Edge Auto

Caption Text Color Auto
Highlight CC1, press
Background Color Auto
CC2, CC3, or ENTER. To
CC4. (CC1 displays revert to the Reset Done

translation of the factory

primary language in defaults, highlight Reset and press ENTER.
your area.)
Giant pandas eat leaves.
Note: If the
program or video Caption Size Auto, Small, Standard, Large
you selected is not closed captioned, no captions will display Caption Text Type Auto, Default, Mono w. Serif, Prof. w. Serif,
on-screen. Mono w/o Serif, Prop w/o Serif, Casual,
Cursive, Small Capitals
• To view text:
Highlight T1, T2, Caption Text Edge Auto, None, Raised, Depressed, Uniform,
T3, or T4. Left Drop Shadow, Right Drop shadow
Note: If text is not Caption Text Color Auto, Black, White, Red, Green, Blue,
available in your WORLD WEATHER
Yellow, Magenta, Cyan
Temps Current
area, a black LONDON
F
51
C
11
Weather
Clear Background Color Auto, Black, White, Red, Green, Blue,
rectangle may MOSCOW
PARIS
57
53
14
12
Cloudy
Clear Yellow, Magenta, Cyan
ROME 66 19 Cloudy
appear on your TOKYO 65 18 Rain

screen. If this
happens, turn the Closed Caption Mode Off.
• To turn off the Closed Caption mode:
Select Off in step 3 above.
Note: A closed caption signal may not display in the following situations:
• When a videotape has been dubbed
• When the signal reception is weak
• When the signal reception is non-standard

Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.

87
 Chapter 8: Using the TV’s features

Using the closed caption mode (continued)

Digital closed captions
You can use the Digital CC/Audio selector to select digital
closed caption services (if available), which will temporarily
override closed captions for digital channels only.
When such services are not available, the Digital CC/Audio
selector presents a default list of services. If the selected service is
not available, the next best service will be used instead.
To select digital closed captions:
1. Press MENU and open the Applications menu.
2. Highlight Digital CC/Audio Selector and press ENTER.

Applications
TV Guide On Screen
Audio Player
Picture Viewer
Digital CC/Audio Selector
CableCARD

Navigate Select CH RTN Back EXIT Exit

3. Press y or z to select Closed Caption, and then press x or

• to select the desired service.
Audio CC 1
Closed Caption Service 1

Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.

88
 Chapter 8: Using the TV’s features

Adjusting the audio

Muting the sound Selecting stereo/SAP broadcasts
Press MUTE to partially reduce (1/2 MUTE) or turn off The multi-channel TV sound (MTS) feature allows you to
(MUTE) the sound. Each time you press MUTE, the mute output high-fidelity stereo sound. MTS also can transmit a
mode will change in the following order. second audio program (SAP) containing a second language,
music, or other audio information (when provided by individual
→ 1/2 Mute → Mute → Volume →
stations).
If the closed caption mode is set to Off when you select The MTS feature is not available when the TV is in VIDEO
“MUTE” mode, the closed caption feature is automatically mode. When the TV receives a stereo or SAP broadcast, the
activated. To mute the audio without automatically activating word “STEREO” or “SAP” appears on-screen when RECALL is
the closed caption feature, use the VOL z button to set the pressed.
volume to 0. See “Using the closed caption mode” on page 87
To listen to stereo sound:
for more information on closed caption modes.
1. Press MENU and open
the Audio menu.
Audio
2. Highlight Audio Setup Audio Settings
Advanced Audio Settings
and press ENTER. Audio Setup
VOL z
RECALL 3. In the MTS field, select Audio Setup
MUTE Stereo. MTS Stereo
Language English
Speakers On
Optical Output Format Dolby Digital

Using the digital audio selector Reset Done

You can use the Digital CC/Audio selector to conveniently 4. To save the new settings, highlight Done and press
switch between audio tracks on a digital channel (for those ENTER. To reset the settings to the factory defaults,
channels that have multiple audio tracks). This temporarily highlight Reset and press ENTER.
overrides the audio track chosen by the language option under Note:
Audio Setup (see “Selecting stereo/SAP broadcasts,” at right).
• You can leave the TV in Stereo mode because it automatically
To use the digital audio selector: outputs the type of sound being broadcast (stereo or monaural).
1. Press MENU and open the Applications menu. • If the stereo sound is noisy, select MONO to reduce the noise.
2. Highlight Digital CC/ To listen to an alternate language on an ATSC digital station
Audio Selector and press (if available):
Applications
ENTER. TV Guide On Screen Highlight the Language field in step 3 above, and then press x
3. Press y or z to select Audio Player
Picture Viewer or • to select the language you prefer.
Audio, and then press x Digital CC/Audio Selector

or • to select the desired

CableCARD To listen to a second audio program on an analog station (if
service. available):
Navigate Select CH RTN Back EXIT Exit Select SAP in step 3 above.
Audio CC 1
Note:
Closed Caption Service 1 • A second audio program (SAP) can be heard only on those TV
stations that offer it. For example, a station might broadcast another
language as a second audio program. If you have SAP on, you will
see the current program on the screen but hear the other language
instead of the program’s normal audio.
• If you have SAP on and the station you are watching is not
broadcasting a second audio program, the station’s normal audio
will be output. However, occasionally there is no sound at all in SAP
mode. If this happens, set the MTS feature to Stereo mode.

Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.

89
 Chapter 8: Using the TV’s features

Adjusting the audio (continued)

Adjusting the audio quality 5. To save the new settings, highlight Done and press
ENTER. To reset the settings to the factory defaults,
You can adjust the audio quality by adjusting the bass, treble, highlight Reset and press ENTER.
and balance.
To turn off the SBS:
To adjust the audio quality:
Select Off in step 3.
1. Press MENU and open the Audio menu.
2. Highlight Audio Settings and press ENTER.
Using the StableSound® feature
Audio
The StableSound® feature limits the highest volume level to
Audio Settings prevent extreme changes in volume when the signal source
Advanced Audio Settings
Audio Setup
changes (for example, to prevent the sudden increase in volume
that often happens when a TV program switches to a
commercial).
To turn on the StableSound® feature:
Navigate Select CH RTN Back EXIT Exit
1. Press MENU and open the Audio menu.
3. Press zor y to highlight the item you want to adjust (Bass, 2. Highlight Audio Settings and press ENTER.
Treble, or Balance).
Audio Settings
Audio
Bass 100
Audio Settings
Treble 100
Advanced Audio Settings
Balance 0
Audio Setup
SBS On
SBS Level 85
StableSound Off

Reset Done

Navigate Select CH RTN Back EXIT Exit

4. Press x or • to adjust the level.

3. In the StableSound field, select On.
• x makes the bass or treble weaker or increases the balance
Audio Settings
in the left channel (depending on the item selected). Bass 100
Treble 100
• • makes the bass or treble stronger or increases the balance Balance 0
SBS On
in the right channel (depending on the item selected). SBS Level 85
StableSound On
5. To save the new settings, highlight Done and press
Reset Done
ENTER. To reset the settings to the factory defaults,
highlight Reset and press ENTER. 4. To save the new settings, highlight Done and press
ENTER. To reset the settings to the factory defaults,
Using the sub-bass system (SBS) highlight Reset and press ENTER.
The sub-bass system allows you to enhance bass performance, Note: The RESET function returns your audio adjustments to
even when the volume is low. the following factory settings:

To turn on the SBS and adjust the level: Bass ............. center (50)
Treble .......... center (50)
1. Press MENU and open the Audio menu.
Balance ........ center (0)
2. Highlight Audio settings and press ENTER.
StableSound ... Off
3. In the SBS field, select On.
4. Press y or z to highlight SBS Level, and then press x or • To turn off the StableSound feature:
to adjust the sub-bass system. Select Off in step 3 above.
Audio Settings
Bass 100
Treble 100
Balance 0
SBS On
SBS Level 85
StableSound Off

Reset Done

Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.

90
 Chapter 8: Using the TV’s features

Adjusting the audio (continued)

Using the SRS WOW™ surround sound Using the Dolby Virtual with SRS
feature TruSurround sound feature
WOW™ is a special combination of SRS Labs audio The Dolby Virtual surround sound feature allows you to enjoy
technologies (SRS 3D, FOCUS, and TruBass) that creates a virtual surround sound from the TV’s speakers. The Dolby
thrilling surround sound experience with deep, rich bass from Virtual TruSurround feature is enabled only when receiving
stereo sound sources. Your TV’s audio will sound fuller, richer, digital broadcasts.
and wider.
To turn on the Dolby Virtual surround sound feature:
To adjust the WOW™ settings: 1. Press MENU and open the Audio menu.
1. Put the TV in STEREO mode (see “Selecting stereo/SAP 2. Highlight Advanced Audio Settings and press ENTER.
broadcasts” on page 89).
2. Press MENU and open the Audio menu.
Audio
3. Highlight Advanced Audio Settings and press ENTER. Audio Settings
Advanced Audio Settings
Audio Setup

Audio
Audio Settings
3. In the Dolby Virtual TruSurround field, select On.
Advanced Audio Settings
Audio Setup Advanced Audio Settings
WOW: SRS 3D Off
WOW: FOCUS Off

4. Press z or y to highlight the WOW feature you want to WOW: TruBass Low
Dolby Virtual
adjust, and then press x or • to adjust the item. TruSurround
On

Reset Done
Advanced Audio Settings
WOW: SRS 3D Off
WOW: FOCUS Off
4. To save the new settings, highlight Done and press
WOW: TruBass Low ENTER. To revert to the factory defaults, highlight Reset
Dolby Virtual
TruSurround
On and press ENTER.
Reset Done To turn off the Dolby Virtual surround sound feature:
• WOW: SRS 3D — To turn the surround sound effect On Select Off in step 3 above.
or Off. Note: The Dolby Virtual TruSurround and WOW SRS 3D
features cannot be on at the same time. If you set one to
Note: If the broadcast is monaural, the 3D effect does not
On, the other will automatically be set to Off.
work.
• WOW: Focus — To turn the vocal emphasis effect On or
Off.
• WOW: TruBass — To select the desired bass expansion
level (High, Low, or Off ).
5. To save the new settings, highlight Done and press
ENTER. To revert to the factory defaults, highlight Reset
and press ENTER.

_______________
WOW, TruSurround, SRS and symbol are trademarks of SRS Labs, Inc.
WOW technology is incorporated under license from SRS Labs, Inc.
TruSurround technology is incorporated under license from SRS Labs, Inc.

Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.

91
 Chapter 8: Using the TV’s features

Adjusting the audio (continued)

Turning off the built-in speakers
Use this feature to turn off the TV speakers when you connect
an audio system to your TV (see “Connecting a digital audio
system” and “Connecting an analog audio system” on page 24).
To turn off the built-in speakers:
1. Press MENU and open
the Audio menu.
Audio
2. Highlight Audio Setup Audio Settings

and press ENTER. Advanced Audio Settings

Audio Setup

3. In the Speakers field, Audio Setup

select Off. MTS

Language
Stereo
English
Speakers On
Optical Output Format Dolby Digital

Reset Done

4. To save the new settings, highlight Done and press

ENTER. To revert to the factory defaults, highlight Reset
and press ENTER.
To turn on the built-in speakers:
Select On in step 3 above.

Selecting the optical audio output

format
Use this feature to select the optical audio output format when
you connect a Dolby Digital decoder or other digital audio
system to the Optical Audio Out terminal on the TV (see
“Connecting a digital audio system” on page 24).
To select the optical audio output format:
1. Press MENU and open
the Audio menu.
Audio
2. Highlight Audio Setup Audio Settings

and press ENTER. Advanced Audio Settings

Audio Setup

3. In the Optical Output Audio Setup

MTS Stereo
Format field, select either Language English

Dolby Digital or PCM, Speakers On

Optical Output Format Dolby Digital
depending on your Reset Done
device.
4. To save the new settings, highlight Done and press
ENTER. To revert to the factory defaults, highlight Reset
and press ENTER.

Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.

92
 Chapter 8: Using the TV’s features

Setting the On/Off Timer Setting the sleep timer

You can use the On/Off Timer to turn the TV on and off at a You can set the sleep timer to turn off the TV after a set length
preset time on a recurring basis. of time (maximum of 3 hours). The sleep timer turns off the TV
Note: You must first set the time (see page 55). one time only, as opposed to the On/Off Timer, which turns off
the TV on a recurring basis.
To set the On/Off Timer:
To set the sleep timer:
1. Press MENU and open the Setup menu.
Press SLEEP on the remote control to set the length of time until
2. Highlight On/Off Timer and press ENTER.
the TV turns off. Repeatedly press SLEEP to increase the time in
10-minute increments or press y or z to increase or decrease the
Setup
time in 10-minute increments, to a maximum of 3 hours and 00
Installation minutes.
Sleep Timer
On/Off Timer To cancel the sleep timer:
PC Settings
HDMI 1 Audio
HDMI 2 Audio
Auto
Auto
Press SLEEP until it is set to 0.
Slide Show Interval 2 Sec

Navigate Select CH RTN Back EXIT Exit

SLEEP
3. In the DAY field, press x or • to select the recurrence
(weekends, weekdays, Every day, etc).
On/Off Timer
To set the sleep timer using the on-screen menus:
Turn TV ON: 1. Press MENU and open the Setup menu.
Day Weekends
Time (HH:MM) 0 9 : 0 0 AM
2. Highlight Sleep Timer and press ENTER.
TV ON Duration: 30 Minutes

Reset Cancel Done

Setup

4. Press z to highlight the Time field, and then use the Installation
Sleep Timer
Number buttons to enter the time you want the TV to turn On/Off Timer

on. PC Settings
HDMI 1 Audio Auto

5. When the AM/PM field is highlighted, press • to select HDMI 2 Audio

Slide Show Interval
Auto
2 Sec
AM or PM. Navigate Select CH RTN Back EXIT Exit

6. Press z to highlight the TV ON Duration field, and then

press x or • to select the length of time until the TV turns 3. Press the Number buttons to enter the length of time in
off (30 Minutes, 12 Hours, 8 Hours, 4 Hours, 2 Hours, 1 10-minute increments.
Hour). Sleep Timer

7. Highlight Done and press ENTER. Enter total minutes until the TV
turns off automatically (Maximum
180 minutes)
8. Turn off the TV. The TV will turn on automatically on the
day(s) and at the time you set. The TV will then turn off 1 2 0

automatically after the length of time you set in the TV Cancel Done
ON Duration field.
Note: 4. Highlight Done and press ENTER.
• When a power failure occurs, the On/Off Timer settings may Note:
be cleared. • When a power failure occurs, the sleep timer setting may be cleared.
• To display the On/Off Timer setting, press RECALL. • To display the amount of time left on the sleep timer, press RECALL.
To turn off the On/Off Timer: To display the remaining sleep time:
Select Not Set in step 3 above. Press SLEEP.
On/Off Timer
Sleep Timer
Turn TV ON:
Day Not Set
1h10m

Note:
Reset Cancel Done A message will display on-screen when there is one minute
remaining on the sleep timer.
Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.
93
 Chapter 8: Using the TV’s features

Using the PC setting feature

You can adjust the horizontal position/size, vertical position/size,
clock phase, and sampling clock. This feature will be grayed out
on the menu unless there is a PC connected to the TV (See
“Connecting a personal computer (PC)” on page 29.)
To set the PC setting:
1. Confirm a PC is connected (see “Connecting a personal
computer (PC)” on page 29).
2. Repeatedly press INPUT to select PC input mode. (See
Selecting the video input source to view ” on page 72.)
3. Press MENU and open the Setup menu.
4. Highlight PC Settings and press ENTER.

Setup
Installation
Sleep Timer
On/Off Timer
PC Settings
HDMI 1 Audio Auto
HDMI 2 Audio Auto
Slide Show Interval 2 Sec

Navigate Select CH RTN Back EXIT Exit

5. Press y or z to highlight the item you want to adjust.

6. Press x or • to make the appropriate adjustments.

PC Settings
Horizontal Position 0
Horizontal Width 0
Vertical Position 0
Vertical Height 0
Clock Phase 0
Sampling Clock 0

Reset Done

• Horizontal Position/Vertical Position:

Adjusts picture left/right and up/down. The adjustment range
is within ±5 from center.
(The adjustable range may vary depending on the input mode.)
• Horizontal Width/Vertical Hegiht:
Adjusts picture width of Horizontal and picture height of Vertical.
The adjustment range is within ±5 from center.
• Clock Phase:
This function is to reduce noise and sharpen the picture.
The adjustment range is within ±15 from center.
• Sampling Clock:
This function is to minimize periodic vertical stripes on the
screen.
The adjustment range is within ±15 from center.

Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.

94
 Chapter 8: Using the TV’s features

Displaying TV setting information Understanding the auto power off

on-screen using RECALL feature
To display TV setting information on-screen: The TV will automatically turn itself off after approximately 15
Press RECALL on the remote control. minutes if it is tuned to a vacant channel or a station that
completes its broadcast for the day. This feature functions in
The following information will display on-screen
ANT 1 and ANT 2 modes only.
(if applicable):
• Current input (ANT 1, ANT 2, VIDEO 1, etc.)
• If ANT 1 or ANT 2 is the current input, whether it is
Cable TV (“CABLE”) or STEREO
off-air (“TV”)
Tuner Hold: On
Understanding the last mode
• Channel number (if in
NC-17
On Timer: Weekdays 12:00pm
memory feature
ANT 1 or ANT 2 mode) Sleep Timer: 18 min.
Game Timer: 28 min.
ANT 1
• Signal strength indicator If the power is cut off while you are viewing the TV, the Last
(bar graph in lower right Natural 5:32pm CABLE 81-1
Mode Memory feature automatically turns on the TV when
1080i
corner of screen; for the power is resupplied.
Sample RECALL screen
ATSC signal only) Note: You should unplug the TV’s power cord if it is possible
Note: The signal strength indicator will react to fading and that you will be away from the TV for an extended period of time
increasing signals. after the power is restored.
• Time (if set)
• On/Off timer settings (if set)
• Remaining time on sleep timer (if set)
Using the Gray Level feature
• Remaining time on game timer (if set)
• Stereo or SAP audio status The gray level feature will set the sidebars to three different
• V-Chip rating status levels of darkness. Sidebars are the blanks spaces on either side
• Picture size of a 4:3 viewing area.
• Tuner hold* (if applicable) To set the gray level of the sidebars:
*If you are recording on one tuner (for example, the digital 1. Press MENU and open the Setup menu.
tuner), you will be able to change channels on the other tuner 2. Highlight Gray Level and press •.
only (the analog tuner in this example). The tuner from which
you are recording is “on hold” (i.e., locked) so your 3. Press y or z to select your desired level of darkness
recordings will not be affected by channel changes. (1 – Black, 2 – Dark Gray or 3 – Gray).
• Video resolution
• Lamp mode (appears only if the TV is in Hi Bright mode)
Setup
To close TV setting information on-screen: PC Settings 1
HDMI 1 Audio Auto
Auto 2
On
Press RECALL again. HDMI 2 Audio Auto
Auto 3
Slide Show Interval 2 Sec
AVHD Skip Time 15 min
Gray Level 2
Quick Restart On

Navigate Select CH RTN Back EXIT Exit

Note:
• The gray level feature does not affect video being viewed in 16:9
aspect ratio.
• When receiving a signal that has sidebars (e.g., 4:3 aspect ratio
video over a 1080i or 720p signal), the gray level feature will not be
applied to the sidebars.

Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.

95
 9 Using the Locks menu
The Locks menu includes the Enable Rating Blocking, Edit Rating Limits, Channels Block, Input Lock, Panel Lock, Game Timer,
and New PIN Code features. You can use these features after entering the correct PIN code.

Entering the PIN code If you cannot remember your

PIN code
1. Press MENU and highlight the Locks menu icon.
While the PIN code entering screen is displayed, press RECALL
four times within five seconds. The PIN code will be cleared and
Locks
Enable Rating Blocking Off
you can enter a new PIN code.
Edit Rating Limits
Channels Block
Input Lock Off
Front Panel Lock Off
Game Timer Off
New PIN Code

Navigate Select CH RTN Back EXIT Exit

Changing your PIN code
2. Press z, which displays the PIN code entry screen. 1. Press MENU and highlight the Locks menu icon.
• The Lock System screen (below) appears if a PIN code has 2. Press z to display the PIN code entering screen.
not been stored. Press the Channel Number buttons to 3. Enter your four-digit PIN code and press ENTER.
enter a new four-digit code, enter the code a second time to
4. Press z to highlight New PIN Code and press ENTER.
confirm, and press ENTER.
Lock System
Locks
Enable Rating Blocking Off
Please enter a 4 digit PIN code
Edit Rating Limits
Channels Block
Input Lock Off
Confirm PIN code
Front Panel Lock Off
Game Timer Off
New PIN Code

Cancel Done Navigate Select CH RTN Back EXIT Exit

5. Press the Number buttons to enter a new four-digit code.

• The Locks/Active screen (below) appears if the PIN code is Retype the numbers to confirm the PIN code you entered.
already stored. Press the Channel Number buttons to enter 6. Press ENTER. The new PIN code is now active.
your four-digit code and press ENTER.
New PIN Code
Locks Active

Please enter a 4 digit PIN code

Please enter the 4 digit PIN code
* * * *
* * * * Confirm PIN code
* * * *
Cancel Done

Cancel Done
If the wrong PIN code is entered, the message “Incorrect PIN
code, please try again!” appears. Highlight Retry and press
ENTER. Enter the code again and press ENTER.
When the correct PIN code is entered, the Locks menu opens.

Locks
Enable Rating Blocking Off
Edit Rating Limits
Channels Block
Input Lock Off
Front Panel Lock Off
Game Timer Off
New PIN Code

Navigate Select CH RTN Back EXIT Exit

Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.

96
 Chapter 9: Using the Locks menu

Blocking TV programs and movies by rating (V-Chip)

Some TV programs and movies include signals that classify the Independent rating system for broadcasters
content of the program (violence, sex, dialog, language). The
V-Chip feature in this TV detects the signals and blocks the Ratings Description and Content themes
programs according to the ratings you select. (See the tables at TV-MA Mature Audience Only (This program is specifically designed
right for rating descriptions.) to be viewed by adults and therefore may be unsuitable for
children under 17.)
Note: Rating blocking is a function of the V-Chip feature in this L) Crude or indecent language S) Explicit sexual activity
TV, which supports the U.S. V-Chip system only. V) Graphic violence
To block and unblock TV programs and movies: TV-14 Parents Strongly Cautioned (This program contains some
material that many parents would find unsuitable for children
1. Press MENU and highlight the Locks menu icon. under 14 years of age.)
2. Press z to display the PIN code entering screen. D) Intensely suggestive dialog L) Strong, coarse language
S) Intense sexual situations V) Intense violence
3. Enter your four-digit PIN code and press ENTER.
TV-PG Parental Guidance Suggested (This program contains
4. Press z to highlight Enable Rating Blocking. material parents may find unsuitable for younger children.)
5. Press • and then z to select On, and then press ENTER. D) Some suggestive dialog L) Infrequent coarse language
S) Some sexual situations V) Moderate violence
TV-G General Audience (Most parents would find this program
Locks suitable for all ages.)
Enable Rating Blocking Off Off
Edit Rating Limits On TV-Y7, Directed to Older Children (This program is designed
Channels Block
Input Lock Off
TV-Y7FV for children age 7 and above. Note: Programs in which
Front Panel Lock Off fantasy violence may be more intense or more combative
Game Timer Off than other programs in this category are designated Y7FV.)
New PIN Code
TV-Y All Children (This program is designed to be appropriate for
Navigate Select CH RTN Back EXIT Exit
all children.)
6. Press z to highlight Edit Rating Limits and press ENTER.

Independent rating system for movies

Locks
Enable Rating Blocking Off Rating Description and content themes
Edit Rating Limits
Channels Block X X-rated (For adults only)
Input Lock Off
Front Panel Lock Off NC-17 Not intended for anyone 17 and under
Game Timer Off
New PIN Code
R Restricted (Under 17 requires accompanying parent or adult)
Navigate Select CH RTN Back EXIT Exit
PG-13 Parents Strongly Cautioned (Some material may be
inappropriate for children under 13)
The Edit Rating Limits screen (below) appears.
PG Parental Guidance Suggested (Some material may not be
7. Press yzx • and then press ENTER to select the level of suitable for children)
blocking you prefer. A box with an “×” is a rating that will G General Audience (Appropriate for all ages)
be blocked. As you highlight a rating, a definition for the
rating appears at the bottom of the screen.
8. When done selecting the ratings you want to block, Note:
highlight Done and press ENTER. • If you place an “×” in the box next to “None” Rated or “No Rating,”
programs rated “None” or “No Rating” will be blocked. However, if
Edit Rating Limits
TV (V-CHIP) FV D L S V Movies
the program does not provide any rating information, nothing will be
TV-Y G Children displayed in the RECALL screen and ratings blocking will not take
TV-Y7 PG Youth
effect.
TV-G PG-13
TV-PG R • To display the rating of the program you are watching, press
TV-14 NC-17
TV-MA X Cancel
RECALL on the remote control. If it is not rated, the word “NONE”
"None" Rated or "No Rating" Done appears.
This program is designed for children age 7 and adove.

TV – PG L V NONE

Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.

97
 Chapter 9: Using the Locks menu

Blocking channels Unlocking programs temporarily

With the Channels Block feature, you can block specific If you try to watch a TV program that exceeds the rating limits
channels. You will not be able to tune blocked channels unless you set, the TV enters program lock mode. You can either
you clear the setting first. unlock the program temporarily or select a non-locked program
to watch.
To block channels:
1. Press MENU and highlight the Locks menu icon. This program exceeds the rating limit you set.
2. Press z to display the Push 'mute' to enter PIN.
PIN code entering
Locks
screen. Enable Rating Blocking Off
To temporarily unlock the program:
3. Enter your four-digit Edit Rating Limits
Channels Block
1. Press MUTE.
PIN code and press Input Lock
Front Panel Lock
Off
Off
2. Enter your four-digit PIN code and press ENTER. If the
ENTER (see page 96 for Game Timer Off correct code is entered, Locks Active
New PIN Code
details). the program lock mode
Enter PIN code to temporaily un-
4. Press z to highlight Navigate Select CH RTN Back EXIT Exit
is released and the block.
Channels Block and then press ENTER. normal picture appears. * * * *

5. Using the yz x • buttons, select the input for which you All locking is disabled
want to change the rating limits (ANT1, ANT2, or Cable until the TV is turned Cancel Done

Box, if connected) and press ENTER. off, and will be enabled

when the TV is turned on again.
A list of the channels available for that input will be
displayed along with the call letters for each channel, if
available. Locking video inputs
6. Press yz to highlight Channels Block ANT 1

the channel you want to 1 ANT 1

You can use the Input Lock feature to lock the video input
block, then press 2 ANT 2 sources (VIDEO 1, VIDEO 2, VIDEO 3, ColorStream HD-1,
ENTER, which puts an
3
4
Cable Box
ColorStream HD-2, HDMI 1/HDMI 2, PC) and channels 3
“×” in the box next to 5 and 4. You will not be able to view the input sources or channels
that channel. 6 until you turn off the input lock.
7 Allow All
7. Repeat step 6 for other 8 Block All To lock the video inputs:
9 Cancel
channels you want to 10 Done 1. Press MENU and highlight the Locks menu icon.
block.
2. Press z to display the PIN code entering screen.
8. Highlight Done and press ENTER.
3. Enter your four-digit PIN code and press ENTER.
To unblock individual channels: 4. Press z to highlight Input Lock and press •.
In step 6 above, press yz to highlight the channel you want to
unblock, and then press ENTER to remove the “×” from the 5. Press y or z to select the level of video input locking you
box, and highlight Done, and then press ENTER. prefer, as described below:
Video: Locks VIDEO 1,
To block all channels at once: VIDEO 2, VIDEO 3,
Locks
Highlight Block All in step 6 above, and then highlight Done, ColorStream HD1/ Enable Rating Blocking Off Off
and press ENTER. HD2, HDMI 1/ Edit Rating Limits Video
Channels Block Video +
HDMI 2, and PC. Input Lock Off
To unblock all locked channels at once: Front Panel Lock Off

Highlight Allow All in step 6 Channels Block ANT 1 Video+: Locks VIDEO Game Timer Off
New PIN Code

above, and then highlight 1 ANT 1

1, VIDEO 2, VIDEO 3,
Done, and press ENTER. 2 ANT 2 ColorStream HD1/ Navigate Select CH RTN Back EXIT Exit

3 Cable Box HD2, HDMI 1/

4
5
HDMI 2, PC and channels 3 and 4. Select Video+ if you
6 use the antenna terminal to play a video tape.
7 Allow All
Note: Make sure the POP is not on channel 3 or 4.
8 Block All
9 Cancel
Off: Unlocks all video input sources.
10 Done
6. Press ENTER.
Note: Channel blocking may not take effect if you have a cable box Note: When a CableCARD™ is inserted, Video+ will behave the same as
connected and use the cable box controls to change channels. Video lock.

Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.

98
 Chapter 9: Using the Locks menu

Using the GameTimer™ Using the control panel lock feature

You can use the GameTimer to set a time limit for playing a
video game (30–120 minutes). When the GameTimer is
activated, the TV enters VIDEO LOCK mode and locks out
the input source for the video game device.
To set the GameTimer™:
1. Press MENU and highlight the Locks menu icon.
2. Press z to display the PIN code entering screen.
3. Enter your four-digit PIN code and press ENTER.
4. Press z to highlight Game Timer and press •.
5. Press y or z to select the length of time until the Video
Lock is activated (30, 60, 90, or 120 minutes) and press
ENTER.
You can lock the control panel to prevent your settings from
being changed accidentally (by children, for example). When
the control panel lock is On, none of the controls on the TV
control panel will operate except POWER.
To lock the control panel:
1. Press MENU and highlight the Locks menu icon.
2. Press z to display the PIN code entering screen.
3. Enter your four-digit PIN code and press ENTER.
4. Press z to highlight Front Panel Lock.
5. Press • to highlight On and press ENTER. When the
control panel is locked and a button on the control panel
except POWER button is pressed, the message “Not
Available” appears.

Locks
Enable Rating Blocking Off Off
Locks
Edit Rating Limits 30 min
Channels Block 60 min Enable Rating Blocking Off Off
Input Lock Off 90 min Edit Rating Limits On
Front Panel Lock Off 120 min Channels Block
Game Timer Off Input Lock Off
New PIN Code Front Panel Lock Off
Game Timer Off
Navigate Select CH RTN Back EXIT Exit New PIN Code

Navigate Select CH RTN Back EXIT Exit

To cancel the GameTimer™:

Select Off in step 5 above. To unlock the control panel:
To deactivate the video lock once the GameTimer has Highlight Off in step 5 above, or press and hold the
activated it: VOLUME – button on the TV control panel for about 10
seconds until the volume icon appears on-screen.
Set the VIDEO LOCK to Off (see “Locking video inputs” on
page 98). TV control panel
Note:
• A message will appear on-screen when 10 minutes, 3
minutes, and 1 minute remain on the GameTimer.
• If the TV loses power with time remaining on the GameTimer,
when power is restored the TV will enter VIDEO LOCK mode
(as if the GameTimer had expired) and you will have to
deactivate the video lock (as described above).
VOLUME –

Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.

99
10 Using the Picture Viewer and Audio Player
You can use the Picture Viewer to view compatible JPEG-format
photos on your TV’s screen. Media specifications
You can use the Audio Player to play compatible MP3 files on
the TV.
File/folder name specifications
The TV can access JPEG and/or MP3 files that are stored
on either a memory card (as described in this chapter) or a – Maximum file name length: 255 characters.
networked PC (as described in this chapter, in Chapter 11, and
– Maximum shared folder* name length: 12 characters.
on page 30).
Note: – File names must contain US-ASCII characters only.
• Never remove a memory card or turn off the TV while – File and folder names cannot contain any special characters,
viewing/playing files from a memory card. Doing so may such as \ / : ? “ ” < > | .
result in loss of data and/or damage to the memory card and/or TV.
SUCH DAMAGE IS NOT COVERED BY YOUR TOSHIBA
WARRANTY.
• If you are viewing/playing files stored on a memory card or networked
Picture Viewer/JPEG file
PC, IT IS RECOMMENDED THAT YOU BACK UP YOUR DATA. specifications
Toshiba is not liable for any damage caused by the use of any memory
card, networked PC, or shared files with this TV. Toshiba will not – Maximum JPEG file size: 8 MB
compensate for any lost data or recording(s) caused by the use of
• JPEG files larger than 8 MB will not display.
such cards, PCs, or data.
• Failure to take proper care of a memory card may prevent display of – Maximum JPEG image resolution: 6000 x 4000 pixels
pictures or playback of MP3 files from the card or result in damage to
• Images with a resolution higher than 6000 x 4000 pixels will
the memory card and/or TV. SUCH DAMAGE IS NOT COVERED
not display.
BY YOUR TOSHIBA WARRANTY. See “Memory card care and
handling” on page 105. – The Picture Viewer is designed to display only pictures
• The technical criteria set out in this owner’s manual are meant as a stored in compatible JPEG formats with a file extension of
guide only. “.jpg.”
• You must obtain any required permission from copyright
owners to download or use copyrighted content. Toshiba – JPEG images processed and/or edited on a personal
cannot and does not grant such permission. computer (PC) may not display properly or at all.
– Some digital cameras may store images in a format that is not
compatible with the TV.
– JPEG files stored on a memory card or networked PC that
are not in a file and folder format compatible with the TV
will not display on the TV.

___________
* The words “folder” and “directory” are used interchangeably.

Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.

100
 Chapter 10: Using the Picture Viewer and Audio Player

Media specifications (continued)

Audio Player/MP3 file specifications Memory card specifications
– Maximum MP3 file size: 50 MB The TV is designed to read the following memory cards:
• MP3 files larger than 50 MB will not play. – SD Memory Card (ver. 1.0)
– The Audio Player is designed to play only music files stored – MMC (MultiMediaCard™)
in compatible MP3 formats with a file extension of “.mp3.” – Memory Stick™ (Pro)
– xD-Picture Card™ (16MB-512MB)
– MP3 files processed and/or edited on a PC may not play
properly or at all. Some MP3 files may be in a format that is – CompactFlash® memory card (Type1)
not compatible with the TV.
Memory card format: FAT16
– MP3 files must be in the following format: • Other memory card formats (including but not limited to
• MPEG1 (ISO/IEC 11172-3) Layer3. FAT32 and NTFS) are not compatible.
• Sampling frequency—MPEG1: 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, Maximum memory card capacity: 512 MB
48 kHz.
• Bitrate—MPEG1: 32–320 kbps. Maximum number of files per memory card:
• Channels—Stereo, Joint stereo, Dual channel, Single – JPEG = 1,000
channel. • All JPEG files over the 1,000th on a single memory card
• ID3 Ver. 1, Ver. 2. will not display.
– MP3 = 200
– The meta-data for MP3 files (e.g, artist name, album name,
song title, etc.) must be in the following format: • All MP3 files over the 200th on a single memory card
will not play.
ISO-8859-1 (US-ASCII/ Western European)
character sets
– MP3 files stored on a memory card or networked PC that
are not in a file and folder format compatible with the TV
will not play on the TV.

Networked PC specifications
Maximum number of files per shared folder:
– JPEG = 1,000
• All JPEG files over the 1,000th in a shared folder
will not display.
– MP3 = 200
• All MP3 files over the 200th in a shared folder
will not play.

Maximum number of nested folder levels: 10 levels

• Files in folders more than 10 levels down from the
top level folder will not display/play.
• See Chapter 11, pages 109–111, for details on
networking your TV and PC for file sharing.
______________
• is a trademark.
• MMC and MultiMediaCard are trademarks of Infineon Technologies AG and
licensed to MMCA (MultiMediaCard Association).
• Memory Stick is a trademark of Sony Corporation.
• xD-Picture Card is a trademark of Fuji Photo Film Co., Ltd.
• Toshiba is an authorized licensee of the CompactFlash® and CF logo®
registered trademarks.

Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.

101
 Chapter 10: Using the Picture Viewer and Audio Player

Using the Picture Viewer

You can use the TV’s Picture Viewer to display your digital
photos (JPEG files) on your TV’s screen in thumbnail mode or
as a slide show.
Note:
• You cannot use the Picture Viewer and Audio Player at the
same time.
• You must obtain any required permission from
copyright owners to download or use copyrighted
content. Toshiba cannot and does not grant such
permission.
Accessing JPEG files stored on a
networked PC
1. Make sure you have correctly set up your home network
and file sharing (see page 30 and Chapter 11).
2. If a memory card is inserted in the TV, you must first close
the Picture Viewer or Audio player and then remove the
Accessing JPEG files stored on a
memory card
1. Insert a memory card into the appropriate card slot on the
side of your TV.
Note:
• If you are using a memory card on which you stored both
JPEG and MP3 files, the Picture Viewer will start
automatically when you insert the memory card into the TV.
• Never insert more than one memory card at time.
• Be sure to insert the card correctly—label side facing left and
the end with the notched corner (if applicable) inserted into
the memory card slot.
• When a CompactFlash memory card is inserted correctly, the
ejector button pops out (see illustration below).
2. Go to “Viewing JPEG files on the TV” on the next page.
Memory card slots

{
memory card or you will not be able to view any JPEG
files shared over your home network.

NOTE: ALWAYS CLOSE THE PICTURE TV side panel ➔

VIEWER OR AUDIO PLAYER BEFORE
REMOVING THE MEMORY CARD.
If you remove the memory card while viewing pictures or playing
audio files, the card and/or saved data may be damaged. THIS
TYPE OF DAMAGE IS NOT COVERED UNDER YOUR ➔
TOSHIBA WARRANTY.

To remove the memory card (if applicable):

a) Press EXIT to close the Picture Viewer, Audio Player,
or any other application that may be running.
b) For a CompactFlash memory card, press the ejector CompactFlash
ejector button
button and then pull the card straight out from the
➔

➔
TV.
or
For all other memory cards, pull the card straight out
from the TV. or
3. Press MENU and open the Applications menu. CompactFlash
xD-Picture Card MMC memory card
4. Highlight Picture Viewer and press ENTER. (MultiMediaCard)

5. Go to “Viewing JPEG files on the TV” on the next page.

™
Secure Digital
or

SD Memory Stick
(Secure Digital)
memory card

Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.

102
 Chapter 10: Using the Picture Viewer and Audio Player

Using the Picture Viewer (continued)

Viewing JPEG files on the TV To set the slide show interval:
1. Press EXIT to close the Picture Viewer (if it is open).
1. After accessing your JPEG files from your memory card or
networked PC (see previous page), the images automatically 2. Press MENU and open the Setup menu.
display on-screen, with one as a large picture and six in 3. Highlight Slide Show Interval and press ENTER.
thumbnail format. 4. Select the interval from the menu sidebar (2, 5, 10, 15, or
Picture Viewer 20 seconds).
1 of 6
May 28 04

2 of 6
Jan 8 04

3 of 6
Jan 18 04 Setup
4 of 6
May 12 04 Installation 2 sec
5 of 6 Sleep Timer 5 sec
Sep 18 03
On/Off Timer 10 sec
6 of 6
Oct 10 10 PC Settings 15 sec
Rotate Next Slide Show EXIT Exit HDMI 1 Audio Auto 20 sec
HDMI 2 Audio Auto
Slide Show Interval 2 Sec
2. Press x to rotate the large picture 90° counterclockwise.
Navigate Select CH RTN Back EXIT Exit
Picture Viewer
1 of 6
May 28 04

2 of 6
Jan 8 04

3 of 6
To close the Picture Viewer:
Jan 18 04

4 of 6
May 12 04 Press EXIT to close the Picture Viewer and return to the regular
5 of 6
Sep 18 03

6 of 6
TV screen.
Oct 10 10

Rotate Next Slide Show EXIT Exit

To restart the Picture Viewer while the memory

3. Press • to rotate the large picture 90° clockwise. card is still inserted:
Picture Viewer
1 of 6
May 28 04
1. Press MENU and open the Applications menu.
2 of 6
Jan 8 04 2. Highlight Picture Viewer and press ENTER.
3 of 6
Jan 18 04

4 of 6
May 12 04

5 of 6
Sep 18 03

6 of 6 Applications
Oct 10 10
TV Guide On Screen
Rotate Next Slide Show EXIT Exit
Audio Player
Picture Viewer
4. Press y or z to select another picture as the large picture. Digital CC/Audio Selector
CableCARD

5. Press ENTER to view your pictures in a slide show.

Navigate Select CH RTN Back EXIT Exit

3. Follow the steps under “Viewing JPEG files on the TV,”

above.

To close the Picture Viewer and remove the

memory card:
During the slide show: 1. Press EXIT to close the Picture Viewer and return to the
• To stop on an image during the slide show, press ENTER. regular TV screen.
To resume the slide show, press ENTER again.
NOTE: ALWAYS CLOSE THE PICTURE
• To rotate the picture, press x or •, and then press ENTER. VIEWER BEFORE REMOVING THE
• To select another image, press y or z, and then press MEMORY CARD.
ENTER. If you remove the memory card while viewing pictures, the card
and/or saved data may be damaged. THIS TYPE OF DAMAGE
• To stop the slide show and return to the picture viewer, IS NOT COVERED UNDER YOUR TOSHIBA WARRANTY.
press CH RTN.
• To stop the slide show and return to the regular TV screen, 2. For a CompactFlash memory card, press the ejector button
press EXIT. and then pull the card straight out from the TV.
For all other memory cards, pull the card straight out from
the TV.

Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.

103
 Chapter 10: Using the Picture Viewer and Audio Player

Using the Audio Player

You can use the TV’s Audio Player to listen to MP3 files on Accessing MP3 files stored on
the TV.
Note: a memory card
• Make all desired adjustments to the TV’s audio features (e.g., Note:
surround, bass, treble, balance) before starting the Audio • Never insert more than one memory card at a time.
Player. • Be sure to insert the card correctly—label side facing left and
• You cannot use the Picture Viewer and Audio Player at the the end with the notched corner (if applicable) inserted into
same time. the memory card slot.
• You must obtain any required permission from • When a CompactFlash memory card is inserted correctly, the
copyright owners to download or use copyrighted ejector button will pop out (see page 102).
content. Toshiba cannot and does not grant such
permission. For a memory card that is already inserted
in the TV:
1. Press MENU and open the Applications menu.
Accessing MP3 files stored on a
2. Highlight Audio Player and press ENTER.
networked PC
1. Make sure you have correctly set up your home network Applications

and file sharing (see page 30 and Chapter 11). TV Guide On Screen
Audio Player
Picture Viewer
2. If a memory card is inserted in the TV, you must first close Digital CC/Audio Selector

the Audio Player or Picture Viewer and then remove the CableCARD

memory card or you will not be able to view any

networked MP3 files. Navigate Select CH RTN Back EXIT Exit

NOTE: ALWAYS CLOSE THE PICTURE 3. Go to “Playing MP3 audio files on the TV” on the next
VIEWER OR AUDIO PLAYER BEFORE page.
REMOVING THE MEMORY CARD.
If you remove the memory card while viewing pictures or playing For a memory card that contains both MP3 files
audio files, the card and/or saved data may be damaged. THIS
TYPE OF DAMAGE IS NOT COVERED UNDER YOUR
and JPEG files when no memory card is inserted
TOSHIBA WARRANTY. in the TV:
1. Insert the memory card into the applicable memory card
To remove the memory card (if applicable): slot on the side of your TV (see page 102 for details).
a) Press EXIT to close the Audio Player, Picture Viewer, 2. The Picture Viewer will start automatically (by default).
or any other application that may be running.
Press EXIT to close the
b) For a CompactFlash memory card, press the ejector Picture Viewer.
button and then pull the card straight out from
the TV. 3. Press MENU and open Applications
TV Guide On Screen
the Applications menu. Audio Player
For all other memory cards, pull the card straight out Picture Viewer

from the TV. 4. Highlight Audio Player Digital CC/Audio Selector

and press ENTER. CableCARD

3. Press MENU and open 5. Go to “Playing MP3

the Applications menu. audio files on the TV” Navigate Select CH RTN Back EXIT Exit
Applications
4. Highlight Audio Player TV Guide On Screen
on the next page.
Audio Player
and press ENTER. Picture Viewer

5. Go to “Playing MP3 Digital CC/Audio Selector For a memory card that contains only MP3 files
CableCARD

audio files on the TV” when no memory card is inserted in the TV:
on the next page. 1. Insert the memory card into the applicable memory card
Navigate Select CH RTN Back EXIT Exit

slot on the side of your TV (see page 102 for details).

2. Go to “Playing MP3 audio files on the TV” on the next
page.

Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.

104
 Chapter 10: Using the Picture Viewer and Audio Player

Using the Audio Player (continued)

Playing MP3 audio files on the TV To close the Audio Player and remove the
memory card:
1. After accessing your MP3 files from your memory card or
1. Press EXIT to close the audio player and return to the
networked PC (see previous page), the Audio Player will
regular TV screen.
begin playing the first MP3 file in the list.
Audio Player NOTE: ALWAYS CLOSE THE PICTURE
Title
Ser No.1 in D, Op.11...
Artist
SCO/Sir Charles...
VIEWER OR AUDIO PLAYER BEFORE
Vol
Requiem, Op. 5: IV. R... Robert Shaw/Atla... REMOVING THE MEMORY CARD.
Rapsodie Espagnole:... Jesus Lopez-Cobo...
III. Sanctus: Sanctu... Boston Baroque/M...
Moolight Sonata, movement
If you remove the memory card while viewing pictures or playing
Piano Sonata, K. 545... A-M Classical A-M Classical
audio files, the card and/or saved data may be damaged. THIS
Pathétique Sonata, m... A-M Classical
Chopin Prelude No. ... Andrys
TYPE OF DAMAGE IS NOT COVERED UNDER YOUR
Piano Sonata, K. 545... A-M Classical TOSHIBA WARRANTY.
Moolight Sonata, mo... A-M Classical

2. For a CompactFlash memory card, press the ejector button

Navigate Select
2. Press yz x • to navigate to the rewind, pause, fast
forward, skip backward, skip forward, volume, and mute
buttons—or to select another MP3 file—and then press
ENTER.
Note: After 30 seconds of inactivity, a screen saver will
appear. To start the screen saver immediately, press any
button on the remote control.
To use the mute function:
Press yz x • to select the (mute) button, and then press
ENTER. See page 89 for details on muting the sound.
To start the MP3 audio player when a memory
card is already inserted:
1. Press MENU and open the Applications menu.
2. Highlight Audio Player and press ENTER.
3. Press yz x • to navigate to the rewind, pause, fast
forward, skip backward, skip forward, volume, and mute
buttons, and then press ENTER.
To close the Audio Player:
Press EXIT to close the audio player and return to the regular
TV screen.
EXIT Exit
and then pull the card straight out from the TV.
For all other memory cards, pull the card straight out from
the TV.
Memory card care and handling
• Use index labels made exclusively for your specific brand of
memory card. Do not use commercially sold labels, which
can cause a malfunction when the card is inserted or
ejected.
• If the image does not appear correctly, or the audio file does
not play correctly, clean the metallic area of the memory
card using a soft, dry, lint-free, anti-static cloth and then
reinsert the card.
• Prevent the metallic area on the memory card from coming
in contact with dust, dirt, or other foreign particles. Do not
touch the metallic area of the memory card with your hands
or otherwise handle it with anything other than a soft, dry,
lint-free, anti-static cloth.
Note: Toshiba is not liable for any damage caused
by the use of any memory card with this TV. Toshiba
will not compensate for any lost data or recordings
caused by the use of such cards.

Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.

105
11 Using the THINC™ home network feature
The Toshiba Home Interactive Network Connection (THINC™) feature allows you to connect the TV to your home network,
which will enable access to the following features:
• File sharing
You can access JPEG and MP3 files that are stored on your networked home PC and view/play them on the TV.
Note: Requires a home network* (see page 30). Does NOT require Internet/e-mail service.

• E-mail scheduling of recordings and reminders

You can schedule recordings and reminders by sending an e-mail to the TV from any PC (personal computer).
Note:
• Requires a compatible recording device (see chapter 2); a home network* (see page 30); and
home Internet service with a dedicated POP3 e-mail address for the TV (different from your personal e-mail address).
Contact your Internet Service Provider (ISP) to obtain and set up Internet/e-mail service.
• You will NOT be able to access or browse the Internet through the TV.

* The THINC™ home network feature is compatible only with Microsoft® Windows® 2000 and the Home and Professional
versions of Microsoft® Windows® XP Service Pack 1 and Service Pack 2.

Follow the steps in sections A through D (below through page 111) to set up and use the TV’s home network features.

A. Connect the TV to your B. Set up the network address

home network To set up the network address:

1. Connect the TV to your home network via the TV’s 1. First, try automatically setting up the network address
RJ45 port. See page 30 for connection instructions. (below).
2. If the automatic setup is not successful, you can either retry
2. If you want to use file sharing only and do not have the automatic setup (below) or try manually setting up the
Internet service in your home: network address (page 107).
Skip to section B, “Set up the network address,”
at right.
Note: If you do not have Internet service, you will not be Automatically setting up the
able to use the e-mail scheduling feature. network address
If you want to use file sharing and e-mail 1. Press MENU and open the Setup menu.
scheduling: 2. Highlight Installation and press ENTER. The Installation
a) You must have Internet service in your home and a menu appears.
dedicated e-mail address for the TV (different from your 3. Open the Network
personal e-mail address). Contact your ISP to obtain menu. Network
Basic Network Setup
and set up Internet/e-mail service in your home. 4. Highlight Basic E-mail Scheduling Setup
Home File Server Setup

b)After you have obtained Internet/e-mail service in your Network Setup and
press ENTER.
home (from your ISP), go to section B, “Set up the
network address,” at right. Navigate Select CH RTN Back EXIT Exit

Note: Like all new and emerging technology, router technology may
For home network troubleshooting tips, see pages 122-123. from time to time cause compatibility issues because of the differences
in router systems implemented by the various router manufacturers;
The unauthorized recording, use, distribution, or revision of television however, most issues can be easily resolved. If you think you might
programs, videotapes, DVDs, and other materials is prohibited under the have router compatibility problems with your Toshiba TV, please contact
Copyright Laws of the United States and other countries, and may subject Toshiba Consumer Solutions by calling 1-800-631-3811 or visiting
you to civil and criminal liability. www.tacp.com/customersupport.contact.asp.
___________
Microsoft and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and /or other countries.

Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.

106
 Chapter 11: Using the THINC™ home network feature

B. Set up the network address (continued)

5. The message “Obtain network address automatically?” will 9. If, after repeating steps 1–6, you receive the error
display. Highlight Yes and press ENTER. message shown in step 8:
Basic Network Setup Either…
Obtain network address automatically? a) Highlight “OK” and press ENTER.
Yes No b) Go to “Manually setting up the network address” on
page 108.
6. The message “Please wait…” will display while the TV is Or…
attempting to load the network address information from a) Highlight “OK” and press ENTER.
the DHCP server.
b) Continue to sections C, D, and E on pages 110–112
Basic Network Setup
(to set up and use file sharing) and/or to sections F and
Please wait... G on pages 113 (to set up and use e-mail scheduling).
If the file sharing and/or e-mail scheduling features
work correctly, then the automatic network address
setup was successful (even though the TV displayed the
If the automatic network address setup is successful, error message).
go to step 7.
If the file sharing and/or e-mail scheduling features
If the automatic network address setup is not successful, do not work correctly, go to “Manually setting up the
go to step 8. network address” on page 108.

7. If the automatic network address setup is successful, the

following screen will appear: Manually setting up the
Basic Network Setup
Done! Network address information has been found!
network address
OK 1. This setup requires the data listed below. You can get this
data from either your ISP or the configuration utility
a) Press ENTER to close the screen and return to the for your DSL/cable modem or router.
Network menu.
b) Skip to section C, “Set up file sharing on your PC,” IP address:
on page 110. ___ ___ ___ . ___ ___ ___ . ___ ___ ___ . ___ ___ ___
Subnet mask:
8. If the automatic network address setup is not successful, ___ ___ ___ . ___ ___ ___ . ___ ___ ___ . ___ ___ ___
the following screen will appear:
Gateway (Router) address:
___ ___ ___ . ___ ___ ___ . ___ ___ ___ . ___ ___ ___
DNS (Domain Name Server) address:
___ ___ ___ . ___ ___ ___ . ___ ___ ___ . ___ ___ ___

a) Make sure all cables for your home network are securely 2. Press MENU and open the Setup menu.
connected. 3. Highlight Installation and press ENTER. The Installation
b) Make sure your home network is set up properly. menu appears.
See page 30 for TV connection information.
Also consult the owner’s manuals for your other 4. Open the Network Network

components. menu. Basic Network Setup

E-mail Scheduling Setup

c) Make sure the DHCP and security settings on your 5. Highlight Basic Home File Server Setup

home router are correct. Consult the owner’s manual Network Setup and
for your router. press ENTER.
Navigate Select CH RTN Back EXIT Exit
d) Retry the automatic network address setup by following
these steps:
(1) Highlight OK and press ENTER.
(2) Repeat steps 1–6. (If you have already repeated (Continued on next page)
this setup process, go to step 9.)
Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.
107
 Chapter 11: Using the THINC™ home network feature

B. Set up the network address (continued)

Manually setting up the network Resetting the network address
address (continued)
1. Press MENU and open the Setup menu.
6. The message “Obtain network address automatically?”
appears. 2. Highlight Installation and press ENTER. The Installation
menu appears.
Highlight No and press ENTER.
3. Open the Network menu.
Basic Network Setup
4. Highlight Basic Network Setup and press ENTER.
Obtain network address automatically?

5. The message “Your Basic Network Setup is complete.

Yes No
Would you like to start over?” will appear.
To continue, highlight Yes and press ENTER.
7. The Basic Network Setup menu appears.
To return to the Network menu, highlight No and press
Press y or z to highlight the IP address field, and then use ENTER.
the Number buttons on the remote control to input the
IP address. Basic Network Setup
Your Basic Network Setup is complete. Would you like to start over?

Basic Network Setup Yes No

Please enter your Network Address Information
IP Address
Subnet Mask
Gateway(Router) 6. If you selected Yes in step 5, the message “Obtain network
DNS(Domain Name Saver)
address automatically?” will appear.
Cancel Done

Basic Network Setup

8. Press z to highlight the Subnet Mask field, and then use Obtain network address automatically?

the Number buttons to input the Subnet Mask. Yes No

9. Press z to highlight the Gateway (Router) field, and then
use the Number buttons to input the Gateway (Router)
address.
10. Press z to highlight the DNS (Domain Name Server) field,
and then use the Number buttons to input the DNS
address.
11. When finished, highlight Done and press ENTER.
The Basic Network Setup menu closes and the Network
menu appears.
To obtain the network address automatically, go to step 5
under “Automatically setting up the network address” on
page 106.
To manually enter the network address, go to step 6 under
“Manually setting up the network address” at left.
For home network troubleshooting tips,
see pages 122-123.

12. Go to section C, “Set up file sharing on your PC,”

on page 109.

Note:
• If you used an Ethernet crossover cable to connect your PC directly
to the TV, you will not be able to use the automatic setup. You will
have to manually set up the network address.
• If you used a hub or switch to connect the TV to your home network,
you will not be able to use the automatic setup. You will have to
manually set up the network address.
• If you used a router with built-in DHCP functionality, use the
automatic setup. Manual setup may not work.

Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.

108
 Chapter 11: Using the THINC™ home network feature

C. Set up file sharing on your PC

Compatible operating systems 2. In the Properties window for the selected folder:

a) Click to display
The following operating systems are compatible for file sharing the “Sharing” tab.
with the TV:
• Microsoft® Windows® XP Service Pack 2
b) Click to select
(Home Edition and Professional) [Setup details at right] “Share this folder.”
• Microsoft® Windows® XP Service Pack 1
(Home Edition and Professional) [Setup details at right]
• Microsoft® Windows® 2000 [Setup details on next page] c) Click “Permissions”
No other operating systems are compatible with the TV. (which will open
the Permissions
Note: window for the
• The name of any directory/folder on your PC that you are selected folder.
setting up for file sharing with the TV can have a maximum of
12 characters and cannot contain any special characters.
• See “Media specifications” on page is 100-101 for
Note: If the “Sharing” tab on your specific PC looks like the one illustrated
details on compatible JPEG and MP3 files.
below (with no “Permissions” button), follow the steps below. When you
click “OK,” you are finished setting up file sharing on your PC and can
To determine which operating system and proceed to section D.
service pack (if applicable) are on your PC: a) Click to display
the “Sharing” tab.
1. On your PC, click the “Start” button.
2. Click “Settings | Control Panel.”
3. In the Control Panel, double-click “System.” b) Click to select
“Share this folder
4. Select the “General” tab, which will display your PC’s on the network.”
current operating system and service pack.
c) Click “OK”
(which will close the
Permissions window
Setting up file sharing on a PC for the selected folder.
with Microsoft® Windows® XP
Service Pack 1 or Service Pack 2 3. In the Permissions window for the selected folder:

1. On your PC: a) Click “Add...”

and then select the
user to be given
a) Right-click sharing privileges.*
the folder *This user must match
the user stored in the
to be shared. TV’s “Home File Server
Setup” menu.
b) Click to check
b) Click “Sharing “Allow” next to

and Security...”

“Full Control.”

(which will open
the Properties c) Click “Apply.”
window for the
d) Click “OK”
selected folder.
to close the window.

4. Go to section D, “Set up file sharing on the TV.”

___________
Microsoft and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation
in the United States and/or other countries.
Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.
109
 Chapter 11: Using the THINC™ home network feature

C. Set up file sharing on your PC (continued)

Setting up file sharing on a PC with Microsoft® Windows® 2000
1. On your PC: 4. In the Properties window:

a) Right-click
the folder
to be shared.

b) Click “Sharing...”
(which will open
the Properties
window for the b) Click “OK”
selected folder. (which closes
the Properties
window).

2. In the Properties window for the selected folder:

5. The shared folder will display with a “shared folder” icon
a) Click to display (a hand holding a folder).
the “Sharing” tab.

b) Click to select
“Share this folder.”

c) Click “Permissions”
(which will open
the Permissions
window for the
selected folder).

3. In the Permissions window for the selected folder:

6. Go to section D, “Set up file sharing on the TV” on

a) Click “Add...”
page 111.
and then select the
user to be given
sharing privileges.*
*This user must match
the user stored in the
TV’s “Home File Server
Setup” menu.
b) Click to check
“Allow” next to
“Full Control.”
c) Click “Apply.”
d) Click “OK”
(which closes the
Permissions window). For home network troubleshooting tips,
see pages 122-123.

Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.

110
 Chapter 11: Using the THINC™ home network feature

D. Set up file sharing on the TV

1. Press MENU and open the Setup menu. 7. Press yz to highlight either JPEG Picture Directory or
MP3 Music Directory.
2. Highlight Installation and press ENTER. The Installation
menu will appear. Note: The first time you highlight either of these fields, the
message “Please Wait...” will appear on-screen until the field is
Open the Network menu. populated with the files in your PC’s shared folder(s).
Home File Server Setup Please Wait...
Please enter your Home File Server Setup information.
Network Home Server Name ABCD

Basic Network Setup User Name XYZ

E-mail Scheduling Setup Password *****

Home File Server Setup JPEG Picture Directory ––
MP3 Music Directory ––

Cancel Done

Navigate Select CH RTN Back EXIT Exit

8. Press x • to select the shared folder (on your PC) that

3. Highlight Home File Server Setup and press ENTER. The contains the JPEG and/or MP3 files you want to view/play
Home File Server Setup window will appear. on the TV.
After a few moments, the message “Please Wait...” will Note: Make sure you select the correct folder in this step.
appear until the network finds your networked PC.
9. To exit the window and save your settings, highlight Done
The networked PC will act as the “Home Server” for file
and press ENTER.
sharing with the TV.
Home File Server Setup
To exit the window without saving your settings, highlight
Please enter your Home File Server Setup information. Cancel and press ENTER.
Home Server Name ABCD
User Name XYZ
Password *****
JPEG Picture Directory
MP3 Music Directory
JPEG
MP3 E. Viewing/playing shared files
Cancel Done
on the TV
4. Press yz to highlight Home Server Name, and then press See Chapter 10, “Using the Picture Viewer and Audio Player,”
x • to select the name of the PC you set up for file for details on viewing/playing your shared JPEG and MP3 files
sharing. on the TV.
If you have multiple PCs on your home network that have
shared folders, press x • to select the PC (home server)
from which you want to access files.
USING THE ON-SCREEN KEYBOARD
Home File Server Setup
Please enter your Home File Server Setup information.
a. Press yzx • to highlight the desired letter, number, or
Home Server Name
User Name
ABCD
XYZ
character, and then press ENTER.
Password
JPEG Picture Directory
*****
JPEG
b. Repeat step “a” until XXXX@XXXXX.XX_
MP3 Music Directory MP3 you have finished 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 - =
q w e r t y u i o p [ ]
Cancel Done entering all characters a s d f g h j k l ; '

for the selected field. z

Shift
x c v b n m , .
BS
/

5. a. Press yz to highlight User Name and then press Note: Done Clear Cancel

ENTER to open the on-screen keyboard for that field. • To toggle between
uppercase and lowercase letters and between numbers
b. Enter the User Name for your PC using the on-screen and symbols, highlight Shift and press ENTER.
keyboard. See “Using the on-screen keyboards,” • To erase the last entered character, highlight BS
at right. (backspace) and press ENTER.
Note: The User Name is case sensitive. • To clear your entered characters, highlight Clear and press
ENTER.
c. When finished entering all characters, highlight Done
and press ENTER. c. When you are finished entering all characters for the
6. Repeat step 5 for the Password field. selected field, highlight Done and press ENTER.
Note: The Password is case sensitive. You will return to the previous Setup window.

Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.

111
 Chapter 11: Using the THINC™ home network feature

F. Set up e-mail scheduling

You can remotely schedule and delete recordings and reminders Setting up e-mail scheduling
via e-mail to the TV from any PC.
Note: 1. Press MENU and open the Setup menu.
• If you have not already done so, follow the instructions in 2. Highlight Installation and press ENTER. The Installation
sections A and B , pages 106–108, before proceeding. menu appears.
• Before you can schedule recordings, the time and date in the
TV Guide On Screen feature must be set. See “Setting the 3. Open the Network menu.
time and date” on page 55. 4. Highlight E-mail Scheduling Setup and press ENTER. The
E-mail Scheduling Setup window opens.
Required information and services E-mail Scheduling Setup
Please enter your E-mail Setup Information.
E-mail Scheduling On
Before you can set up the e-mail scheduling feature, you must ID Required On

have the following information and related services: ID XXXXXXXXXXXX

E-mail Address

a) A valid POP3 e-mail address dedicated for use by the TV Account

Password
only. Incoming Mail Server
Outgoing Mail Server
Note: The e-mail address assigned to the TV must be a E-mail Authorization On
Authorized E-mail Enter YOUR E-mail here
dedicated POP3 address, different from your personal
Test cancel Done
e-mail address. Assigning your personal e-mail address
to the TV will eventually lead to the deletion of all of
your personal e-mails (including attachments). This is
5. Enter the required data in the fields.
NOT covered under the Toshiba warranty.
See “Description of fields in the E-mail Scheduling Setup
b) A personal e-mail address (different from the TV’s window” on page 114 for details on the settings for these
dedicated e-mail address) from which you can send e-mails fields.
to the TV.
• For the fields listed below, press y or z to highlight the
c) Login and password settings for the TV’s POP3 e-mail field, and then press x or • to select On or Off:
account.
– E-mail Scheduling
d) Name or IP address of the incoming (POP3) mail server.
– ID Required
e) Name or IP address of the outgoing (SMTP) mail server.
– E-mail Authorization
To obtain the required e-mail services listed above, contact
your ISP. • For the fields listed below, press y or z to highlight the
field, press ENTER to E-mail Address
To obtain the required addresses and settings listed above, open the keyboard
either contact your ISP or use the configuration utility for window for the XXXX@XXXXX.XX_

your DSL/cable modem or router. selected field, and then 1

q
2
w
3
e
4
r
5
t
6
y
7
u
8
i
9
o
0
p
-
[
=
]

enter the required a

z
s
x
d
c
f
v
g
b
h
n m
j k
,
l
.
;
/
'

Note: information using the Shift BS

• Toshiba is not responsible for any damage or loss caused on-screen keyboard: Done Clear Cancel

directly or indirectly by the failure of the e-mail scheduling

– ID
feature to record content intended to be recorded.
• Toshiba is not responsible for, nor has any control over, any – E-mail Address
content recorded and/or viewed using the e-mail – Account
scheduling feature. Further, the e-mail scheduling feature
– Password
is not meant to be used for unauthorized recording and/or
viewing of copyrighted works. – Incoming Mail Server
• The unauthorized recording, use, distribution, or revision – Outgoing Mail Server
of television programs, videotapes, DVDs, and other – Authorized E-mail
materials is prohibited under the Copyright Laws of the
United States and other countries, and may subject you to See “USING THE ON-SCREEN KEYBOARD” on
civil and criminal liability. page 111 for instructions on entering data in the
fields using the on-screen keyboard.
For home network troubleshooting tips,
see pages 122-123.

Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.

112
 Chapter 11: Using the THINC™ home network feature

F. Set up e-mail scheduling (continued)

6. When you are finished entering all characters for the If the e-mail test does not pass:
selected field, highlight Done and press ENTER. a. An error message and
You will return to the E-mail Scheduling Setup code will appear
E-mail Scheduling Please enter your E-mail Setup Information.
E-mail Scheduling On
on-screen (similar to
Setup window. ID Required On the example at right).
ID XXXXXXXXXXXX
E-mail Address Note: The first number in
7. Highlight Test and Account
the error code denotes an
Password
press ENTER to test Incoming Mail Server error that occurs when the
the e-mail setup. Outgoing Mail Server
E-mail Authorization
TV is receiving an e-mail;
On
the second number denotes an error that occurs when the TV is
During testing, the Authorized E-mail Enter YOUR E-mail here
sending an e-mail.
Test cancel Done
TV will display the
message “Testing E-mail.” b. Locate the error code in the “‘TESTING E-MAIL’
ERROR CODES” table (below) and try the solutions.
Note: Depending on your configuration, the e-mail test can
take several minutes. Do not press EXIT during this time. c. Repeat steps 1–8.

8. When testing is finished, a message will appear indicating 9. To exit the E-mail Scheduling Setup window and save your
whether the e-mail test passed or not. settings, highlight Done and press ENTER.
E-mail Scheduling Setup To exit the E-mail Scheduling Setup window without saving
If the e-mail test Please enter your E-mail Setup Information.
your settings, highlight Cancel and press ENTER.
E-mail Scheduling On
passes: ID Required On

a. The “Test Passes”

ID
E-mail Address
XXXXXXXXXXXX
(Continued on next page)
Testing E-mail
message (shown at Account
Password Test Passes

right) will appear. Incoming Mail Server

Outgoing Mail Server
OK
IMPORTANT NOTE
b. Go to step 9. E-mail Authorization On To use e-mail scheduling, you must first set up the TV Guide
Authorized E-mail Enter YOUR E-mail here

Test cancel Done

On Screen® system. E-mail scheduling will not be available unless the
TV Guide On Screen® system is fully operational. See Chapter 5 for
details on setting up the TV Guide On Screen system.
If you experience any issues with e-mail scheduling, please contact
For additional home network troubleshooting tips, Toshiba Consumer Solutions by calling 1-800-631-3811 or by visiting
see pages 122–124. http://www.tacp.com/customersupport/contact.asp.

“TESTING E-MAIL” ERROR CODES

Code Description Solutions
–1 The TV was able to connect to the • If you receive the message “Error Sending Mail (–1),” the TV may not have received the test e-mail. Send
e-mail server(s) but not log on. another test e-mail to the TV using the “HELP request e-mail” format (see page 118).
• Make sure the TV Guide On Screen® system was set up properly. See “IMPORTANT NOTE,” above.
• Make sure you entered the correct information for the following fields in the TV’s “E-mail Scheduling Setup”
window (confirm this information with your ISP):
– “Incoming Mail Server” and “Outgoing Mail Server” names (or IP addresses).
– “Account” (user name) and “Password” for the TV’s e-mail account.
– “E-mail Address” for the TV.
• Check with your ISP to make sure your TV’s e-mail account has been activated.
• Check with your ISP to make sure their servers support POP3 and SMTP protocols without secure
password authentication or secure connections.
27 The TV could not resolve the e-mail • Make sure you entered the correct information for the following fields in the TV’s “E-mail Scheduling Setup”
server name(s)/address(es). window (confirm this information with your ISP):
– “Incoming Mail Server” and “Outgoing Mail Server” names (or IP addresses).
– “IP,” “Netmask,” “Gateway,” and “DNS” settings (applicable if you manually set up the network address).
• Make sure all cables are connected properly and securely.
• Check your router hardware/settings to make sure your Internet service is currently available (especially
if the e-mail test takes several minutes to complete).
30 The e-mail server name(s)/address(es) • Make sure you entered the correct information for the following fields in the TV’s “E-mail Scheduling Setup”
were resolved but the TV could not window (confirm this information with your ISP):
connect to the server(s). – “Incoming Mail Server” and “Outgoing Mail Server” names (or IP addresses).
– “IP,” “Netmask,” “Gateway,” and “DNS” settings (applicable if you manually set up the network address).
• Make sure all cables are connected properly and securely.
• Check your router hardware/settings to make sure your Internet service is currently available.

Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.

113
 Chapter 11: Using the THINC™ home network feature

F. Set up e-mail scheduling (continued)

Description of fields in the “E-mail Scheduling Setup” window

For instructions on entering data in these fields, see step 5 under “Setting up e-mail scheduling” on page 112.

■“E-mail Scheduling” field ■“ID” field E-mail Scheduling Setup

Please enter your E-mail Setup Information.
E-mail Scheduling On
You can select On or Off for the “E-mail Scheduling” field. Use the on-screen ID Required On
ID XXXXXXXXXXXX

– When this field is set to On, it will be possible for the TV keyboard to enter six E-mail Address

to receive e-mails from any PC to remotely schedule and to 16 numbers and/or Account
Password

modify recordings and reminders. letters to create your Incoming Mail Server

ID (spaces and Outgoing Mail Server

– When this field is set to Off, it will not be possible for the punctuation are not
E-mail Authorization
Authorized E-mail
On
Enter YOUR E-mail here
TV to receive any e-mail, the other fields in this window allowed). Test cancel Done

will be disabled (“grayed out”), and it will not be possible to

remotely schedule recordings or reminders via e-mail.
Also see the “Security settings” table, below.
■“ID Required” field
Also see the “Security settings” table, below.
Note: To help protect your privacy, you may want to choose an ID
that is different from any of your usual passwords or security PINs
(e.g., different from your personal e-mail password, banking login
code, social security number, etc.).

You can select On or Off for the “ID Required” field.

■“E-mail Address” field
– When this field is set to On (recommended), you must
include the ID that you enter in the “ID” field in all e-mails Use the on-screen keyboard to enter the TV’s dedicated e-mail
you send to the TV. This is a security feature to protect your address (different from your personal e-mail address). You will
TV from unauthorized e-mail access. send e-mails to this address to add, modify, or delete schedules
and reminders.
– When this field is set to Off, you do not need to include
the ID in e-mails you send to the TV.
Also see the “Security settings” table, below.

Security settings
(Results of various setting combinations when the “E-mail Scheduling” field is set to ON in the “E-mail Scheduling Setup” window)
“E-mail “E-mail “Authorized “ID
Level of Scheduling” Authorization” E-mail” Required” “ID” Result
security field field field field field

High* ON ON Enter single ON Enter The TV will only accept e-mails from the one e-mail address
[default settings] E-mail address ID specified in the “Authorized E-mail” field that also include the
(recommended) “ID” in the body of the e-mail. All other e-mails received by
the TV (except GET and HELP commands) will be deleted.

Medium ON ON Enter single OFF — The TV will only accept e-mails from the one e-mail address
E-mail address specified in the “Authorized E-mail” field. All other e-mails
received by the TV will be deleted.

Low ON OFF — ON Enter The TV will accept e-mails from any e-mail address that
ID includes the “ID” in the body of the e-mail. All other e-mails
received by the TV will be deleted.

None ON OFF — OFF — The TV will accept e-mails from any e-mail address (including
(Not recommended) unwanted e-mails, such as spam) and will reply to those
e-mails with a failure acknowledgment.

*The “High” settings are the default settings. To help prevent the TV from receiving or sending unwanted e-mails (including e-mails that contain information about
the programs the TV is set to record), it is recommended that you not change these settings unless you need to diagnose a problem or deal
with a unique user situation.

Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.

114
 Chapter 11: Using the THINC™ home network feature
F. Set up e-mail scheduling (continued)
Description of fields in the “E-mail Scheduling Setup” window (continued)
■“Account” field
Use the on-screen keyboard to enter the TV’s e-mail account
login. Depending on your ISP, this may be the entire e-mail
address or just the characters in the e-mail address before the
“@” sign.
■ “Password” field
Use the on-screen keyboard to enter the password for the TV’s
e-mail account.
Note: To help protect your other personal Internet or e-mail accounts,
create a password that is significantly different from any of your usual
passwords and security PINs (e.g., different from your e-mail
password, banking log-ons, social security code etc.).
■ “Incoming Mail Server” field
Use the on-screen keyboard to enter the incoming (POP3)
mail server that hosts the TV’s e-mail account.
Note: The TV does not support encrypted e-mail.
■ “Outgoing Mail Server” field
Use the on-screen keyboard to enter the outgoing (SMTP)
mail server associated with the TV’s e-mail account. (The TV
will use this server for sending reply e-mails to your personal
e-mail account.)
Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.
■ “E-mail Authorization” field
You can select On or Off for the “E-mail Authorization” field.
– When this field is set to On (recommended), the TV will
only accept e-mails from the e-mail address you specify in
the “Authorized E-mail” field (e.g., your personal e-mail
address). The TV will delete any e-mails not sent from this
authorized e-mail address.
This is a security feature to protect the TV from
unauthorized e-mail access and from replying to unwanted
e-mail, such as spam.
– When this field is set to Off, it will be possible for the TV
to accept e-mails from any e-mail address (depending on
the other settings in the “E-mail Scheduling Setup”
window).
Also see the “Security settings” table on page 114.
■ “Authorized E-mail” field
Enter the single e-mail address that is authorized to send
e-mails to the TV (e.g., your personal e-mail address).
– To enable this field, you must set the “E-mail
Authorization” field to On.
– This field can be left blank if you have the “E-mail
Authorization” field set to Off.
Also see the “Security settings” table on page 114.
For home network troubleshooting tips,
see pages 122-123.
115
 Chapter 11: Using the THINC™ home network feature

G. Using e-mail scheduling

You can use the e-mail scheduling feature to schedule and delete Sending a request e-mail to the TV
recordings and reminders by sending an e-mail to the TV’s
e-mail address from any PC. To send a request e-mail to the TV:
The four commands the TV will accept are ADD, DELETE, 1. Format the e-mail following according to the instructions
GET, and HELP, as described in this section. under “Formatting a request e-mail” below.
If you have not already done so, follow the instructions in 2. Send the e-mail to the TV.
sections A and B , pages 106–108, and in section F, pages 3. After the TV receives and processes the e-mail, the TV will
112–115, before proceeding. send a reply e-mail indicating whether the e-mailed request
succeeded or failed. See “Receiving an e-mail from the TV,”
When a recording is scheduled via e-mail, the recording device on page 118.
used will be the first of the following attached devices found by
the network (in this order):
1) an AVHD recorder connected via IEEE1394
Formatting a request e-mail
2) a D-VHS recorder connected via IEEE1394 Recognized tags
When you send an ADD, DELETE, GET, or HELP request
3) a VCR connected via the analog RECORD OUT (VIDEO
e-mail to the TV, the TV will recognize only the tags listed
OUT) terminal.
below. These tags (and their accompanying data) must be listed
in the body of the request e-mail in the following order:
E-mail parameters ID* Your ID (required only if you set the “ID Required” field to On*)
COMMAND ADD —or— DELETE —or— GET —or— HELP
• The maximum allowable e-mail size is 16 KB. E-mails over INPUT ANT-1 —or— ANT-2 —or— CABLE BOX
16 KB will be automatically deleted. CHANNEL Channel number of the recording or reminder
• E-mails sent to the TV cannot contain any attachments. DATE Date of the recording or reminder
The TV will automatically delete any e-mail with an START TIME Start time of the recording or reminder
attached file. DURATION Length of time of the recording or reminder
• E-mails can be formatted either Plain Text or Rich Text TYPE RECORD —or— REMIND
Format (HTML style).
• E-mails sent to the TV that are not properly formatted, Tag and data formats
are from the wrong e-mail address, or have the wrong ID The data for each tag can be formatted in various ways, as
(if specified) will be deleted. described in the following table
• All e-mails sent to the TV will eventually be deleted. Tag formats Data formats
ID* [6- to 16-character alphanumeric code]
MyID1234 … MYID1234 … myid1234
Note: COMMAND ADD
• Toshiba is not responsible for any damage or loss caused CMD DELETE … DEL
directly or indirectly by the failure of the e-mail scheduling GET
feature to record content intended to be recorded. HELP
• Toshiba is not responsible for, nor has any control over, any INPUT ANT1 … ANT-1 … Antenna-1
content recorded and/or viewed using the e-mail INP ANT2 … ANT-2 … Antenna-2
scheduling feature. Further, the e-mail scheduling feature CABLE BOX … cablebox … CB
is not meant to be used for unauthorized recording and/or SET-TOP BOX … settopbox … STB
viewing of copyrighted works. CHANNEL For cable channels: 4 … 38 … 100
• The unauthorized recording, use, distribution, or revision CH For digital channels, use a hyphen: 5-1 … 102-2
of television programs, videotapes, DVDs, and other DATE [If the year is not specified, the current year is assumed.]
materials is prohibited under the Copyright Laws of the 7-4 … 7/23 … 7-16-05 … 12/4/05 … 12/19/2005
United States and other countries, and may subject you to
START TIME 8am … 4:45pm … 8:30AM … 9PM
civil and criminal liability.
START Noon: 12:00pm … Midnight: 12:00am
DURATION 15m … 15min … 15minutes … 2h … 2hr …
DUR 2h15m … 2hr15min … 2:15
TYPE RECORD … REC … Rec … recording
REMIND … REM … Rem … reminder

Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.

116
 Chapter 11: Using the THINC™ home network feature

G. Using e-mail scheduling (continued)

Formatting a request e-mail (continued)
Sample request e-mails
• The examples shown below are for illustration purposes only.
• Styles applied to the sample e-mail text (such as bold, italic, and underline) are for illustration purposes only. The text you use in
your request e-mails does not need to be styled.
• The text is not case sensitve (except for the ID). You can type in uppercase and/or lowercase letters.

■ ADD request e-mail ■ DELETE request e-mail

The ADD request allows you to schedule a new recording or The DELETE request allows you to cancel an existing scheduled
reminder. recording or reminder.
The required tags for an ADD request e-mail are (in this The required tags for a DELETE request e-mail are (in this
order): order):
ID [This tag is not required if the “ID Required” field is set to Off ] ID [This tag is not required if the “ID Required” field is set to Off ]
COMMAND ADD COMMAND DELETE
INPUT INPUT
CHANNEL CHANNEL
DATE DATE
START TIME START TIME
DURATION DURATION
TYPE TYPE

Sample ADD request e-mail to Sample ADD request e-mail to Sample DELETE request e-mail Sample DELETE request e-mail
schedule a new recording: schedule a new reminder: to delete an existing recording: to delete an existing reminder:

To: [TV’s email address] To: [TV’s email address] To: [TV’s email address] To: [TV’s email address]
Subject: [this can be left blank] Subject: [this can be left blank] Subject: [this can be left blank] Subject: [this can be left blank]
ID MYID1234* id myid1234* ID MYID1234* id myid1234*
COMMAND ADD cmd add COMMAND DELETE cmd del
INPUT ANT-1 input cb INPUT ANT-1 input cb
CHANNEL 102-1 ch 4 CHANNEL 102-1 ch 4
DATE 06/10/2005 date 7-4 DATE 06/10/2005 date 7-4
START TIME 7 PM start 8:30pm START TIME 7 PM start 8:30pm
DURATION 2H15M dur 1hr DURATION 2H15M dur 1hr
TYPE RECORD type rem TYPE RECORD type rem

■ GET request e-mail ■ HELP request e-mail

When you send a GET request e-mail to the TV, you will When you send a HELP request e-mail to the TV, you will
receive a reply e-mail that lists all currently scheduled recordings receive a reply e-mail that contains helpful information about
and/or reminders. formatting a request e-mail (syntax, definition of the various
The only required tag for a GET request e-mail is GET. commands, etc.).
Sample GET request e-mail:
The only required tag for a HELP request e-mail is HELP.
Sample HELP request e-mail:
To: [TV’s email address]
To: [TV’s email address]
Subject: [this can be blank]
Subject: [this can be blank]
GET
HELP
_______________
* The ID tag is required only if you created an ID in the “ID” field and set the “ID Required” field to On. If you set the “ID Required” field to Off, you do not
need to include the ID tag line in your request e-mail. See “Description of fields in the E-mail Scheduling Setup window” on pages 114–115.

Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.

117
 Chapter 11: Using the THINC™ home network feature

G. Using e-mail scheduling (continued)

Receiving an e-mail from the TV Modifying an existing recording
If the e-mailed request was successful, the reply e-mail from or reminder
the TV will contain one of the following (or similar) messages,
depending on the command you sent to the TV: If you want to modify an existing scheduled recording or
reminder.
• ADD SUCCESS
• DELETE SUCCESS 1. Send a DELETE request e-mail to cancel the existing
• GET SUCCESS recording or reminder.
2. Send an ADD request e-mail to schedule the modified
• HELP SUCCESS
recording or reminder.
If the e-mailed request was not successful, the reply e-mail
from the TV will contain one of the following (or similar)
For home network troubleshooting tips,
messages, depending on the command you sent to the TV:
see pages 122-123.
• FAILED – SCHEDULE CONFLICT
The new recording or reminder you attempted to schedule
conflicts with an existing one that was previously
scheduled.
If you want to schedule the new recording or reminder, you
will have to DELETE the existing one first, and then ADD
the new one.

• FAILED – COULD NOT UNDERSTAND “Line x”

The e-mailed request has an error in the line of text
referenced in the error message. Correct the text and
send the e-mail.

• FAILED – NO DEVICE AVAILABLE

Make sure you have a recording device connected to the
TV and that all cables are properly connected.

• FAILED – MISC ERROR

Make sure all devices and cables are properly connected
and that the text in the body of your e-mail is correct, and
then send the corrected e-mail to the TV.

Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.

118
12 Troubleshooting
General troubleshooting
Before calling a service technician, please check the following table for a possible cause of the symptom and some solutions you can try.

TV will not turn on

• Make sure the power cord is plugged in, and then press POWER.
• The remote control batteries may be dead. Replace the batteries or try the control panel buttons.
• If you have recently replaced the lamp unit, make sure the lamp unit and lamp unit door are installed properly (pages 128–130).
• The lamp unit may need to be replaced (pages 128–130). Also see “LED indications” on page 124.
• It may take several minutes for the picture to appear on-screen if the TV is powered off and then on again quickly when the lamp unit
is hot. This is a property of DLP TV lamp technology and is NOT a sign of malfunction. For details, see “IMPORTANT NOTICE ABOUT
HOT LAMP RESTART” on page 5.
Picture problems
General picture problems
• Check the antenna/cable connections (Chapter 2).
• Press INPUT on the remote control or TV/VIDEO on the TV control panel and select a valid video input source (page 72). If no device is
connected to any of the inputs on the TV, no picture will display when you select that particular input source. For device connection details,
see Chapter 2.
• Antenna reception may be poor. Use a highly directional outdoor antenna (if applicable).
• The station may have broadcast difficulties. Try another channel.
• Adjust the picture qualities (page 84).
• If you are using a VCR, make sure the TV/VCR button on the remote control is set correctly (page 32).
• If you have two VCRs connected to your TV, do not connect the same VCR to the TV’s output and input connections at the same time (page 20).
• Do not connect a standard video cable and an S-video cable to VIDEO-1 or VIDEO-2 on the TV back (or VIDEO-3 on the TV side) at the
same time (Chapter 2).
Noisy picture
• If you are watching a tuned analog channel (off-air broadcast or Cable TV), set the CableClear®/DNR feature to AUTO to reduce visible
interference in the TV picture (page 85).
Video Input Selection problems
• If the Input Selection window does not appear when you press INPUT on the remote control or TV/VIDEO on the TV control panel, press
INPUT or TV/VIDEO a second time, which will change to the next video input source and display the Input Selection window.
Cannot view external signals or channel 3 or 4
• If you cannot view signals from external devices connected to VIDEO 1, VIDEO 2, VIDEO 3, or ColorStream,® or from channels 3 or 4, make
sure the Input Lock is set to Off (page 97).
Black box on screen
• Set the Closed Caption feature to Off (page 87).
Poor color or no color
• The station may have broadcast difficulties. Try another channel.
• Adjust the Tint and/or Color (page 84).
• When the ColorStream® signal source is active, the VIDEO OUT terminal outputs blank video. To receive video from the VIDEO OUT signal, a
standard video or S-video IN terminal must be used instead of the ColorStream® connections.
POP problems
• The VIDEO OUT terminal will not output the POP picture (pages 20 and 81).
• If you label all of the inputs as “Hide,” the POP feature will be disabled. If you then attempt to access the POP feature, the message “NOT
AVAILABLE” will appear on-screen (page 81).
Picture brightness changes soon after turning on TV
• If you set the lamp mode to Low Power, each time you turn on the TV, the lamp will start out in High Bright mode but will switch to Low
Power mode in approximately 1 minute. You will notice a change in screen brightness when this happens. This is normal and is not a sign of
malfunction. (See page 80.)
Poor composite or S-video picture
• If the TV is connected to an external A/V device (e.g., DVD player, video game system, set-top box, etc.) always try to use the ColorStream
video jacks (and corresponding audio jacks) or the HDMI input (if available) for connection to such external A/V device. This will reduce the
amount of video processing to be performed by the television.

Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.

119
 Chapter 12: Troubleshooting

General troubleshooting (continued)

Picture problems (continued)
Picture and sound are out of sync
• As with all products that contain a digital display, in rare instances, when viewing certain content (e.g.. television broadcasts, video games,
DVD), you may notice that the sound and picture are slightly out of sync. This phenomenon can be caused by various factors including,
without limitation, video processing within the TV, video processing in an attached gaming system, and video processing/different
compression rates used by broadcasters in their programming. You may want to try one or more of the following suggestions, which may
help to reduce the effect of this phenomenon:
- If the TV is connected to an A/V receiver that has a programmable audio delay feature, use this feature to help synchronize the sound to the
picture.
- If you notice this phenomenon only on certain TV channels, please contact your local broadcast, cable, or satellite provider to inform them
of this issue.
“Now Booting” message appears on-screen
• If you unplug the power cord, when you plug the power cord in again the message “Now Booting...” will displayed on the screen until the
picture appears or the yellow LED will blink until the TV enters standby mode. This is normal and is not a sign of malfunction.

Sound problems
• Check the antenna/cable connections (see Chapter 2).
• The station may have broadcast difficulties. Try another channel.
• The sound may be muted. Press VOLUME.
• If you hear no sound, try setting the MTS feature to stereo mode (page 89).
• Make sure the Speakers function in the Audio Setup menu is set correctly (page 92).
• If you are not receiving a second audio program from a known SAP source, make sure the MTS feature is set to SAP mode (page 89).
• If you hear audio that seems “incorrect” for the program you are watching (such as music or a foreign language), the SAP mode may be on.
Set the MTS feature to stereo mode (page 89).
• When using an external audio amplifier, if you connect the amplifier to the VAR. AUDIO OUT terminals, the volume of the TV and amplifier
must be set above 0 or you will not hear any sound (page 24).
Remote control problems
• Make sure the remote control is set to the correct device mode (page 33).
• Remove all obstructions between the remote control and the TV.
• The remote control batteries may be dead. Replace the batteries (page 33).
• Your TV remote control may not operate certain features on your external device. Refer to the owner’s manual for your other device to
determine its available features. If your TV remote control does not operate a specific feature on another device, use the remote control that
came with the device (page 33).
• If the TV still does not act as expected, use the Restore Factory Defaults procedure as described on page 57.
Channel tuning problems
• Make sure the remote control is set to the correct device mode (page 33).
• The channel may have been erased from the channel memory by the Channel Add/Delete feature. Add the channel to the channel memory
(page 48).
• The channel may be blocked by the Channels Block feature. Unblock the channel (page 97).
• If you are unable to tune digital channels, check the antenna configuration (page 46). If you are still unable to tune digital channels, clear all
channels from the channel list (page 48) and reprogram channels into the channel memory (page 47). If you are still unable to tune digital
channels, use the Restore Factory Defaults procedure as described on page 57. Also see “TV stops responding to controls” and “Other
problems” on the next page.
Closed caption problems
• If the program or video you selected is not closed-captioned, no captions will display on-screen (page 87).
• If text is not available, a black rectangle may appear on-screen. If this happens, turn off the closed caption feature (page 87).
• A closed caption signal may not display correctly in the following situations: a) when a videotape has been dubbed; b) when the signal
reception is weak; or c) when the signal reception is nonstandard (page 87).
Rating blocking (V-Chip) problems
• If you forget your PIN code: While the PIN code entering screen is displayed, press RECALL four times within 5 seconds. The PIN code you
previously stored will be cleared (page 96).
• The V-Chip feature is available for the U.S. V-Chip system only (page 97).

Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.

120
 Chapter 12: Troubleshooting

General troubleshooting (continued)

TV stops responding to controls
• If the TV stops responding to the controls on the remote control or TV control panel and you cannot turn off the TV, press and hold the
POWER button on the TV control panel for 5 or more seconds to reset the TV.

Other problems
• If your TV’s problem is not addressed in this Troubleshooting section or the recommended solution has not worked, use the Restore Factory
Defaults procedure as described on page 57.
Recording problems
• If you use the TV’s remote control to start recording, you will not be able to change inputs (page 72), open the POP window (page 81), or
open the FAV SCAN multi-window (page 83). If you attempt to do so, the message “Not Available While Recording” will appear on-screen.
• If you are recording a digital channel, you will only be able to change analog channels while the recording is in progress. If you are recording
an analog channel, you will only be able to change digital channels while the recording is in progress. This is because the TV tuner that is
being recorded (digital or analog) will be locked on the channel that is currently recording.
• It is recommended that you use the TV’s remote control to start recording. If you use a device other than the TV’s remote control to start
recording and then attempt to access a feature that is normally denied during recording (POP mode, FAV SCAN mode, changing inputs,) the
recorded audio and/or video may not be what you intended to record. See pages 72 and 76.
• If you connected a Symbio™ AVHD recorder, in order to use its full functionality, you must first set up the TV Guide On Screen® system (page
26 and Chapter 5).

Memory card problems

• Make sure you are using a supported or valid memory card format (page 101).
• Make sure you have saved the picture files and/or MP3 files in the correct file format (page 101).
• The memory card may be inserted improperly. Remove the card and reinsert it (page 101).
• The memory card may be empty.
• The memory card may be damaged.

Audio player problems

The Audio player stutters / stops when playing files over the network
• The sharing computer is not available, or removed from the network or in “hibernation.”
• The Ethernet (RJ-45) cables are not connected. Make sure all cables are connected properly.
• Sufficient network band-width is not available. Turn off any other file sharing programs, network-based games, or other network-intensive
operations while the Audio Player is playing.
“No media found” message is displayed
• Media card is not inserted or does not contain valid MP3 files. Insert media card containing valid MP3 files.
• Network MP3 file sharing is not set up correctly. Check PC and TV network settings. Ensure Home Server Setup is completed successfully.
• Media card and network share do not contain any file with “.mp3” extension.
• MP3 files exceed limits specified.
Title or artist name is not displayed
• MP3 file does not contain valid meta-data or does not meet supported specifications.
Audio player takes a long time (about a minute) to start
• Sufficient network band-width is not available. Please turn off any other file-sharing programs, network based games or other network
intensive operations while the mp3 player is playing.
• Too many files or sub-folders need to be searched. If the network share or media card contains a lot of files or nested directories your TV may
take some time to find all playable files.
File is displayed but is always skipped
• The file is not a valid or supported mp3 file.
All files in shared folder or media card are not played
• Only first 200 mp3 files found will be played. Folders nested 10 or more levels below the shared folder are not searched.
Audio Player plays (progress bar and animation change) but audio is not heard
• Volume level is not high enough or TV is muted.

Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.

121
 Chapter 12: Troubleshooting

General troubleshooting (continued)

Picture Viewer problems
“No pictures found” message is displayed.
• Media card is not inserted or does not contain valid jpg. Please insert media card containing valid jpg files.
• Network jpg share is not correctly setup. Check PC share and security settings. Ensure Home server setup is complete and correct.
• Media card and network share do not contain any file with “.jpg” extension
• Jpg files exceed limits specified
Picture viewer option in menu is disabled.
• No media card containing pictures is inserted.
• Basic network setup and Home server setup are not performed.
Picture is not displayed. Rectangle containing “X” is displayed instead.
• Picture file does not meet specifications for Picture Viewer.
Picture is not listed at all.
• No pictures on media card or network drive.
• The number of pictures found is more than the TV can display.
• Picture does not have valid extension (e.g. “.jpg” or “.jpeg”)
• File is too large or is otherwise not compatible with TV for display. Please check Audio Player requirements for filesize and other restrictions.

Home network troubleshooting

Basic network setup problems
Cannot connect to network
• Check modem and splitter connections.
• Make sure the splitter is connected to the modem or TEL.
• Confirm modem’s operation with this manual.
• Make sure your network address or E-mail account are set correctly (pages 108-112).
No network connection
• Check the Ethernet (RJ-45) cable connections.
• Check that the modem’s power cord is plugged in.
• Make sure your network address or E-mail account are set correctly (pages 108-112).
Automatic setup fails
• The Ethernet (RJ-45) cables are not connected properly. Connect all cables as shown on page 30.
• DHCP service is not enabled on router, or no router is present. Please refer to router’s documentation on how to enable DHCP.
If no router is present, please use manual setup (pages 107-108).
• Internet service is not available. Check cable/ DSL modem or contact your ISP for Internet service.
Manual setup fails
• The Ethernet (RJ-45) cables are not connected properly. Connect all cables as shown on page 30.
• TV IP address is same as PC. TV IP address must be different from PC address.
• TV IP address is not on same subnet as PC. (For example, if the PC has IP = 192.168.0.100 with netmask = 255.255.255.0, and the TV has
IP = 192.168.0.200 with netmask = 255.255.255.0, then they are both on the same subnet. Conversely, if the the PC has IP = 192.168.1.100
with netmask = 255.255.255.0, with the TV set as above, then they are on DIFFERENT subnets.)
Unstable network connection
• Unplug the Ethernet (RJ-45) cables, and then connect again.

Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.

122
 Chapter 12: Troubleshooting

Home network troubleshooting (continued)

Home server setup problems
PC (Home Server) name is not displayed
• The Ethernet (RJ-45) cables are not connected properly. Connect all cables as shown on page 30.
• Network setup on PC is incorrect. Ensure both PC and TV are using same network type (DHCP / manual) and compatible network settings.
• PC does not have shared folders set up correctly. Please refer to pages 109-110 on how to set up shares on your PC.
• No master browsers on the network. To configure your PC to be master browser of its subnet, refer to your operating system user guide or
consult an IT professional.
• More than 16 sharing devices are connected
PC (Home Server) name is displayed, but desired shares (JPEG directory and MP3 directory) are not displayed.
• PC does not have shared folders set up correctly. Please refer to pages 109-110 on how to set up shares on your PC.
• User-name and password set in TV are incorrect. Ensure that user-name and password settings in TV
match the settings in PC. Username and passwords are generally case-sensitive.

E-mail scheduling problems

Cannot schedule a recording by e-mail
• Select “Test” to confirm the setup( page 113).
• Select “Done” after setting up( page 113).
• See Chapter 11 in this manual.
Test fails after waiting a long time
• The Ethernet (RJ-45) cables are not connected properly.
• The DNS is not set up correctly. Please check Network settings.
• SMTP and POP3 server settings are incorrect.
• “E-mail Address”, “Account”, or “Password” settings are incorrect. User-names and passwords are generally case-sensitive.
Receiving succeeds but sending fails, or vice-versa
• SMTP and POP3 server settings are incorrect.
• “E-mail Address”, “Account”, or “Password” settings are incorrect.
• ISP may not support SMTP or POP3 protocols. Please check with your ISP for details on what protocols it supports.
Test passes, but TV never responds to e-mails
• Email scheduling is turned OFF.
• Sender’s e-mail address is different from “Authorized Email Address”. Ensure that the email address you are using to send e-mails to the TV is
the same as “Authorized Email Address” in the TV.
Note: Responses from the TV may be delayed by a few mintues depending on e-mail/Internet service
ADD/ DELETE e-mail results in INVALID MAIL VERIFICATION ID reply
• Mail verification ID is not specified or is different from the TV settings.
Command succeeded but recording or reminder did not work.
• The time and date in the TV Guide On Screen™ system are not set.

Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.

123
 Chapter 12: Troubleshooting

LED indications
The yellow and blue LED lights on the TV (at the bottom center of the TV) indicate the TV’s status, as described below:
• Blue ON (solid) and Yellow OFF = The TV power cord is plugged in.
• Yellow ON (solid) and Blue OFF = A recording is in progress while the TV is OFF.
• Blue ON (solid) and Yellow ON (solid) = A recording is in progress while the TV is ON.
• Yellow and/or Blue blinking (see table below).
Note: If the TV loses A/C power (e.g., a power outage occurs or the power cord is unplugged), when power is restored, the yellow LED will blink
while the TV is booting until the remote control is usable. This is normal and is not a sign of malfunction.

TV front

Blue LED

Yellow LED

LED Indication Condition Solution

1) Yellow blinks continuously The lamp unit door is not seated Turn OFF the TV and unplug the power cord. Review “How to
at 3-second intervals. properly. replace the lamp unit” on pages 128–130 to ensure that the lamp
Blue blinks continuously door is installed securely. If the problem persists, contact a Toshiba
at 0.5-second intervals. Authorized Service Center.
2) Yellow blinks continuously The lamp is not working properly. The TV will automatically try to restart itself eight times (see item
at 0.5-second intervals; #3).
Blue is ON (solid).
3) Yellow and Blue blink The lamp is not working properly Turn the TV OFF and then ON again. If the problem persists,
continuously at after the eighth automatic restart replace the lamp unit (see pages 128–130). If the problem still
1-second intervals. (see item #2). exists, contact a Toshiba Authorized Service Center.
4) Yellow is OFF; An abnormal temperature Turn OFF the TV. Check to make sure all slots and openings in the
Blue blinks at 0.2-second increase has occurred. TV cabinet are not covered, blocked, or dusty. Turn ON the TV
intervals 4 times (repeat). again. If the problem persists, contact a Toshiba Authorized Service
Center.
5) Yellow is OFF; Abnormal operation Turn OFF the TV and unplug the power cord. Plug the power cord
Blue blinks continuously (including cooling fan stop). in again and turn ON the TV. If the problem persists, contact a
at 0.5-second intervals. Toshiba Authorized Service Center.
6) Yellow is OFF; Abnormal operation of BUS line. Turn OFF the TV and unplug the power cord. Plug the power cord
Blue blinks continuously in again and turn ON the TV. If the problem persists, contact a
at 1-second intervals. Toshiba Authorized Service Center.
7) Yellow is OFF; The color wheel has stopped. Turn OFF the TV and unplug the power cord. Plug the power cord
Blue blinks at 0.2-second in again and turn ON the TV. If the problem persists, contact a
intervals 3 times (repeat). Toshiba Authorized Service Center.

Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.

124
 Chapter 12: Troubleshooting
TV Guide On Screen™ FAQ
The following are frequently asked questions about the TV Guide On Screen™ system. The answers represent the most likely solutions
to the problem.
After you set up the TV Guide On Screen™ system (Chapter 5), the
program guide opens automatically by default when you turn on
the TV. You can turn off the automatic program guide (see page 45)
and instead press the TV GUIDE button on the remote control to
manually open the TV Guide On Screen™ program guide.
SETUP
1. Q: What if I move and my ZIP code or postal code
changes?
A: Highlight Setup in the Service Bar. Press z to highlight
Change System Settings (page 70), and then press ENTER.
Follow the on-screen prompts to enter new information
(see Chapter 5 for details). It can take up to 24 hours to
receive new data.
2. Q: What if I change my cable hook-up to antenna or vice
versa?
A: Highlight Setup in the Service Bar. Press z to highlight
Change System Settings (page 70), and then press ENTER.
Follow the on-screen prompts to enter new input
information and rescan channels for the new input (see
Chapter 5 for details).
3. Q: What if I change cable boxes?
A: Highlight Setup in the Service Bar. Press z to highlight
Change System Settings (page 70), and then press ENTER.
Follow the on-screen prompts to enter new input
information and rescan channels for the new input (see
Chapter 5 for details).
4. Q: I used to have a cable box, but now I get direct cable.
What do I do?
A: Highlight Setup in the Service Bar. Press z to highlight
Change System Settings (page 70), and then press ENTER.
Follow the on-screen prompts to enter new input
information and rescan channels for the new input (see
Chapter 5 for details).
5. Q: If I add a recorder or change my cable service, how do I
change my Setup information?
A: Highlight Setup in the Service Bar. Press z to highlight
Change System Settings (page 70), and then press ENTER.
Follow the on-screen prompts to enter new information
(see Chapter 5 for details). It can take up to 24 hours to
receive new data.
6. Q: Why does it take up to 24 hours for the TV Guide
On Screen™ system to be ready for use?
A: The initial setup process consists of finding the stations in
your area that carry the TV Guide On Screen™ system data
and tuning to those stations to receive the setup and
listings data.
Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.
7. Q: I had a power outage. Do I need to go through initial
setup of the TV Guide On Screen™ system again?
A: No. The information you entered is stored in the TV Guide
On Screen™ system memory.
Note: For Cable box users, the TV must be OFF and the Cable
box must be left ON for the TV Guide On Screen™ system to
receive channel line-up information.
8. Q: How do I connect the G-LINK™ (IR blaster) cable to
the G-LINK™ input on the TV?
A: See Chapter 2: Connecting your TV in this manual.
You also can refer to the TV Guide On Screen™ prompts
during VCR or Cable box setup.
9. Q: When will I be able to view my TV program listings and
use other TV Guide On Screen™ system features?
A: You will be able to use initial program listings within 24
hours of initial setup. It may take up to one week to receive
the full eight days of program listings.
10. Q: What should I do if I cannot complete initial setup?
A: If you are unable to complete initial setup using the owner’s
manual and the on-screen prompts, please call Toshiba’s
National Service Division at 1-800-631-3811.
11. Q: If I make a mistake during setup, how do I go back to
the previous step?
A: Complete the remaining setup steps. When “Confirming
Your Settings” appears, select “No, repeat setup process.”
Follow the on-screen prompts and input the correct
information.
12. Q: What if the channel number is not visible on my cable
box?
A: Your cable box may be defaulting to a clock or time display
once the channel changes. Watch the box carefully when
testing the cable box brand code to see if the channel
changes to 09.
13. Q: Why won’t my VCR turn on?
A: There are several possibilities:
a) An incorrect or “no VCR” code was entered during the
TV Guide On Screen™ initial setup. Press the TV GUIDE
button on the remote control, and then press • to
highlight SETUP. Press z to highlight “Change system
settings,” and then press ENTER. Follow the on-screen
prompts to select the correct VCR information.
b) Make sure the G-LINK™ (IR blaster) cable is connected
correctly (see page 28).
c) The VCR record timer is on. Turn off the timer.
d) The wired remote VCR is incompatible.
125
 Chapter 12: Troubleshooting
TV Guide On Screen™ FAQ (continued)
CHANNEL LINEUPS & LISTINGS
14. Q: Why aren’t all my channels initially displayed?
A: After initial setup, approximately 120 channels are
automatically displayed. The user may use the “Change
channel display” feature to turn ON or OFF additional
channels.
Note: Even though you have the option of enabling many
more channels, the system may not have the memory capacity
to hold detailed program descriptions for all of them.
15. Q: When I opened the TV Guide On Screen™ system, I was
asked to choose from more than one channel lineup.
What should I do?
A: Select the lineup that most closely matches the one for your
area. If after you choose the lineup, you want to make
changes to it, highlight Setup in the Service Bar. Press z to
select Change Channel Display. Follow the on-screen
instructions.
16. Q: Why do all my channels display “No Listing?”
A: The TV Guide On Screen™ system has not yet received its
data download. The phrase “No Listing” will be replaced
with program information during the next download cycle,
which will occur within the next 24-hour period.
17. Q: Why do some of my channels display “No Listing?”
A: There are several possibilities:
a) The channels in question were recently turned ON (in
Change channel display) and TV Guide On Screen™ has
yet to receive its next data download.
b) After completing the initial setup, the first data download
of the day was interrupted by a VCR recording.
c) The TV power cord was left unplugged for an extended
period of time and the TV Guide On Screen™ system was
unable to receive program listings during the scheduled
download cycle.
d) Poor reception caused some of the data to be missed.
e) The cable box was turned OFF. The TV power cord must
be plugged in and the cable box must be ON.
g) A/V Cable: The VCR was turned OFF. If the connection
includes stereo cables with cable box to VCR and stereo
connection from VCR to television, the VCR must be ON.
18. Q: A show entry in the TV Guide On Screen™ system reads
“No Listing.” What does that mean?
A: Show information for that entry was not available during
the last TV Guide On Screen™ system information update
(download). Show information is updated on a daily basis.
19. Q: I have seen the word “download” in reference to the
TV Guide On Screen™ system. What does that mean?
A: “Download” refers to the times throughout the day when
the TV Guide On Screen™ system is receiving channel and
listings information from your Cable or over-the-air
antenna transmission.
Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.
126
20. Q: After some show titles, I have noticed from 1 to 4 stars
(****). What does that mean?
A: These stars are a broadcast-industry ratings system used to
inform you of a show’s quality. The more stars, the better
the rating.
21. Q: What do the colors for shows in the Listings and Search
screens indicate?
A: Green = Sports; Dark Blue = Children’s; Purple = Movies;
Teal = Other Show.
22. Q: How do I add, delete, or change the assigned number of
channels on the TV Guide On Screen™ system?
A: See the “Change channel display” section in the TV Guide
On Screen™ owner’s manual (see page 70).
23. Q: Why are some of my channels listed on the wrong
number?
A: There are several possibilities (see page 70 for details):
a) Incorrect channel lineup was selected. Access “Change
system settings” and choose “Yes, but my channel lineup is
incorrect,” and then reselect the correct lineup.
b) Channel lineup changes have not yet been processed. Use
the “Change channel display” feature to make adjustments.
c) Initial setup was done incorrectly (that is, the wrong
ZIP/postal code was entered.) Redo the initial setup.
24. Q: Why doesn’t the program highlighted match up with
the video window on my TV screen?
A: There are several possibilities (see page 70 for details):
a) The station in question made a late change to its scheduled
program listing and the TV Guide On Screen™ system has
not yet been updated.
b) The TV is receiving broadcasts through a modified or
boosted antenna system or a satellite dish (not supported
by the TV Guide On Screen™ system).
c) Initial setup was done incorrectly. (i.e., the wrong
ZIP/postal code was entered.) Redo the initial setup.
d) Incorrect channel lineup was selected. Access “Change
system settings” and choose “Yes, but my channel lineup
is incorrect,” and then reselect the correct lineup (see page
65 for details).
e) The video window may be locked. Press SPLIT to unlock.
25. Q: Can I move my favorite stations to the top of the
TV Guide On Screen™ display screen?
A: Yes. Use the “Change channel display” feature to make
adjustments (see page 70). Highlight the station call letters
to be moved, then use the up/down arrows, and/or
Number buttons to reassign the position of the station.
 Chapter 12: Troubleshooting
TV Guide On Screen™ FAQ (continued)
OPERATIONS
26. Q: How can I look for a specific show in the TV Guide
On Screen™ system?
A: SEARCH lets you find shows by keyword, alphabetically,
or by category (HDTV, Movies, Sports, Children,
Educational, News, Variety, Series).
27. Q: My cable box will not change channels with the
TV Guide On Screen™ system. What’s wrong?
A: There are several possibilities:
a) The incorrect cable box code was entered during TV Guide
On Screen™ initial setup. Redo initial setup.
b) The G-LINK™ (IR blaster) cable may not be connected
properly (see page 28).
c) The cable box has no remote capability and is
incompatible.
28. Q: How do I resize or close the Info window?
A: Press the INFO button on the remote control to resize the
Info window. Press the INFO button again to close the
Info window.
29. Q: Is there a way to go directly to the next day’s listings
without scrolling through each time slot?
A: Yes. In LISTINGS, highlight the station for which you
want to look ahead and use the Channel Number buttons
on the remote control to enter “24.” In the resulting menu,
press z two times to scroll down to select the HOURS
AHEAD option, and then press ENTER. You also can use
the SKIP button on the remote control.
30. Q: Why can’t I record a show? All I get is snow or a blue
screen.
A: There are several possibilities (without a cable box):
a) The recording unit was not connected or set up correctly.
b) The incorrect channel lineup was selected. Press TV
GUIDE and then • to highlight SETUP. Press z to
highlight “Change system settings,” and then press
ENTER. Follow the on-screen prompts to select the correct
channel lineup.
31. Q: Why won’t my VCR change channels and why does it
change to the wrong channel?
A: There are two possibilities (with a cable box):
a) The VCR is not set on the correct output channel. Set the
VCR to 03, 04, or whichever output channel is set by your
cable system.
b) The VCR and/or cable box are hooked up incorrectly.
Refer to your VCR owner’s manual or contact your Cable
TV company for proper wiring procedures.
Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.
32. Q: Is Help available in the TV Guide On Screen™ system?
If so, how do I find it?
A: Yes. Highlight any of the five main Services (Listings,
Schedule, Recordings, Setup, Search) and press the INFO
key on the remote control. An expanded Info Box displays
additional help information. Press INFO again to close
the box.
Help is also available in a panel menu. Press INFO to
display an expanded Info Box. Press INFO again to close
the box.
RECORD/REMIND
33. Q: Can I tune to a different channel while recording a
program?
A: No.
34. Q: How many programs can be scheduled for RECORD in
the GUIDE?
A: There is no limit to the number of shows that can be
programmed into the schedule memory.
35. Q: If a program is scheduled to RECORD on a Regular
basis, does it count as five?
A: No, whether a program is scheduled ONCE,
REGULARLY, or WEEKLY, it only counts as one show in
the RECORD stack memory.
36. Q: If I have a power failure, will I need to reset the
recorded shows I have already programmed?
A: The start times and channel numbers of shows that have
been programmed will be retained in the memory of the
TV Guide On Screen™ system. Titles will appear once
listings are restored.
37. Q: Can I set a Record or Remind event without
highlighting a show title in the TV Guide On Screen™
system?
A: Yes. TV Guide On Screen™ has a Manual Record and
Remind feature. Highlight SCHEDULE in the Service Bar,
and press MENU. Choose the event type, press ENTER,
and then enter the date, start and stop time, channel
number, and so forth.
38. Q: What do the frequencies for Record and Remind mean?
A: Once—records/reminds the show one time.
Daily (manual only)—records the time, channel, input,
recorder combination Monday through Friday.
Regularly— records/reminds the show every time the show
airs on the same channel and starts at the same time.
Weekly— records/reminds the show each time the show
airs on the same day of the week, on the same channel and
starts at the same time.
Off (not cancel)—keeps the show in the schedule list but
will not record/remind the show until the frequency is
changed.
127
13 Appendix

Lamp unit replacement and care

Replacing the lamp unit When to replace the lamp unit

(User-replaceable component) You should replace the lamp unit:
• if the picture darkens and/or colors fade;
WARNING: RISK OF • if the screen (lamp) does not light (LED indication #3,
ELECTRIC SHOCK! page 124); or
TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, NEVER • if you hear a loud noise and the picture goes black, which may
REMOVE TV COVERS, EXCEPT AS SPECIFIED indicate a lamp rupture (LED indication #3, page 124).
HEREIN. REFER ALL SERVICING NOT SPECIFIED IN
THIS MANUAL TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL. To obtain a replacement lamp unit:
Failure to follow this WARNING may result in death
or serious injury. In the U.S.
In warranty: Visit www.tacp.toshiba.com/service
The light source for this TV is a mercury lamp with internal or call toll-free 1-800-631-3811.
atmospheric pressure that increases during use. The lamp has a
limited service life that varies depending on product use and Out of warranty: Visit www.ceaccessories.toshiba.com
user settings. or consult your consumer electronics dealer.

As is generally the case with all projection TVs that use

projection lamps as a light source, the brightness of the lamp in In Canada
this TV may vary somewhat over the expected service life and Locate a Toshiba parts distributor by visiting www.toshiba.ca.
will generally decrease over time. The average useful service life Click “Home Entertainment” and then click “Support.”
for the lamp is approximately 8,000 hours in Low Power mode
or 6,000 hours in High Bright mode. See “Selecting the Lamp
mode” on page 80 for information on switching the lamp mode. Use only the replacement lamp unit model listed below.
Because these are averages, some lamps will require earlier Using any other lamp may damage the TV and/or lamp.
replacement. SUCH DAMAGE IS NOT COVERED
Note : The lamp is warranted only for the periods and to the UNDER YOUR TOSHIBA WARRANTY.
extent set forth in the Limited Warranty applicable to this set,
which is a substantially shorter period of time than the average CAUTION: Always replace with same
useful service period. See “Limited United States Warranty” on type lamp unit: Model No. D95-LMP
page 132 or “Limited Canada Warranty” on page 133, as
applicable.
(Stock no. 23311153)

If you use the lamp beyond its service life:

• you may notice a reduction in the colors and/or brightness of
the picture; and
• the strength of the quartz glass in the lamp will be reduced
and the lamp may rupture (often making a loud noise when
this happens). If the lamp ruptures, the TV will not operate
until the lamp unit is replaced.

CAUTION: Always handle the lamp unit with care.

The lamp unit in this TV was designed for safe replacement
by consumers; however, if the lamp unit is subjected to intentional
abuse (such as excessive mechanical abuse or handling by children
or pets), the unit may break, exposing sharp edges or pinch points.

Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.

128
 Chapter 13: Appendix

Lamp unit replacement and care (continued)

How to replace the lamp unit 4. Using a manual screwdriver, loosen the two screws on the lamp
unit.

WARNING: RISK OF
ELECTRIC SHOCK!
TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, NEVER
REMOVE TV COVERS, EXCEPT AS SPECIFIED
HEREIN. REFER ALL SERVICING NOT SPECIFIED IN
THIS MANUAL TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.
Failure to follow this WARNING may result in death
or serious injury.

Required tools: Lint-free gloves; manual screwdrivers (Phillips

and slotted). Lamp unit screws
Optional tool: 5/16" nut driver
WARNING: RISK OF
1. Turn off the TV and unplug the power cord. ELECTRIC SHOCK!
The lamp unit door is provided with an
WARNING: Eye damage may result from interlock to reduce the risk of electric shock and excessive
directly viewing the light produced by this ultraviolet radiation. Never defeat its purpose or attempt
lamp. Always turn off the TV and unplug the to service without removing the lamp unit door
power cord before opening the lamp unit door. completely. Failure to follow this WARNING may result in
death or serious injury.

2. STOP! Allow the lamp to cool for at least one (1) hour
before replacing it.
5. Grasp the lamp unit handle and gently pull the lamp unit
CAUTION: HOT SURFACE! straight out of the TV. Set the old lamp unit aside (see
The temperature of the lamp “Disposing of the used lamp unit” on page 130).
immediately after use
exceeds 392°F (200°C).
Touching the lamp before it has cooled will result in
severe burns. ALLOW THE LAMP TO COOL FOR AT
LEAST ONE (1) HOUR BEFORE REPLACING IT.

3. On the lamp unit door on the side of the TV, loosen the screw
using a manual screwdriver, and then remove the lamp unit
door.
Lamp unit door detail
TV back

Note: Wear soft, lint-free

gloves when replacing
the lamp unit.

(continued on next page)

Loosen screw
using manual
screwdriver

Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.

129
 Chapter 13: Appendix
Lamp unit replacement and care (continued)
How to replace the lamp unit (continued)
6. Carefully insert the new lamp unit straight into the TV until
it is fully seated.
Note :
• Never subject the lamp unit to excessive shock.
• Never touch the lamp unit glass or otherwise get it dirty.
Doing so may affect the image quality and reduce the service life of
the lamp. See “Cleaning the lamp unit glass” below.
CLEANING THE LAMP UNIT GLASS
If you accidentally touch the lamp unit glass or otherwise
get it dirty, wipe it with a lint-free lens cleaning cloth (such
as a cloth for cleaning camera lenses or eyeglasses).
CAUTION: NEVER clean a hot lamp with
any type of flammable liquid or aerosol
cleaning agent. Many ordinary cleaning agents
(such as glass cleaners) contain chemicals that may be
flammable at certain temperatures. If the lamp unit is not allowed
to cool for at least one (1) hour, such chemicals may ignite.
7. Using a manual screwdriver, tighten the two lamp unit screws.
Note: Hand-tighten only. Do not use an electric screwdriver.
Lamp unit screws
(use manual screwdriver only)
NOTE : Make sure the lamp unit and screws
are installed securely; otherwise, the TV may not
turn on and the lamp life may be shortened.
Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.
130
8. Reattach the lamp unit door, making sure to insert the hooks
on the left side of the lamp unit door inside the opening in
the TV cabinet.
Insert the hooks inside
the TV cabinet opening.
Lamp unit door
9. Replace the screw and hand-tighten using a manual screwdriver.
Hand tighten using
manual screwdriver
Lamp unit door NOTE : Make sure
the lamp unit door is
installed securely; otherwise,
the TV may not turn on.
10. Plug in the power cord and turn on the TV. After the initial
warmup period (which may take several seconds for full
picture brightness), the TV should operate normally. If any of
the following conditions exist, turn off the TV, unplug the
power cord, and repeat steps 1–9 to ensure that the lamp unit
and lamp unit door are installed correctly:
• No picture • Dark picture • TV will not turn on
If, after repeating steps 1–9, the problem still exists:
• In the U.S., call TACP consumer solutions at 1-800-631-3811.
• In Canada, locate the nearest Toshiba authorized service
depot by directing your web browser to www.toshiba.ca;
click “Home Entertainment,” and then click “Support.”
Disposing of the used lamp unit
• Place the used lamp unit in the empty box from the new unit.
• Keep the lamp unit out of reach of children and pets.
CAUTION: Always handle the lamp unit with care.
The lamp unit in this TV was designed for safe replacement by
consumers; however, if the lamp unit is subjected to intentional or
accidental abuse (such as excessive mechanical abuse or handling by
children or pets), the unit may break, exposing sharp edges or pinch points.
• Dispose of the used lamp unit by the approved method for
your area.
NOTE : The lamp unit contains mercury. Disposal of mercury may
be regulated due to environmental considerations. For disposal or
recycling information, contact your local authorities or the Electronic Industries
Alliance (www.eiae.org).
 Chapter 13: Appendix

Specifications
NOTE:
• This model complies with the specifications listed below.
• Designs and specifications are subject to change without notice.
• This model may not be compatible with features and/or specifications that may be added in the future.

Television System Video/Audio Terminals (continued)

NTSC standard HDMI™ INPUT:
ATSC standard (8VSB) HDMI compliant (type A connector)
Digital Cable (64 QAM, 256 QAM; in-the-clear, unencrypted*) HDCP compliant
*Encrypted channels can be viewed on this TV E-EDID** compliant
using a CableCARD.™ See page 14 for details. Suggested formats: 1080i, 480p, 480i, 720p
HDMI Audio: 2-channel PCM; 32/44.1/48 kHz sampling
Channel Coverage frequency; 16/20/24 bits per sample
VHF: 2 through 13
VIDEO/AUDIO OUTPUT (also for recording):
UHF: 14 through 69
VIDEO: 1 V(p-p), 75 ohm, negative sync.
Cable TV: Mid band (A-8 through A-1, A through I)
AUDIO: 150 mV(rms) (30% modulation equivalent,
Super band (J through W)
2.2 k ohm or less)
Hyper band (AA through ZZ, AAA, BBB)
Ultra band (65 through 94, 100 through 135) VARIABLE AUDIO OUTPUT:
0–300 mV(rms) (30% modulation equivalent,
Power Source 2.2 k ohm or less)
120 V AC, 60 Hz G-LINK™:
3 V(p-p), 3.5 mm mono socket (IR blaster cables supplied)
Power Consumption IEEE1394 INPUT/OUTPUT:
265 W (average) IEEE1394 compliant 4-pin
38 W in standby mode (using a CableCARD™)
DIGITAL AUDIO OUTPUT:
34 W in standby mode (without a CableCARD™)
Optical type
Audio Power PC IN:
15 W + 15 W Mini D-sub 15 pin Analog RGB
PC AUDIO IN: 150 mV(rms), 22 k ohm or greater
Speaker Type RJ-45 port: Standard Ethernet (RJ-45)
56MX195: Main: Two 4-3/4-inch (12cm) round
Tweeter: Two 1-inch (2.5cm) round Dimensions
62MX195: Main: Four 4-3/4-inch (12cm) round 56MX195: Width: 51-11/16 inches (1,313 mm)
Tweeter: Two 1-inch (2.5cm) round Height: 36-3/16 inches (919 mm)
72MX195: Main: Four 4-3/4-inch (12cm) round Depth: 16-15/16 inches (430 mm)
Tweeter: Two 1-inch (2.5cm) round 62MX195: Width: 57-1/16 inches (1,450 mm)
Height: 39-1/4 inches (997 mm)
Video/Audio Terminals Depth: 18-3/4 inches (476 mm)
S-VIDEO INPUT: 72MX195: Width: 65-13/16 inches (1,672 mm)
Y : 1 V(p-p), 75 ohm, negative sync. Height: 44-1/16 inches (1,119 mm)
C : 0.286 V(p-p) (burst signal), 75 ohm Depth: 21-11/16 inches (551 mm)
VIDEO/AUDIO INPUT: Weight
VIDEO: 1 V(p-p), 75 ohm, negative sync. 56MX195: 90 lbs (40.8 kg)
AUDIO: 150 mV(rms) (30% modulation equivalent, 62MX195: 103 lbs (46.7 kg)
22 k ohm or greater) 72MX195: 122 lbs (55.3 kg)
ColorStream® (component video) HD INPUT: Supplied Accessories
VIDEO: Y: 1V(p-p), 75 ohm • Two dual-wand IR blaster cables
PR: 0.7 V(p-p), 75 ohm • Remote control with two size “AA” alkaline batteries
PB : 0.7 V(p-p), 75 ohm • Owner’s Manual (this book)
Suggested formats: 1080i, 480p, 480i, 720p
AUDIO: 150 mV(rms), 22 k ohm or greater Optional Stands
56MX195: ST 5695
_________ 62MX195: ST 6295
** E-EDID = Enhanced-Extended Display Identification 72MX195: ST 7295

Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.

131
 Chapter 13: Appendix
Limited United States Warranty
for DLP™ Television Models
Toshiba America Consumer Products, L.L.C. (“TACP”) makes the following
limited warranties to original consumers in the United States.
THESE LIMITED WARRANTIES EXTEND TO THE ORIGINAL
CONSUMER PURCHASER OR ANY PERSON RECEIVING THIS DLP™
TELEVISION AS A GIFT FROM THE ORIGINAL CONSUMER
PURCHASER AND TO NO OTHER PURCHASER OR TRANSFEREE.
DLP™ TELEVISIONS PURCHASED IN THE U.S.A. AND USED ANYWHERE
OUTSIDE OF THE U.S.A., INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, CANADA
AND MEXICO, ARE NOT COVERED BY THESE WARRANTIES.
DLP™ TELEVISIONS PURCHASED ANYWHERE OUTSIDE OF THE U.S.A.,
INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, CANADA AND MEXICO, AND USED
IN THE U.S.A., ARE NOT COVERED BY THESE WARRANTIES.
Limited One (1) Year Warranty on Parts and Labor
TACP warrants this DLP™ Television and its parts against defects in materials
or workmanship for a period of one (1) year after the date of original retail
purchase. DURING THIS PERIOD, TACP WILL, AT TACP’S OPTION,
REPAIR OR REPLACE A DEFECTIVE PART WITH A NEW OR
REFURBISHED PART WITHOUT CHARGE TO YOU FOR PARTS OR
LABOR. During this period, TACP Authorized Service Station personnel will
come to your home when warranty service is required. Depending on the
type of repair required, the service will either be performed in your home or
the DLP™ Television will be taken to a TACP Authorized Service Station for
repair and returned to your home at no cost to you.
Limited One (1) Year Warranty on Lamp Unit
TACP warrants the original lamp unit contained in this DLP™ Television
against defects in materials or workmanship for a period of one (1) year after
the date of original retail purchase. DURING THIS PERIOD, TACP WILL,
AT TACP’S OPTION, EXCHANGE A DEFECTIVE LAMP UNIT WITH A
NEW OR REFURBISHED LAMP UNIT WITHOUT CHARGE TO YOU.
LABOR CHARGES FOR LAMP UNIT REPLACEMENT ARE YOUR
RESPONSIBILITY AND ARE NOT COVERED UNDER THIS
WARRANTY. The lamp unit is a user-replaceable component.
Rental Units
The warranty for DLP™ Television rental units begins on the date of the first
rental or thirty (30) days after the date of shipment to the rental firm,
whichever comes first.
Limited Warranty for Commercial Units
TACP warrants DLP™ Televisions, including the lamp units contained therein,
that are sold and used for commercial purposes as follows: all parts are
warranted against defects in materials or workmanship for a period of ninety
(90) days after the date of original retail purchase. DURING THIS PERIOD,
TACP WILL, AT TACP’S OPTION, REPAIR OR REPLACE A DEFECTIVE
PART WITH A NEW OR REFURBISHED PART WITHOUT CHARGE TO
YOU.
Owner’s Manual and Product Registration
Read this owner’s manual thoroughly before operating this DLP™ television.
Complete and mail the enclosed product registration card or register your
DLP™ Television online at www.tacp.toshiba.com/service as soon as
possible. By registering your DLP™ Television you will enable TACP to bring
you new products specifically designed to meet your needs and help us to
contact you in the unlikely event a safety notification is required under the
Consumer Product Safety Act. Failure to register your product does not
diminish your warranty rights.
Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.
132
Your Responsibility
THE ABOVE WARRANTIES ARE SUBJECT TO THE FOLLOWING
CONDITIONS:
(1) You must retain your original bill of sale or provide other proof of
purchase..
(2) All warranty servicing of this DLP™ Television must be performed by an
Authorized TACP Service Station.
(3) The warranties from TACP are effective only if this DLP™ Television is
purchased and operated in the Continental U.S.A. or Puerto Rico.
(4) Labor service charges for set installation, setup, adjustment of customer
controls, and installation or repair of antenna systems are not covered
by this warranty. Reception problems caused by inadequate antenna
systems, misaligned satellite dishes, cable television distribution, VCRs,
DVD players/recorders, personal computer level IEEE1394 devices, and
any other connected signal source device are your responsibility..
(5) Warranties extend only to defects in materials or workmanship as limited
above, and do not extend to any DLP™ Television or parts that have
been lost or discarded by you or to damage to the DLP™ Television or
parts caused by fires, misuse, accident, Acts of God (such as lightning
or fluctuations in electric power), improper installation, improper
maintenance, or use in violation of instructions furnished by TACP; use
or malfunction through simultaneous use of this DLP™ Television and
connected equipment; or to units that have been modified or had the
serial number removed, altered, defaced, or rendered illegible.
How to Obtain Warranty Service
If, after following all of the operating instructions in this manual and reviewing
the section titled “Troubleshooting,” you find that service is needed:
(1) To find the nearest TACP Authorized Service Station, visit TACP’s
website at www.tacp.toshiba.com/service or contact TACP’s
Consumer Solution Center toll free at 1-800-631-3811.
(2) You must present your original bill of sale or other proof of purchase to
the TACP Authorized Service Station.
For additional information, visit TACP’s web site:
www.tacp.toshiba.com.
ALL WARRANTIES IMPLIED BY THE LAW OF ANY STATE OF THE
U.S.A., INCLUDING THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE,
ARE EXPRESSLY LIMITED TO THE DURATION OF THE LIMITED
WARRANTIES SET FORTH ABOVE. WITH THE EXCEPTION OF ANY
WARRANTIES IMPLIED BY THE LAW OF ANY STATE OF THE U.S.A. AS
HEREBY LIMITED, THE FOREGOING WARRANTY IS EXCLUSIVE AND
IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, GUARANTEES, AGREEMENTS,
AND SIMILAR OBLIGATIONS OF TACP WITH RESPECT TO THE
REPAIR OR REPLACEMENT OF ANY PARTS. IN NO EVENT SHALL
TACP BE LIABLE FOR CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES
(INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, LOST PROFITS, BUSINESS
INTERRUPTION, OR MODIFICATION OR ERASURE OF RECORDED
DATA CAUSED BY USE, MISUSE OR INABILITY TO USE THIS DLP™
TELEVISION).
No person, agent, distributor, dealer, or company is authorized to change,
modify, or extend the terms of these warranties in any manner whatsoever.
The time within which an action must be commenced to enforce any
obligation of TACP arising under the warranty or under any statute or law of
the United States or any state thereof is hereby limited to ninety (90) days
from the date you discover, or should have discovered, the defect. This
limitation does not apply to implied warranties arising under the law of any
state of the U.S.A.
THIS WARRANTY GIVES YOU SPECIFIC LEGAL RIGHTS AND YOU
MAY ALSO HAVE OTHER RIGHTS WHICH MAY VARY FROM STATE
TO STATE IN THE U.S.A. SOME STATES OF THE U.S.A. DO NOT ALLOW
LIMITATIONS ON THE DURATION OF AN IMPLIED WARRANTY,
WHEN AN ACTION MAY BE BROUGHT, OR THE EXCLUSION OR
LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES.
THEREFORE, THE ABOVE PROVISIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU
UNDER SUCH CIRCUMSTANCES. 05
 Chapter 13: Appendix
Limited Canada Warranty
for DLP™ Television Models
Toshiba of Canada Limited (“TCL”) makes the following limited warranties to
original consumers in Canada.
THESE LIMITED WARRANTIES EXTEND TO THE ORIGINAL
CONSUMER PURCHASER OR ANY PERSON RECEIVING THIS DLP™
TELEVISION AS A GIFT FROM THE ORIGINAL CONSUMER
PURCHASER AND TO NO OTHER PURCHASER OR TRANSFEREE.
PRODUCTS PURCHASED IN THE U.S.A. AND USED IN CANADA ARE
NOT COVERED BY THESE WARRANTIES.
PRODUCTS PURCHASED IN CANADA AND USED IN THE U.S.A. ARE
NOT COVERED BY THESE WARRANTIES.
Limited One (1) Year Warranty on Parts and Labor*
TCL warrants this DLP™ television television and its parts against defects in
materials or workmanship for a period of one (1) year after the date of
original retail purchase. DURING THIS PERIOD, TCL WILL, AT TCL’S
OPTION, REPAIR OR REPLACE A DEFECTIVE PART WITH A NEW OR
REFURBISHED PART WITHOUT CHARGE TO YOU FOR PARTS OR
LABOR. TCL Authorized Service Depot personnel will come to your home
when warranty service is required. Depending on the type of repair required,
either the service will be performed in your home or the set will be taken to
the TCL Authorized Service Depot for repair and returned to your home at
no cost to you. IN-HOME SERVICE ONLY APPLIES WITHIN 100
KILOMETERS OF AN AUTHORIZED TCL SERVICE DEPOT.
Limited One (1) Year Warranty on Lamp Unit*
TCL warrants the lamp unit in this DLP™ television against defects in
materials or workmanship for a period of one (1) year after the date of
original retail purchase. DURING THIS PERIOD, TCL WILL, AT TCL’S
OPTION, EXCHANGE A DEFECTIVE LAMP UNIT WITH A NEW OR
REFURBISHED LAMP UNIT WITHOUT CHARGE TO YOU. LABOR
CHARGES FOR LAMP UNIT REPLACEMENT ARE NOT COVERED
UNDER WARRANTY. The lamp unit is a user-replaceable component.
Rental Units
The warranty for rental units, including the lamp units contained therein,
begins with the date of first rental or thirty (30) days from the date of
shipment to the rental firm, whichever comes first.
*Limited Warranty for Commercial Units
TCL warrants DLP™ televisions, including the lamp units contained therein,
sold and used for commercial purposes as follows: all parts are warranted
against defects in materials or workmanship for a period of ninety (90) days
after the date of original purchase. DURING THIS PERIOD, TCL WILL, AT
TCL’S OPTION, REPAIR OR REPLACE A DEFECTIVE PART WITH A NEW OR
REFURBISHED PART WITHOUT CHARGE TO YOU. ON-SITE SERVICE
ONLY APPLIES WITHIN 100 KILOMETERS OF AN AUTHORIZED TCL
SERVICE DEPOT.
Owner’s Manual and Product Registration
Read this owner’s manual thoroughly before operating this DLP™ television.
Register your product online at www.toshiba.ca as soon as possible. By
registering your product you will enable TCL bring you new products
specifically designed to meet your needs and help us to contact you in the
unlikely event a safety notification is required under the Consumer Product
Safety Act. Failure to register your product does not diminish your warranty
rights.
Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.
Your Responsibility
THE ABOVE WARRANTIES ARE SUBJECT TO THE FOLLOWING
CONDITIONS:
(1) You must provide your bill of sale or other proof of purchase.
(2) All warranty servicing of this DLP™ television must be performed by an
Authorized TCL Service Depot.
(3) These warranties from TCL are effective only if the DLP™ television is
purchased in Canada from an authorized TCL dealer and operated in
Canada.
(4) Labor charges for installation, setup, adjustment of customer controls,
and installation or repair of antenna systems are not covered by these
warranties. Reception problems caused by inadequate antenna systems
are your responsibility.
(5) Warranties extend only to defects in materials or workmanship as limited
above, and do not extend to any DLP™ television or parts that have
been lost or discarded by you or to damage to the television or parts
caused by fires, misuse, accident, Acts of God (such as lightning or
fluctuations in electric power), improper installation, improper
maintenance, or use in violation of instructions furnished by TCL; use or
malfunction through simultaneous use of this product and connected
equipment; or to units that have been modified or had the serial number
removed, altered, defaced, or rendered illegible.
How to Obtain Warranty Services
If, after following all of the operating instructions in this manual and checking
the “Troubleshooting” section, you find that service is needed:
(1) To find the nearest TCL Authorized Service Depot, visit TCL’s web site at
www.toshiba.ca.
(2) Present your bill of sale or other proof of purchase to the Authorized
Service Depot.
For additional information, visit TCL’s web site:
www.toshiba.ca
ALL WARRANTIES IMPLIED BY THE LAW OF ANY PROVINCE OF
CANADA, INCLUDING THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE,
ARE EXPRESSLY LIMITED TO THE DURATION OF THE LIMITED
WARRANTIES SET FORTH ABOVE. WITH THE EXCEPTION OF ANY
WARRANTIES IMPLIED BY THE LAW OF ANY PROVINCE OF CANADA
AS HEREBY LIMITED, THE FOREGOING WARRANTY IS EXCLUSIVE
AND IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, GUARANTEES,
AGREEMENTS, AND SIMILAR OBLIGATIONS OF TCL WITH RESPECT
TO THE REPAIR OR REPLACEMENT OF ANY PARTS. IN NO EVENT
SHALL TCL BE LIABLE FOR CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL
DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, LOST PROFITS,
BUSINESS INTERRUPTION, OR MODIFICATION OR ERASURE OF
RECORDED DATA CAUSED BY USE, MISUSE, OR INABILITY TO USE
THIS PRODUCT).
No person, agent, distributor, dealer, or company is authorized to change,
modify, or extend the terms of these warranties in any manner whatsoever.
The time within which action must be commenced to enforce any obligation
of TCL arising under this warranty or under any law of Canada or of any
province thereof is hereby limited to 90 days from the date you discover, or
should have discovered, the defect. This limitation does not apply to implied
warranties arising under the law of any province of Canada.
THIS WARRANTY GIVES YOU SPECIFIC LEGAL RIGHTS, AND YOU
MAY ALSO HAVE OTHER RIGHTS, WHICH MAY VARY FROM
PROVINCE TO PROVINCE IN CANADA. SOME PROVINCES OF
CANADA DO NOT ALLOW LIMITATIONS ON THE DURATION OF AN
IMPLIED WARRANTY, LIMITATIONS ON THE TIME WITHIN WHICH AN
ACTION MAY BE BROUGHT, OR THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF
INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES; THEREFORE, THE
ABOVE LIMITATIONS OR EXCLUSIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU
UNDER SUCH CIRCUMSTANCES.
133
 Chapter 13: Appendix
A copy of the GPL source code in this product may be obtained by
contacting Toshiba Consumer Solutions at (800)631-3811. There will be
a charge to cover the costs of providing the source code.
A copy of the LGPL source code in this product may be obtained by
contacting Toshiba Consumer Solutions at (800)631-3811. There will be
a charge to cover the costs of providing the source code.
USB Protocol Copyright © 2005 The NetBSD Foundation, Inc. All rights
reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are
met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice,
this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice,
this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation
and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
3. Neither the name of The NetBSD Foundation nor the names of its
contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from
this software without specified prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE NETBSD FOUNDATION, INC.
AND CONTRIBUTORS “AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED
WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL
THE FOUNDATION OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT,
INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF
SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS;
OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY
THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY,
OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN
ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED
OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in
the OpenSSL Toolkit (http://www.openssl.org).
This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young
(eay@cryptsoft.com).
OpenSSL 0.9.7d Copyright © 1998-2000 the OpenSSL Project. All Rights
reserved. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice,
this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice,
this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation
and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must
display the following acknowledgement: This product includes software
developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit
(http://openssl.org).
4. The names “OpenSSL Toolkit” and “Open SSL Project” must not be used
to endorse or promote products derived from this software without prior
written permission. For written permission, please contact openssl-
core@openssl.org.
5. Products derived from this software may not be called “OpenSSL” nor may
“Open SSL” appear in their names without prior written permission of the
OpenSSL Project.
6. Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following
acknowledgement: “This product includes software developed by the
OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit (http://www.openssl.org).”
Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.
134
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OpenSSL PROJECT “AS IS” AND
ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT
SHALL THE OpenSSL PROJECT OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY
DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE,
DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED
AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE)
ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. This product includes
cryptographic software written by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com). This
product includes software written by Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com).
Copyright © 1995-1998 Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com). All Rights reserved.
This package is an SSL implementation written by Eric Young
(eay@cryptsoft.com). The implementation was written so as to conform with
Netscapes SSL. This library is free for commercial and non-commercial use
so long as the following conditions are adhered to. The following conditions
apply to all code found in this distribution, be it the RC4, RSA, Ihash, DES,
etc., code; not just the SSL code. The SSL documentation included with this
distribution is covered by the same copyright terms except that the holder is
Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com).
Copyright remains Eric Young’s, and as such any Copyright notices in
the code are not to be removed. If this package is used in a product, Eric
Young should be given attribution as the author of the parts of the library
used. This can be in the form of a textual message at program startup
or in documentation (online or textual) provided with the package.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the copyright notice, this list
of conditions and the following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice,
this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation
and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must
display the following acknowledgement: “This product includes
cryptographic software written by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com).”
The word ‘cryptographic’ can be left out if the routines from the library
being used are not cryptographic related.
4. If you include any Windows specific code (or derivative thereof) from the
apps directory (application code) you must include an acknowledgement:
“This product includes software written by Tim Hudson
(tjh@cryptosoft.com).”
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY ERIC YOUNG “AS IS” AND ANY
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED
TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS
FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL
THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT,
INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF
SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS;
OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY
THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR
TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY
WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. The license and distribution terms for
any publicly available version or derivative of this code cannot be changed,
i.e. this code cannot simply be copied and put under another distribution
license (including the GNU Public License).
Index
A Features, TV 8
Account 112
Antenna cables 13
Antenna input configuration
46
Audio player 104
Audio quality adjustments 90
Audio system connection 24
Auto aspect 79
Auto power off 95
AVHD 26, 55
B ID 114
Back of the TV 11
Banner, Channel Browser™ 74
Blocking channels 98
C Installation, care, and service
Cable box connection 16, 18
CableCARD™ 14
CableCARD™ connection 14
CableClear® DNR 85
Cables 13
Cable modem 30
Camcorder connection 15
CH yz buttons 47, 72
Channel Browser™ 74
CH RTN button 76
Channel Number buttons 47,
49, 72
Channel programming:
Automatic programming 47
Manually adding and
deleting 48
Cinema mode 80
Closed captions 87
Color temperature 85
ColorStream® 19
Connecting devices 15–30
CompactFlash® memory cards
101, 102
Component video cables 13
Component video
(ColorStream®) 19
D MN
Defaults, restore TV factory 57
Digital Audio Out 24
Digital signal meter 57
DNR (Digital Noise Reduction)
85
Dolby Digital 24
Dolby Virtual TruSurround 91
Double-window POP feature
81
DVD player connection 18, 19
D-VHS 25, 55
DSL modem 30
DVI connection 21
Dynamic Contrast 86
EFG
E-mail account setup 112
E-mail recording 106
Email 106, 112
EIA-775 25
FAV SCAN button 49, 83
Favorite channels 49, 83
OPQ SRS WOW™ 91
Focus 91 ON/OFF timer 93 StableSound® 90
Front of the TV 10 Optical audio cable 13 Stereo sound 89
Front panel touchpad 10, 41 Optical audio output format 92 S-video cables 13
GameTimer™ 99 Panel lock 99 SurfLock™ 76
G-LINK™ connection 28 Password 115 Symbio™ AVHD recorder 26,
PC connection 29 55
HIJ PC setting 94 System status 57
HDMI audio mode 55 Picture adjustments:
HDMI™ connection 21 CableClear®/DNR (digital T
Home file server setup 111 noise reduction) 85 Telephone cable 30
Home network connection 30 Color temperature 85 TheaterNet™ DEVICE and
CONTROL buttons 51
Dynamic Contrast 86
IEEE1394 25 TheaterNet™ control 25
MPEG noise reduction 86
INPUT button 72 TheaterNet IR device codes
Picture mode 84
Input lock 98 52-54
Picture quality 84
Picture-out-picture (POP): TheaterWide® picture size 78
3, 4 FAV SCAN button 83 TheaterNet™ setup 50
Installation, setup 9 SPLIT button 81 THINC™ system 12
Integrated digital tuning 8 Picture scroll 79 Time and date setting 55
IR blaster 22 Picture size selection 77 Troubleshooting 119-123
ISP (Internet Service Provider) Picture viewer 100 TruBass 91
106 POWER button 10, 31, 36 TV-Guide Email 112
JPEG 100, 102–103 Quick Restart™ 56 TV Guide On Screen™ 9, 42, 58
TV/VIDEO button 72, 73
L R
Labeling video inputs 73 V
RECALL button 95
Lamp mode 80 V-Chip blocking (Locks menu)
Remote control:
Lamp unit replacement 96–99
Battery installation 33
128–130 VCR connection 15–20
Device code table 38, 39
Language selection 46 Video cables 13
Effective range 32
Last mode memory feature 95 Video input labels 73
Functional key chart 34, 35
LED indications 10, 124 Video input lock 98
Learning about the buttons
Locking video inputs 98 VOLUME button 10, 37, 89
31
LOCKS menu 96 Operational feature reset 37 W, X
Channels, blocking 98 Programming 36 Warranty:
Enable rating blocking 97 Searching and sampling the U.S. 132
Front Panel lock (Control code 36 Canada 133
panel lock) 99
Volume lock feature 37 WOW™, SRS® 91
GameTimer™ 99 Restore TV factory defaults 57
xD-Picture Card™ 101, 102
New PIN code 96 RJ-45 (LAN) cable 30
Unlocking programs RJ-45 (THINC™) connection
temporarily 98 30
Video inputs, locking 98 Router 30
S
Memory cards 101–105 Safety, care, installation, and
Memory Stick™ memory cards service 2–5
101, 102 SAP sound 89
Menu system 40, 41 Satellite receiver connection
MMC memory cards 101, 102 17
MP3 101, 104-105 Sub-bass (SBS) 90
MPEG-2 digital video signals Scrolling the TheaterWide®
25 picture 79
MPEG noise reduction 86 SD (Secure Digital™) memory
MTS feature 89 cards 101, 102
MUTE button 89 Service 4
Network addres 106 Setup, TV 41, 46
Setup, TV Guide On Screen®
system 42
Sleep timer 93
Speakers ON/OFF 92
Specifications 131
SRS 3D 91
Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.
135
TOSHIBA AMERICA CONSUMER PRODUCTS, L.L.C.
HEAD OFFICE: 82 TOTOWA ROAD, WAYNE, NJ 07470, U.S.A.
NATIONAL SERVICE DIVISION:1420-B TOSHIBA DRIVE, LEBANON, TN 37087, U.S.A.

TOSHIBA OF CANADA LTD.

HEAD OFFICE: 191 McNABB STREET, MARKHAM, ONTARIO, L3R 8H2, CANADA – TEL: (905) 470-5400
SERVICE CENTERS:
TORONTO: 191 McNABB STREET, MARKHAM, ONTARIO L3R 8H2, CANADA – TEL: (905) 470- 5400
MONTREAL: 18050 TRANS CANADA, KIRKLAND, QUEBEC, H9J 4A1, CANADA – TEL: (514) 390-7766
VANCOUVER: 22171 FRASERWOOD WAY, RICHMOND, B.C., V6W 1J5, CANADA – TEL: (604) 303-2500

MANUFACTURED BY
TOSHIBA AMERICA CONSUMER PRODUCTS, L.L.C.

CableClear, Cinema Series, ColorStream, StableSound, and TheaterWide are registered trademarks of Toshiba America Consumer Products, L.L.C.
Channel Browser, GameTimer, SurfLock, Symbio, Quick Restart, TheaterNet, and THINC are trademarks of Toshiba America Consumer Products, L.L.C.
Digital Light Processing, DLP™ and the DLP medallion are trademarks of Texas Instruments.

PRINTED IN USA
(05-09)
Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.